Help Country Package Manual Country Package En

CORESUITE MANUALVERSION 3.30

Now also available as F1 help!

All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means -graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, orinformation storage and retrieval systems - without the written permission of the publisher.

Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registeredtrademarks of the respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to thesetrademarks.

While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisherand the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resultingfrom the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs andsource code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author be liablefor any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have beencaused directly or indirectly by this document.

Printed: November 2011 Windisch, Switzerland

CORESUITE MANUAL

© 2011 coresystems ag

CONTENT

CORESUITE ADMINISTRATION1 13

13Administration 1.1

13Sip management 1.1.1

15License management 1.1.2

16Global module configuration 1.1.3

17User module configuration 1.1.4

18Cloud Administration 1.2

CORESUITE ACCOUNTING2 19

19Objectives and General Information 2.1

21Mapping window 2.2

24Mapping Overview 2.2.1

26Subtotals, classes and class groups 2.3

31Free classes 2.4

31Properties 2.5

32coresuite accounting reference guide 2.6

32User tables 2.6.1

2.6.1.1 COR_ACCT_CONF 32

2.6.1.2 COR_DOC6 32

2.6.1.3 COR_FIN_ACCTCALCDEF 33

2.6.1.4 COR_FIN_ACCTCFLOW 33

2.6.1.5 COR_FIN_ACCTCLASS 33

2.6.1.6 COR_FIN_ACCTCLSGRP 34

2.6.1.7 COR_FIN_ACCTCLSPRP 34

2.6.1.8 COR_FIN_ACCTCORMSK 34

2.6.1.9 COR_FIN_ACCTGRPMSK 35

2.6.1.10 COR_FIN_ACCTGRPPRP 35

2.6.1.11 COR_KPI1 35

2.6.1.12 COR_OKPI 36

37FAQ 2.6.2

2.6.2.1 How can I adjust the description of account classes? 37

2.6.2.2 How can I import user-defined properties? 38

2.6.2.3 How can I adjust reports prior to version 2.5? 38

Restoring layouts with old datasource 392.6.2.3.1

2.6.2.3.1.1 Balance (FIN05402) 41

2.6.2.3.1.2 ProfitAndLoss (FIN05404) 41

2.6.2.3.1.3 Movements (FIN05407) 41

2.6.2.3.1.4 Movements2 (FIN05420) 41

2.6.2.3.1.5 Journal Entry (FIN05419) 41

2.6.2.3.1.6 BP Movements (FIN05410) 41

2.6.2.3.1.7 Budget (FIN05408, FIN05409) 41

Queries version 2.5 422.6.2.3.2

2.6.2.3.2.1 Balance 43

2.6.2.3.2.2 ProfitAndLoss 47

2.6.2.3.2.3 AccountHeader 51

2.6.2.3.2.4 AccountDetails 52

2.6.2.3.2.5 Movements 53

2.6.2.3.2.6 AP_Invoice_Description 55

2.6.2.3.2.7 JournalEntry 56

2.6.2.3.2.8 GPHeader 57

2.6.2.3.2.9 GPDetails 58

2.6.2.3.2.10 Budget 59

72CORESUITE layouts, reports & dashboards (in EN only) 2.6.3

2.6.3.1 Overview 73

2.6.3.2 Banking 86

Outgoing Payment - LD (BAN1000) 862.6.3.2.1

2.6.3.3 Documents 86

Document DIN - CR (DOC40000) 862.6.3.3.1

2.6.3.3.1.1 Example 88

2.6.3.3.1.2 Print definitions 89

2.6.3.4 Financial Reports 90

Profit and Loss 902.6.3.4.1

2.6.3.4.1.1 Profit and Loss - KPI (FIN05438) 90

2.6.3.4.1.2 Profit and Loss (FIN05404) 91

2.6.3.4.1.3 Profit and Loss by Template (FIN05405) 92

2.6.3.4.1.4 Profit and Loss by Profitcenter - KPI (FIN05430) 93

Balance Sheet 942.6.3.4.2

2.6.3.4.2.1 Balance Sheet - LD (FIN05402) 94

2.6.3.4.2.2 Balance Sheet Template - LD (FIN05403) 95

2.6.3.4.2.3 Opening Balance - LD (FIN05413) 96

Journal / Statement 972.6.3.4.3

2.6.3.4.3.1 Print Journal Transactions from SAP Form 97

2.6.3.4.3.2 Journal Transactions - SAP Form (FIN60006) 99

2.6.3.4.3.3 Journal Transactions (FIN05420) 100

2.6.3.4.3.4 Trial Balance - LD (FIN05533) 102

2.6.3.4.3.5 Journal Entry - LD (FIN05419) 103

Budget 1042.6.3.4.4

2.6.3.4.4.1 Profit and Loss vs. Budget - KPI (FIN05439) 104

2.6.3.4.4.2 Profit and Loss vs. Budget (FIN05408) 106

2.6.3.4.4.3 Profit and Loss vs Budget Dashboard - XC (FIN600001) 107

2.6.3.4.4.4 Budget Report - KPI (FIN05440) 109

2.6.3.4.4.5 Budget Report (FIN05433) 110

Customer (A/R) 1112.6.3.4.5

2.6.3.4.5.1 Customer (A/R) Ageing Report - LD (FIN05406) 111

2.6.3.4.5.2 Customer (A/R) Ageing Statement - LD (FIN05418) 113

2.6.3.4.5.3 Customer (A/R) Account Journals - LD (FIN05410) 114

Vendor (A/P) 1152.6.3.4.6

2.6.3.4.6.1 Vendor (A/P) Ageing Report - LD (FIN05406) 115

2.6.3.4.6.2 Vendor (A/P) Account Journals - LD (FIN05410) 117

Lists 1182.6.3.4.7

2.6.3.4.7.1 Chart of Accounts - LD (FIN05401) 118

2.6.3.4.7.2 Chart of Accounts KPI - LD (FIN05401) 119

2.6.3.4.7.3 Chart of Accounts Template - LD (FIN05401) 120

Cash Flow 1212.6.3.4.8

Tax Report 1222.6.3.4.9

2.6.3.4.9.1 VAT by Code (FIN05414) 122

2.6.3.4.9.2 VAT by Account (FIN05415) 122

2.6.3.4.9.3 Tax Report Switzerland (FIN05450) - CH Only 122

2.6.3.4.9.4 Tax Report Switzerland 01.01.2010 - 30.06.2010 (FIN60002) - CH Only 123

2.6.3.5 Sales Reports 123

Sales Revenue Dashboard - XC (SAR130003) 1232.6.3.5.1

Documents - Sales - LD (SAR06000) 1252.6.3.5.2

Sales Pivot (SAR06001) 1272.6.3.5.3

Sales Backorder Report - SAP Form (SAR130004) 1282.6.3.5.4

2.6.3.6 Service 130

Service Dashboard - XC (SRV140000) 1302.6.3.6.1

CORESUITE LIQUIDITY PACKAGE3 131

132Cash Flow Statement (FIN60004) 3.1

132Window Parameter: Cash Flow Statement (FIN60004) 3.1.1

133Customer Payment Rating (FIN60007) 3.2

133Window Parameter: Customer Payment Rating (FIN60007) 3.2.1

134Liquidity Forecast (FIN60000) 3.3

134Window Parameter: Liquidity Forecast (FIN60000) 3.3.1

137Define Installments 3.4

CORESUITE CUSTOMIZE4 139

139System requirements 4.1

140Introduction 4.2

141Rules 4.3

143Description of forms 4.4

144Optimizer 4.4.1

4.4.1.1 Event Logger 148

4.4.1.2 Editors 150

coresuite customize editor 1504.4.1.2.1

Regular expression editor (RegEx Editor) 1524.4.1.2.2

coresuite customize SQL editor 1534.4.1.2.3

155Item Placement 4.4.2

158Function Button 4.4.3

160New Items 4.4.4

163New Menu 4.4.5

165Extended Code 4.4.6

166Export / Import 4.4.7

4.4.7.1 Export Rules 166

4.4.7.2 Import Rules 168

Import Example Rules (Examples) 1704.4.7.2.1

Delete Rules 1724.4.7.2.2

173Import Excel rows to UDT 4.4.8

176UDT Handler 4.4.9

4.4.9.1 General 177

4.4.9.2 Fields 179

181Right-click menu / Wizard 4.5

182Add CFL 4.5.1

184Hide field 4.5.2

186Color field 4.5.3

188Lock field 4.5.4

189Make field mandatory 4.5.5

190Add folder 4.5.6

192Move Field 4.5.7

195Copy UDF to main window 4.5.8

198coresuite customize reference guide 4.6

198Authorizations 4.6.1

200Basic skills - Coding 4.6.2

4.6.2.1 Matrix 200

4.6.2.2 Reading values 201

4.6.2.3 Creating items 201

4.6.2.4 Creating grids 202

203User-defined tables 4.6.3

204Install external DLLs 4.6.4

206FormType 4.6.5

208Installed example rules 4.6.6

212LinkedObjectType 4.6.7

216PaneLevel 4.6.8

218Reading parameters 4.6.9

219SAP windows 4.6.10

220Translation parameters 4.6.11

222Practical example 1 - Validation 4.6.12

224Practical example 2 - Display all prices 4.6.13

4.6.13.1 Code for practical example 2 226

227Practical example 3 - UDT Handler 4.6.14

CORESUITE ENTERPRISE SEARCH5 232

233Quick access 5.1


235Option 1 - Object search 5.3

236Search Settings 5.3.1

5.3.1.1 Search only in my documents 236

5.3.1.2 Include document lines 237

5.3.1.3 Include closed documents 237

5.3.1.4 Include canceled documents 237

5.3.1.5 Included categories 238

5.3.1.6 Searchable fields 239

Default searchable fields 2405.3.1.6.1

242Search types 5.3.2

5.3.2.1 Indexed search 242

5.3.2.2 Free text search 244

246Option 2 - All my own open documents 5.4

247Option 3 - Recent modified objects 5.5

248Legend of the icons 5.6

CORESUITE DESIGNER6 249


250Installation 6.2

251Support and Service 6.3

252Authorizations 6.4

252Data sources 6.4.1

6.4.1.1 Setting user authorizations 252

6.4.1.2 Own queries 252

253Description of forms 6.5

253Configuration 6.5.1

6.5.1.1 General 254

6.5.1.2 Text 256

6.5.1.3 Preview 258

6.5.1.4 Install 259

6.5.1.5 Select Grid 260

6.5.1.6 Email(Smtp) 261

6.5.1.7 Startlayout 263

6.5.1.8 Batchprint 264

6.5.1.9 Editor 266

267Layoutmanagement 6.5.2

6.5.2.1 Export 270

6.5.2.2 Import 273

6.5.2.3 Reinstall 275

6.5.2.4 Activate / Deactivate 275

276Layoutdefinition 6.5.3

6.5.3.1 Queries 278

6.5.3.2 Parameters 280

6.5.3.3 Details 282

6.5.3.4 Printer 283

6.5.3.5 Users 285

6.5.3.6 External Report 286

Templates 2916.5.3.6.1

6.5.3.7 Menu 292

294Printdefinition 6.5.4

6.5.4.1 Documents 296

6.5.4.2 Extended Definition 298

6.5.4.3 Email/Fax 300

6.5.4.4 BP 302

303Functions menu 6.5.5

6.5.5.1 Open Data Viewer 303

6.5.5.2 Open Querygenerator 304

6.5.5.3 Open Querymanager 305

6.5.5.4 Open Texts 306

Translate 3086.5.5.4.1

coresuite editors 3096.5.5.4.2

6.5.5.4.2.1 coresuite Editor 309

6.5.5.4.2.2 coresuite Script Editor 309

6.5.5.5 Open Parameters 310

6.5.5.6 Open Formtypes 312

313Reportwizard 6.5.6

320Text List 6.5.7

322Sample Queries 6.5.8

323coresuite designer reference guide 6.6

323Practical example 1 - Creating a simple layout 6.6.1

6.6.1.1 Create printdefinition 325

Create formtype 3266.6.1.1.1

6.6.1.2 Create parameter 326

6.6.1.3 Create query 327

6.6.1.4 Create layoutdefinition 328

6.6.1.5 Format the layout 329

6.6.1.6 Finished layout 330

331Practical example 2 - Multilingual document 6.6.2

6.6.2.1 Adjust printdefinition 332

6.6.2.2 Create promotion text 332

6.6.2.3 Create translations for the promotion text 332

6.6.2.4 Adjust the layout using coresuite designer 333

6.6.2.5 Check the layout 333

334Practical example 3 - Parameters 6.6.3

6.6.3.1 Create query 335

6.6.3.2 Create layoutdefinition 336


6.6.3.4 Adjust the order of parameters on the form 338

6.6.3.5 Define standard values for the parameters 339

341Practical example 4 - Select Grid 6.6.4

6.6.4.1 Layoutdefinition for the letter 342

6.6.4.2 Query for Business Partners 343

6.6.4.3 Layoutdefinition for Select Grid 344

6.6.4.4 Create formtype 346


6.6.4.6 Printdefinition for Select Grid 348

350General 6.6.5

6.6.5.1 BatchPrinting 350

Step 1 - Define query 3506.6.5.1.1

Step 2 - Create SAP Business One alert 3526.6.5.1.2

Step 3 - Adjust coresuite designer configuration 3526.6.5.1.3

6.6.5.2 Remote Printing 353

6.6.5.3 Copy Queries 354

Copies using UDFs 3556.6.5.3.1

Number of copies depending on country of BP 3566.6.5.3.2

6.6.5.4 Printing, Exporting, Displaying 357

Printing 3576.6.5.4.1

6.6.5.4.1.1 Step 1 - Printdefinition 358

6.6.5.4.1.2 Step 2 - Layoutdefinition 358

6.6.5.4.1.3 Step 3 - Differences in the layout 359

PDF export 3616.6.5.4.2

E-Mail 3626.6.5.4.3

364System parameters 6.6.6

366Dealing with marketing documents 6.6.7

368Integrated designer - Sharpshooter 6.6.8

6.6.8.1 LayoutHelper 369

Functions 3696.6.8.1.1

6.6.8.1.1.1 Basic Principles 369

6.6.8.1.1.2 Example 369

Available functions 3736.6.8.1.2

6.6.8.1.2.1 Overview over all functions 373

6.6.8.1.2.2 AddAttachement 376

6.6.8.1.2.3 AddHyperlink 378

6.6.8.1.2.4 BookmarkText 379

6.6.8.1.2.5 CreateTableFromText 380

6.6.8.1.2.6 Date 384

6.6.8.1.2.7 DrawImage 385

6.6.8.1.2.8 Fstr 386

6.6.8.1.2.9 GetDesc 387

6.6.8.1.2.10 GetDimensions 389

6.6.8.1.2.11 GetEANCheckDigit 390

6.6.8.1.2.12 GetFormattedAddress 391

6.6.8.1.2.13 GetMLDesc 392

6.6.8.1.2.14 IsEmpty 393

6.6.8.1.2.15 IsPurchase / IsSales 394

6.6.8.1.2.16 MultiLine 395

6.6.8.1.2.17 MultiLine RTF 396

6.6.8.1.2.18 OneNewLine 397

6.6.8.1.2.19 OpenLayout 398

6.6.8.1.2.20 OpenObject 399

6.6.8.1.2.21 OpenPrintdef 400

6.6.8.1.2.22 ParamDate 401

6.6.8.1.2.23 ParamDateTime 402

6.6.8.1.2.24 QueryData 403

6.6.8.1.2.25 QueryDataDate 404

6.6.8.1.2.26 ReplaceTextParam 405

6.6.8.1.2.27 WeekOfYear 406

6.6.8.1.2.28 WeekOfYearISO8601 407

getData / Data 4086.6.8.1.3

Hyperlink (Drill Down Arrows) 4086.6.8.1.4

Grouping Data 4096.6.8.1.5

Open the Designer 4106.6.8.1.6

Page properties 4116.6.8.1.7

Pivot Tables 4126.6.8.1.8

413Crystal Reports Designer 6.6.9

6.6.9.1 Opening Crystal Reports Designer 414

6.6.9.2 File storage 416

6.6.9.3 Multi-language reports 417

6.6.9.4 Multi-layouts 418

6.6.9.5 Pre-defined datasources 419

6.6.9.6 Remote designing 421

6.6.9.7 Subreports links 422

424Crystal Dashboard Designer (formerly XCelsius) 6.6.10

6.6.10.1 Opening Crystal Dashboard Designer 425

6.6.10.2 Data transfer 427

6.6.10.3 File storage 430

6.6.10.4 Flash file integration 431

6.6.10.5 Multi-language dashboards 432

6.6.10.6 Simple XCelsius XML vs. XCelsius XML 433

6.6.10.7 Refresh interval 434

6.6.10.8 Sample dashboards 435

Sample Column Chart - Stock (GEN70002) 4366.6.10.8.1

Sample Gauge - Finance (GEN70001) 4386.6.10.8.2

Sample Pie Chart - Sales (GEN70002) 4416.6.10.8.3

444FAQ 6.6.11

6.6.11.1 Document_88 vs Document Datasource 445

RowBatchNumbers 4476.6.11.1.1

RowSerialNumbers 4506.6.11.1.2

6.6.11.2 How to use new Datasource 453

6.6.11.3 How to adjust VAT Subtotals 454

6.6.11.4 How to adjust Batch Number details 456

6.6.11.5 How to adjust Serial Number details 458

6.6.11.6 How to fix sign errors in payments 460

13CORESUITE ADMINISTRATION

CORESUITE ADMINISTRATION1

1.1 Administration

1.1.1 Sip management

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite administration > Administration > Sip management

Window

Fields

Name This column displays the name of the add-on.

Version This column displays the version of the add-on.

File name This column displays the name of the .sip file.

Date This column displays the date on which the .sip file was created.

Changelog The symbol links to a website with more information.

Install [Button] Select the module that you want to install and choose Install (see below).

Hide Sip[Button]

Select a .sip file and choose Hide Sip, to stop it being displayed (see below).

Show all Activate this checkbox to display hidden .sip files again (see below)

... [Button] Choose this button to enter the path to a .sip-file.


Import [Button] Choose Import if you have used ... to enter a path to a .sip file that you now want toimport.

Downloadupdates [Button]

If you choose Download updates, the system searches for the latest updates and liststhem, if any are available.

OK [Button] Choose OK to accept all changes and to close the window.

Add-on Manager[Button]

Choose Add-on Manager to open the Add-On Manager (for more information, refer to theofficial SAP Business One documentation).

Installing modulesTo install a module, choose the relevant module in the coresuite administration window and choose Install. It ispossible to install/update several modules at once.

Updating modulesHere you can install new modules and update existing modules. There are two ways to do this:

1. Using Download Updates Choose Download updates. This downloads the new modules directly from the coresystems ag internet server.The system will only download modules that you have signed up for.

2. ManuallyIf, for example, you do not have an internet connection, you can also import modules manually. To do so,download the modules on another computer that is connected to the internet. You will find the modules on thewebsite http://www.coresystems.ch/modul_download. Once downloaded, copy the modules on a flash drive orburn them onto a CD-ROM and then save them on the computer without internet connection. Use the button ...to enter the path to the .sip file and choose Import.

Hiding Sips/Show SipsYou can hide .sip files that you do not yet want to install. By doing so, you can prevent another superuser fromaccidentally installing the module. Select the module you want to hide and choose Hide Sip. To display hiddenmodules again, activate the checkbox Show all. All modules will be displayed again and can be selected andimported.

After installing the relevant modules, you must restart coresuite for the changes to become effective. Todo so, choose Add-on Manager in the window coresuite administration or follow the menu path Modules> Administration > Add-Ons > Add-On Manager. Go to the tab Installed Add-Ons and select the add-on coresuite. Choose Stop, wait for a moment, then select the add-on again and choose Start torestart the add-on.

For some modules, another module might be a prerequisite. In such cases, the system issues amessage. Install the indicated module and then proceed with installing the actual module.

http://www.coresystems.ch/modul_download


1.1.2 License management

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite administration > Administration > Lizenz management

Window

Fields

User Select the user for which you want to change the settings.

Use license Activate this checkbox if you want to assign the relevant license to the selected user.

Name This column displays the name of the module.

Version This column displays the version of the module.

Available Here you can see how many licenses are available still/in total.

Valid until This column displays the expiry date of the license.

... [Button] Enter the path to the license if there is no internet connection.

Import [Button] Choose Import if you have used ... to enter a path to a license that you now want toimport.

Downloadlicense [Button]

Choose Download license to download the license(es) directly from the coresystemsPartner Portal.


Add-OnManager[Button]


ProcedureUsually, you can use Download license to download licenses. If, for some reason, you do not have an internetconnection, you can also download the license using another computer (with internet connection). You canthen enter the path to the license and import it by choosing Import.


1.1.3 Global module configuration

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite administration > Administration > Global moduleconfiguration

Window

Fields



Is active Define if the module should be active or not on the global level:Yes - The module is active on global level.No - The module is inactive on global level.

Info The symbol links to a website with more information.





1.1.4 User module configuration

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite administration > Administration > User module configuration

Window

Fields

User Select the user for which you want to change the settings.



Is active Define if the module is active for the selected user or not. You can choose from thefollowing options:

InactiveActiveDefault - If you choose this option, the system will copy the setting defined on the tab Globale module configuration.





1.2 Cloud Administration

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite administration > Cloud Administration

If you choose this menu entry, you will be redirected to the website https://www.coresuite.com/store/#login,where you can log in.

https://www.coresuite.com/store/#login

19CORESUITE ACCOUNTING

CORESUITE ACCOUNTING2

2.1 Objectives and General Information

To access coresuite accounting, go to Modules > Financials > coresuite accounting > Mapping.

A window appears where you can map the accounts, i.e. assign them to classes (three-digit numbers).

The coresuite accounting offers the following advantages:

Overview / contraction of the key figures on one page (for example income statement)Meaningful financial ratios (KPI or Key Performance Indicators)Due to a standardization (division into classes and class groups) it will be easier to poll more complexfinancial ratios such as liquidity levels, profit margins, etc. With the help of these classifications and theresulting Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), all responsible people get a holistic overview over the companyin short time.Standardized financial reports for SAP Business One customers that look the same for all customers(independent of industry, country, etc.). The standardized reports can easily be compared.Sums and consolidated data that cannot be modified. This results in fewer issues for the customers andcuts the number of support cases.

The mapping makes it possible to achieve international standards and comparisons. Once the mapping isconfigured correctly, it is possible to display intermediate results (e.g. gross profit, EBIT) and the significanceof the reports increases. Furthermore, upcoming versions of coresuite accounting will contain new reportsbased on the mapping configuration. Thanks to the mapping it is also possible to create analytical evaluations(e.g. business assessment or KPI). These can be standardized or customized.

Most financial reports of coresuite accounting will work without configuring the mapping. However, the correct


configuration will bring many benefits to the customer.

coresystems ag created the content of these financial reports in collaboration with local partners and hasoptimized them as far as possible. However, coresystems ag does not assume any responsibility regarding thecompleteness of the country-specific fiscal and legal requirements and cannot be held liable by third parties.


2.2 Mapping window

coresuite country package is delivered with a version of coresuite accounting that contains the mapping for therelevant country. coresystems has created the mapping in collaboration with partners in the relevant countries.

When installing coresuite accounting for the first time, we recommend that the SAP partner or theend-customer's accountant (maybe even together with the tax advisor) reviews the mapping andmakes adjustments if necessary.

AccessModules > Financials > coresuite accounting > Mapping

Window

Fields

Level 1 Select the relevant SAP drawer. You can choose from the following options:AssetsLiabilitiesEquityRevenuesCost of SalesExpensesFinancingOther Revenues and Expenses

Only notassigned

Activate this checkbox to only display accounts that have not been assigned.

Type This field displays the type of account:Balance SheetProfit and Loss

This is assigned automatically by coresuite accounting.

Level 2 This column displays the sub-categories of the selected SAP drawer. You can compress/expand these sub-categories.


Level 3 This column displays the sub-categories of Level 2. You can compress/expand these sub-categories.

AccountCode This column displays the code of the relevant G/L account according to the company'sChart of Accounts.

Name This column displays the name of the relevant G/L account according to the company'sChart of Accounts.

Class Select the class (three-digit number) from the drop-down list, to which you want to assignthe relevant account. You must assign each account to a class.The four-digit numbers in the drop-down list are class groups: These are of informationpurposes only and cannot be selected.

OK / Update Choose OK to close the window.Choose Update to save your changes.

Cancel Choose Cancel if you made changes that you do not want to save.

Import Choose Import to import a mapping that has already been defined.

Importing a mapping overwrites any existing mapping.

Export Choose Export to export the existing mapping. Define where you want to save the mappingand choose Save.The mapping will be exported as .xml file.

MappingOverview

Choose Mapping Overview to display the items in a PDF file. Also see Mapping Overview.

Compress/Expand

Choose Compress/Expand to display/hide all items in the list.

ProcedureEach account must be assigned to a class (three-digit number). If a class is unused, it will not appear in thereport. Some classes may not be needed in some countries. In this case, they can simply be ignored.

The class codes are pre-installed and must not be changed. The class tables are managed bycoresystems ag. If you have suggestions for improvements, please let us know([email protected]). When upgrading coresuite accounting, the tables will be overwritten withthe new standard tables.

You can map several lines at once: Select the relevant lines and select a class for one of theselected lines. All other selected lines will be assigned to the same class.


Unassigned accountsIf the Mapping Overview contains unassigned accounts, these will be listed at the beginning of the overview:

If one or several accounts are not assigned, they cannot be displayed in the relevant KPI reports. The KPI reports can be found here: Modules > coresuite reports > Financials > all reports with "KPI"in the title. For KPI reports, the mapping must be complete; otherwise, the system issues an error message.


2.2.1 Mapping Overview

The Mapping Overview offers an overview over the G/L accounts. The document is displayed in PDF format

which can easily be saved, printed, sent via e-mail, etc. By choosing (Edit Preview), you can open thedocument in Report Sharp-Shooter, change the layout and save the document as Report Sharp-Shooter file (*.rsd).

ProcedureChoose Mapping Overview in the Mapping window to display the window Parameter: Mapping Overview.

Window

Fields

Layoutdescription

Overview of the chart of accounts which is an index of all general ledger (G/L) accountsused by one or more companies.

Show last level(Text)

The last level contains the data from the columns AccountCode and Name.Choose Yes to display the last level (see example below).Choose No if you do not want to display the last level (see example below).

Default Values If you choose Default Values, the last level will be displayed.

OK Choose OK display the Mapping Overview.

Cancel Choose Cancel to close the window without displaying the Mapping Overview.


Mapping Overview with last level Mapping Overview without last level


2.3 Subtotals, classes and class groups

For financial reports, all accounts are assigned to a specific class (three-digit number). These classes areassigned to a class group (four-digit number). This assignment cannot be changed. Subtotals (two-digitnumber) are calculated according to the class groups and classes. Any financial report which is named with"KPI" (Key Performance Indicators) is based on the allocation of accounts to classes.

Below is a list of all subtotals (two-digit number in brackets), class groups (four-digit number) and classes(three-digit number) along with a brief explanation of which account type should be assigned to the relevantclass.

Description / Subtotal / Class Group / Class Description

BALANCE SHEET

Assets (10) The sum of all assets

1000 : Cash at Bank and In Hand Banks and cash

100 : Petty Cash Physical money that can be accessed immediately

110 : Cash at Bank All currently available bank accounts

115 : Bank Loan Bank loans granted to third parties, which can beclaimed at short notice

1005 : Securities Securities

120 : Securities Short-term securities, which are easily recoverable

1010 : Short-term Debtors Short-term debts (domestic, foreign,intercompany)

130 : Short-term Debtors domestic Short-term domestic debts without intercompany

140 : Short-term Debtors foreign Short-term foreign debts without intercompany

150 : Short-term Debtors intercompany Short-term intercompany debts

1015 : Other Debtors Other Debtors

151 : Other Debtors Other debtors

1020 : Long-term Debtors Long-term debts (domestic, foreign,intercompany)

160 : Long-term Debtors domestic Long-term domestic debts without intercompany

170 : Long-term Debtors foreign Long-term foreign debts without intercompany

180 : Long-term Debtors intercompany Long-term intercompany debts

1025 : Deferred tax Deferred tax

187 : Deferred tax (Assets) Deferred tax (Assets)

1030 : Prepayments Prepaid expenses and not yet received income(deferred and accrued assets)

190 : Prepayments Prepaid expenses and not yet received income(deferred and accrued assets)

1035 : Debit Differences Debit Differences

197 : Debit Differences Debit Differences

1040 : Stock Sum of all stocks

200 : Stock Stocks in general, including finished and semi-finishedgoods and raw materials

1045 : Work in Progress (WIP) Work in Progress (WIP)



205 : Work In Progress Work in Progress (WIP)

1049 : Financial Assets Long-term financial assets (includinginvestments, awarded loans)

210 : Financial Assets Long-term financial assets (including investments,awarded loans)

1050 : Tangible Fixed Assets Tangible assets (including real estate, furniture)

220 : Tangible Fixed Assets For example machinery, furniture, IT equipment, motorvehicles, tools, appliances, etc.

230 : Land and Building Real estate

1060 : Intangible Fixed Assets Intangible assets such as patents and licenses,and capitalized services

240 : Capitalized Costs For example formation expenses and businessexpansion costs

250 : Intangible Fixed Assets For example patents, licenses, goodwill, etc.

1065 : Assets not assigned Asset accounts which cannot be assigned

255 : Assets not assigned This is a collection of asset accounts that cannot bespecifically assigned to any other class.

Liabilities (20) The sum of all debts and obligations

1070 : Short-term liabilities Short-term liabilities (including accruedliabilities)

260 : Short-term liabilities domestic Short-term domestic liabilities without intercompany

270 : Short-term liabilities foreign Short-term foreign liabilities without intercompany

280 : Short-term liabilities inter company Short-term intercompany liabilities

1075 : Other liabilities Other liabilities

285 : Other liabilities Other liabilities

1080 : Long term liabilities Long-term liabilities

310 : Liabilities Due After One Year domestic Long-term domestic liabilities without intercompany (<5 years)

320 : Liabilities Due After One Year foreign Long-term foreign liabilities without intercompany (< 5years)

330 : Liabilities Due After One Year inter company Long-term intercompany liabilities

335 : Liabilities due after 5 years Long-term liabilities which are due after 5 years ormore

1083 : Deferred Income Deferred Income

261 : Deferred income Income received during an accounting period for whichthe company has not yet delivered goods andservices.

1084 : Deferred tax Deferred tax

271 : Deferred tax (Liabilities) Deferred tax (Liabilities)

1085 : Accruals Accruals

290 : Accruals Not yet paid expenses and income received inadvance (deferred and accrued assets)

300 : Provisions Short-term liabilities, which are still uncertain (reason,date or amount)



340 : Other Provisions Long-term liabilities which are still uncertain (reason,date or amount).

Equity (30) The sum of all assets minus liabilities (debts /obligations)

1090: Capital Share capital, subscribed capital

350 : Capital Share capital, issued capital

1100 : Profit and retained earnings Equity that cannot be allocated to share capital(e.g. profits, reserves)

360 : Profit and retained earnings For example reserves, profit and loss, retainedearnings, provision for own shares, capital reserve

1110 : Liabilities not assigned Asset accounts that cannot be assigned

370 : Liabilities not assigned This is a collection of liability accounts that cannot bespecifically assigned to any other class.

PROFIT AND LOSS

5000 : Turnover Operational revenue from the core business, includingstock changes and capitalized service

500 : Revenue realized Revenue from the sales / distribution / retail, etc.( "general" sales class)

505 : Services Option to additionally divide revenues into services

507 : Revenue from Production Revenue from production

510 : Change in Stock Stock changes for products and production work inprogress or semi-finished and finished goods.

520 : Revenue unrealized Internally produced and capitalized assets

Turnover (40) All revenues from the core business, includingcapitalized service and decrease in profits.

5010 : Cost of Sales Miscellaneous expenses and purchases directlyrelated to transactions

530 : Cost of Sales Miscellaneous expenses and purchases, which aredirectly related to transactions

Gross Profit (50) Revenues minus direct costs (material andproduct purchasing) not including personnelcosts.

5020 : Miscellaneous Revenue Operational revenue that does not result from thecore business

540 : Miscellaneous Revenue Operational income, which does not result from thecore business

Operating Gross Profit (60) Gross Profit minus Miscellaneous Revenue (540)

5025 : Salary and Benefits Salary, social insurance, other charges

550 : Salary & Benefits For example salaries, social insurance, expenses,personnel expenses

550 : Social Costs Social insurance, other social costs which are notassigned as salary and benefits

Operating Gross Profit after Salary (65) Revenues minus direct costs (material andproduct purchasing) including personnel costs



5030 : Total Costs Operating expenses from ordinary activities

560 : Utilities For example rent, energy, cleaning

570 : Tax For example industrial or motor vehicle tax

580 : Insurance For example company insurance (excluding motorvehicles)

585 : Rent & Rates For example rent

590 : Other Costs Other costs which should be in a separate groupaccording to the SAP end customer.

600 : Motor Vehicle Expenses For example current costs for motor vehicles, repairs,motor vehicle insurance, leasing

610 : Travel & Entertainment For example advertising, marketing, entertainmentexpenses

620 : Freight For example packaging, freight, sales commissions,warranty costs

640 : Maintenance and Repair Maintenance, repair and replacement of fixed assets,real estate, etc.

650 : General and Administrative Expenses Other costs that are directly related to the operation

700 : Control Cost Accounting This class can be used for an accounting transfer ofindirect costs (e.g. rent and/or personnel costs) indirect costs which will be posted to the gross profit.

Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation,and Amortization (EBITDA) (70)

Operating profit excluding the financing of thecompany, the external personal achievementsand not cash-flow-related write-offs

5035 : Depreciation Depreciation of assets

630 : Depreciation Depreciation on investments (loss due to retirement)

Earnings Before interest and Taxes (EBIT) (75) Operating profit excluding the financing of thecompany, the external personal achievementsand the tax burden (location).

5040 : Financial Expenses Financial expenses and neutral / non-business /extraordinary expenses that have not directrelationship to the operating expenses

660 : Interest Charges For example interest expense, default interest, bankcharges, losses from securities, exchange ratedifferences

670 : Other Interest Receivable and Similar Income Neutral / non-operational / extraordinary expenses

5050 : Non-Operating Income Financial income and neutral / non-business /extraordinary income that has not directrelationship with the operating income

680 : Other Interest Receivable For example interest expense, default interest, bankcharges, losses from securities, exchange ratedifferences

690 : Income from Other Fixed Asset Investments Neutral / non-operational / extraordinary income

5060 : Unassigned/Miscellaneous Income accounts that cannot be chargedotherwise

710 : Unassigned / Miscellaneous This is a collection of turnover accounts, which cannotbe specifically assigned to any other class.



Earnings Before Taxes (EBT) (80) Operating profit excluding the tax burden(location)

5070 : Tax on Profit/Loss on Ordinary Activities Sum of corporation taxes

720 : Tax on Profit/Loss on Ordinary Activities Corporation or deferred tax expense

Profit(Loss) (95) Sum of all income and expenses of theenterprise (company's profit)

"Control Cost Accounting" can be used to transfer costs from indirect cost (class group: Total Costs)to direct costs which will be posted to the gross profit.Examples are salaries or rent, which clearly can be assigned directly to a turnover.


Classes are defined in the table COR_FIN_ACCTCLASS.

2.4 Free classes

For each class group coresuite accounting provides so called free classes. You can use these free classes todefine your own account classes.

The original description of the free classes is Free XXX where XXX is the account class code. In order todisplay the correct description, you must adjust the text code of the corresponding free class.

If you need to adjust the description of account classes or class groups for many databases oraccounts we suggest to use the coresuite designer function Text Import. For more information refer tothe FAQ How can I adjust the description of account classes?

2.5 Properties

The coresuite accounting module provides the option to define your own codes and properties for the pre-defined account classes and groups.

There are two user tables COR_FIN_ACCTCLSPRP and COR_FIN_ACCTGRPPRP created with the coresuiteaccounting module which are not filled or adjusted by coresuite. It is up to the user to enter the correct values. The reports are designed to use the user-defined values and properties in case there are any defined. If nouser-defined values exist the predefined values are used.

To import user-defined values in the two user tables COR_FIN_ACCTCLSPRP andCOR_FIN_ACCTGRPPRP we suggest to use the coresuite customize function Import Excel rows toUDT. For more information refer to the FAQ How can I import user-defined properties?


2.6 coresuite accounting reference guide

2.6.1 User tables

The following chapters focus on the user tables which are created during the installation of the coresuiteaccounting module. Only the most important fields are described.You can find these user tables under Tools > User-Defined Windows.

COR_ACCT_CONFCOR_DOC6COR_FIN_ACCTCALCDEFCOR_FIN_ACCTCFLOWCOR_FIN_ACCTCLASSCOR_FIN_ACCTCLSGRPCOR_FIN_ACCTCLSPRPCOR_FIN_ACCTCORMSKCOR_FIN_ACCTGRPMSKCOR_FIN_ACCTGRPPRPCOR_KPI1COR_OKPI

COR_ACCT_CONF2.6.1.1

PurposeThe user table COR_ACCT_CONF is the configuration table of the coresuite accounting module.

Fields

Version Current version of the coresuite accounting module.

If you want to re-install of the coresuite accounting module, simply decrease the version number in thistable by one and restart the coresuite add-on.

COR_DOC62.6.1.2

PurposeThe user table COR_DOC6 is used to store the installments defined with the coresuite liquidity package. Formore information on how to define installments, refer to the documentation of the coresuite liquidity packagemodule.

Fields

ObjType Object type of the document for which the installments are defined.

DocEntry Document entry of the document for which the installments are defined.

InstlmntID Installment ID of the installment defined.

DueDate Due date for the installments.

Percent Percent of the total amount that should be paid with this installment.

Adjusting any values (Add, Update, Delete via direct SQL or user-defined window) in this table is likelyto lead to data corruption, and is not supported. If you adjust any values, you do so at your own risk.


COR_FIN_ACCTCALCDEF2.6.1.3

PurposeThe values in the user table COR_FIN_ACCTCALCDEF are used to define the Subtotals in the KPI reports.

Fields

ClsGroup ID of the class group.

CoreMask ID of the subtotal for the class group.

Adjusting any values (Add, Update, Delete via direct SQL or user-defined window) in this table is notsupported. The values will be overwritten in every update of the coresuite accounting module.

COR_FIN_ACCTCFLOW2.6.1.4

PurposeThe values in the user table COR_FIN_ACCTCFLOW are used to build the structure of the Cash FlowStatement (FIN60004) available in the coresuite liquidity package.

Fields

ClsCode ID of the class.

CFGroup ID of the cash flow group.

CFFactor Factor to multiply balances in this class for the Cash Flow Statement (FIN60004).

Sort Sort order in the Cash Flow Statement (FIN60004).


COR_FIN_ACCTCLASS2.6.1.5

PurposeThe values in the user table COR_FIN_ACCTCLASS define Account Classes which are used to providestandardized and country-independent simple KPI reports. The field for the multi-language functionality allowsfor the naming of the classes.

Fields

ClsCode ID of the actual class (three-digit code).

ClsGroup ID of the class group (four-digit code).

ClsID Internal description of the class in German and English.

ClsDesc Text code used for multi-language functionality of the coresuite designer module to display theclass description in the correct language.

Sort Sort order in the KPI reports.



COR_FIN_ACCTCLSGRP2.6.1.6

PurposeThe values in the user table COR_FIN_ACCTCLSGRP define the names for the class groups. The field for themulti-language functionality allows for the naming of the class groups.

Fields

ClsGroup ID of the class group (four-digit code).

GroupID Internal description of the class group in German and English.

GroupDesc Text code used for multi-language functionality of the coresuite designer module to display theclass group description in the correct language.


COR_FIN_ACCTCLSPRP2.6.1.7

PurposeThe user table COR_FIN_ACCTCLSPRP can be used by the customer to define own properties for accountclasses. Once the properties are defined they are used in the standardized reports.

Fields

ClsCode ID of the actual class (three-digit code). This code is the key to link to the COR_FIN_ACCTCLASS table.

ExternalCode

User-defined code of the class.

InterCompany

Property of the account class to define if it is an account class relevant for Intercompany ('Y')or not ('N').

SortCustom User-defined sort order in the KPI reports.

DeletedF Flag if an entry was deleted ('Y') or is valid ('N').

If you adjust any values (Add, Update, Delete via direct SQL or user-defined window) in this table, youdo so at your own risk.The values in this table will NOT be adjusted or overwritten in updates of the coresuite accountingmodule.

To import user-defined values in this table we suggest to use the Import Excel rows to UDT function ofthe coresuite customize module.

COR_FIN_ACCTCORMSK2.6.1.8

PurposeThe values in the user table COR_FIN_ACCTCORMSK define the name of the Subtotals in the KPI Reports.

Fields

CoreMask ID of the subtotal for the class group.

CoreId Internal description of the subtotal in German and English.

CoreDesc Text code used for multi-language functionality of the coresuite designer module to display thesubtotal description in the correct language.



COR_FIN_ACCTGRPMSK2.6.1.9

PurposeThe values in the user table COR_FIN_ACCTGRPMSK map the drawers in the chart of accounts to thesubtotals for the class groups and provide a standardized separation of P&L and balance sheet.With the help of these fields, the coresuite accounting module can provide simple Key Performance Indicators(KPI) such as "Gross Profit" without the full completion of the class mapping.

Fields

GroupMask Drawer according to the Chart of Accounts in the system.

Typ Type of the group mask. "P" is used for Profit and Loss (P&L) and "B" is used for the BalanceSheet.

CoreMask ID of the subtotal for the class group to link to the table COR_FIN_ACCTCORMSK.

Any adjustments of values (Add, Update, Delete via direct SQL or User-Defined Window) on this usertable are not be supported. The values will be overwritten in every update of the coresuite accounting module.

COR_FIN_ACCTGRPPRP2.6.1.10

PurposeThe user table COR_FIN_ACCTGRPPRP can be used by the customer to define own properties for accountclass groups. Once the properties are defined they are used in the standardized reports.

Fields

ClsGroup ID of the actual class group (four-digit code). This code is the key to link to the COR_FIN_ACCTCLSGRP table.

ExternalCode

User-defined code of the class group.

DeletedF Flag if an entry was deleted ('Y') or is valid ('N')


To import user-defined values in this table we suggest to use the Import Excel rows to UDT function ofthe coresuite customize module.

COR_KPI12.6.1.11

PurposeThe user table COR_KPI1 can be used by the customer to define their own Key Performance Indicators (KPI)used in reports and dashboards.

Fields

KPIEntry ID of the KPI entry. This is the link to the user table COR_OKPI as the header table.


LineNum Line ID of the KPI entry row.

Description Description of the KPI entry row.

ValueNumeric

Numeric value of the KPI as a limit or condition.

ValueAlphaNumeric

Alphanumeric value of the KPI as a limit or condition.

ValueDate Date value of the KPI as a limit or condition.

Unit Unit of measure of the KPI value as limit or condition

ValidFrom Start date from which the KPI is valid.

ValidTo End date until which the KPI is valid.


COR_OKPI2.6.1.12

PurposeThe user table COR_OKPI can be used by the customer to define own Key Performance Indicators (KPI) usedin reports and dashboards.

Fields

KPIEntry ID of the KPI Entry. This is the link to the user table COR_KPI1 as the rows table.

Category Category for the KPI.

Description Description of the KPI Entry.

LinkedObj Name of the table to link the KPI entry with.

LinkedField Name of the field to link the KPI entry with.

LinkedFieldValue

Value of the field when this KPI Entry is valid



2.6.2 FAQ

In our forum you will many questions answers from our community for coresuite accounting:http://forum.coresystems.ch/forum/10-reports-coresuite-accounting/

Other frequent questions include:

I want to adjust the description of many account classes. What is the most efficient way to do this for mayclasses?See answer under How can I adjust the description of account classes?I want to display my companies codes for account classes or class groups in the reports instead of thecodes definedSee answer under How can I import user-defined properties?I have used coresuite accounting for a long time and just upgraded from a version below 2.5 to the latestVersion. I noticed that some of my old reports are not working as expected after the upgrade. How can I fixthis?See answer under How can I adjust reports prior to version 2.5

How can I adjust the description of account classes?2.6.2.1

IssueI do not like the description of the account classes and need to use several free classes. I might need thesame description for several databases.

Solution 1The description of account classes and class groups is stored in the user table SWA_LD_TEXT created bythe coresuite designer module. This table can be accessed via Tools > Default Forms > SWA_LD_TEXT -TextAnother option to find the correct Text Codes is to open the Report Text List - LD (GEN00001) which can beopened from Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Text List - LD (GEN00001).In this report you can search for the text code and select the linked arrow to open the user tableSWA_LD_TEXT at the correct position.

Make sure to adjust the text Code in all relevant languages.

If there are many entries to adjust or if you need to adjust the entries for several databases we suggest to usesolution 2.

Solution 2Adjust the xml file which contains all the Text Codes with description of account classes and groups and usethe Text Import function of the coresuite designer module.

1. Copy the file cor_txt_accountmapping.xml which is stored on the SAP Business One client installation inthe AddOns folder to another location. The default location if the file is C:\Program Files (x86)\SAP\SAPBusiness One\AddOns\COR\coresuite\SWA_LD_PackageBase\text

2. Open the file and adjust the descriptions to your requirements. Ensure to not delete or adjust the XML flagsbut only the description in the corresponding languages.

3. Save the file.4. Import the file in every database via Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer >

Configuration > Text Tab > Import Button.

http://forum.coresystems.ch/forum/10-reports-coresuite-accounting/


How can I import user-defined properties?2.6.2.2

IssueI want to display my companies codes for account classes or class groups in the reports instead of the codesdefined

SolutionImport the codes into the Property Table COR_FIN_ACCTCLSPRP and/or COR_FIN_ACCTGRPPRP with theImport Excel rows to UDT function of the coresuite customize module.For more information on how to use this function refer to the coresuite customize manual.

How can I adjust reports prior to version 2.5?2.6.2.3

As of version 2.5, coresuite accounting (csa) replaces the following datasources with more generic ones:

Balance ProfitAndLossAccountMovements2AccountMovementsJournalEntryBPAccountMovementsBudget

This means that any duplicated layout which uses any of those datasources, will no longer work.

If during installation, csa detects that some layouts will be affected by this change, it will prompt the followingmessage:

If you choose "Remind me later", the layouts will not be removed and the datasources will continue to work.

Each user will be reminded every time coresuite starts

If you choose "Export and Remove", the affected Layouts will be automatically exported:

You can restore the old layouts by following Restoring Layouts with old Datasource


Restoring layouts with old datasource2.6.2.3.1

Step 1 - Import the layout:Import your layout from the file which was was created during the Datasource Update, and open it up in theLayoutdefinition:

You can find the file under %temp%\swald\mycompany\backups

Step 2 - Save the queries in SAP Business One:Overview Grid:In this table you can see which queries are involved and how they are related to each other.

Query1 Query2 Linkfield1 Linkfield2

GPHeader GPDetails ShortName ShortName

In this case you would need to copy the queries GPHeader and GPDetails into SAP Business One.


You have to save the Queries with the exactly same name as before

Step 3 - Remove the System Datasource and add the saved queries:

Link Fields are case sensitive


Balance (FIN05402)2.6.2.3.1.1

Queries:

Query1 Query2 Linkfield1 Linkfield2Balance

ProfitAndLoss (FIN05404)2.6.2.3.1.2

Queries:

Query1 Query2 Linkfield1 Linkfield2ProfitAndLoss

Movements (FIN05407)2.6.2.3.1.3

Queries:

Query1 Query2 Linkfield1 Linkfield2AccountHeader AccountDetails Account Account

Movements2 (FIN05420)2.6.2.3.1.4

Queries:

Query1 Query2 Linkfield1 Linkfield2Movements AP_Invoice_Description TransID TransID

Journal Entry (FIN05419)2.6.2.3.1.5

Queries:

Query1 Query2 Linkfield1 Linkfield2JournalEntry

BP Movements (FIN05410)2.6.2.3.1.6

Queries:

Query1 Query2 Linkfield1 Linkfield2GPHeader GPDetails Account Account

Budget (FIN05408, FIN05409)2.6.2.3.1.7

Queries:

Query1 Query2 Linkfield1 Linkfield2Budget


Queries version 2.52.6.2.3.2

Below is a list of all queries used in accounting version 2.5 in order to help to restore layouts created with olddatasources.The queries of newer versions are not documented.

BalanceProfitAndLossAccountHeaderAccountDetailsMovementsAP_Invoice_DescriptionJournalEntryGPHeaderGPDetailsBudget


Balance2.6.2.3.2.1

/* @@Timeout=[1200] */

DECLARE @MainCurr AS VARCHAR(3) SET @MainCurr = (SELECT T2.MainCurncy FROM OADM T2)

DECLARE @ToDate AS DATETIME SET @ToDate = '[%ToDate]'

/*DECLARE @FromDate AS DATETIME SET @FromDate = '01.01.2000'*/

DECLARE @IgnoreAdj AS VARCHAR(1) SET @IgnoreAdj='[%IgnoreAdj]'

DECLARE @ShowZAcc as Varchar(1) set @ShowZAcc = '[%ShowZAcc]'

DECLARE @AddVoucher as Varchar(1) SET @AddVoucher = '[%AddVoucher]'

DECLARE @FinancYear AS DATETIME

SET @FinancYear = (SELECT T0.FinancYear FROM OACP T0

INNER JOIN OFPR T1 ON T0.PeriodCat = T1.Category

WHERE T1.F_RefDate <= @ToDate AND T1.T_RefDate >= @ToDate)

SELECT T0.Levels

, CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '1' THEN t0.AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '2' THEN t1.

AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN t2.AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4'

THEN t3.acctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t4.acctCode ELSE '0' END END END END

END as Level1

, CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '1' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '2' THEN t0.Acctcode ELSE

CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN t0.Fathernum ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4' THEN t1.

Fathernum ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t2.Fathernum ElSE '0' END END END END END as

Level2

, CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '1' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '2' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN

t0.Levels = '3' THEN t0.AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4' THEN t0.fathernum ELSE CASE

WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t1.Fathernum ELSE '0' END END END END END as Level3


t0.Levels = '3' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4' THEN t0.acctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.

Levels = '5' THEN t0.fathernum ELSE '0' END END END END END as Level4


t0.Levels = '3' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels =

'5' THEN t0.acctCode ELSE '0' END END END END END as Level5

,T0.AcctCode

,T0.AcctName

,T0.GroupMask

,T0.GrpLine

,T0.Postable

,T0.ActCurr

INTO #OACTStructur

FROM oact t0

Left Outer JOIN Oact t1 ON t0.fathernum = t1.acctCode

left Outer JOIN Oact t2 ON t1.fathernum = t2.acctCode



WHERE T0.GroupMask in ('1','2','3')

/*Bookings actual year*/

SELECT

T0.Account

,ISNULL(T0.Debit,0) As Debit

,ISNULL(T0.Credit,0) As Credit

,0 As DebitPY

,0 As CreditPY

,ISNULL(T0.FCDebit,0) As FCDebit

,ISNULL(T0.FCCredit,0) AS FCCredit

INTO #TempJDT1

FROM JDT1 T0

INNER JOIN OJDT T2 ON T0.TransID = T2.TransID

WHERE T0.refdate <= @ToDate

AND NOT (T0.refdate = DATEADD(Year,1,DATEADD(day,-1,@FinancYear))

AND T0.TransType = -3)

AND CASE WHEN @IgnoreAdj = 'Y' THEN T2.AdjTran ELSE 'N' END = 'N'


/*Vouchers actual year*/

UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Account



,0 As DebitPY

,0 As CreditPY



FROM BTF1 T0 INNER JOIN OBTF T1 ON T0.TransId = T1.TransId AND T0.BatchNum=T1.BatchNum

WHERE T0.refdate <= @ToDate

AND NOT (T0.refdate = DATEADD(Year,1,DATEADD(day,-1,@FinancYear))



AND T1.BtfStatus = 'O'

AND @AddVoucher = 'Y'

/*Bookings previous year */

UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Account

,0

,0

,ISNULL(T0.Debit,0)

,ISNULL(T0.Credit,0)

,0

,0

FROM JDT1 T0


WHERE T0.refdate < @FinancYear

AND NOT (T0.refdate = DATEADD(day,-1,@FinancYear)



/*Vouchers previous year*/

UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Account

,0

,0

,ISNULL(T0.Debit,0)

,ISNULL(T0.Credit,0)

,0

,0


WHERE T0.refdate < @FinancYear

AND NOT (T0.refdate = DATEADD(day,-1,@FinancYear)





/*Sum data*/

SELECT

T0.Account

,SUM(T0.Debit-T0.Credit) As Saldo_DC

,SUM(T0.DebitPY - T0.CreditPY) As SaldoPY_DC

,SUM(T0.FCDebit-T0.FCCredit) AS SaldoFC_DC

INTO #ResultJDT1

FROM #TempJDT1 T0


GROUP BY T0.Account

/* Structure with all active accounts */

SELECT

T0.AcctCode As Account

INTO #ActiveAcct

FROM #OACTStructur T0

INNER JOIN #ResultJDT1 T1 ON T1.Account = T0.AcctCode

WHERE T1.Saldo_DC <> 0 OR T1.SaldoPY_DC <> 0

UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Level1




UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Level2




UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Level3




UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Level4




UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.AcctCode




SELECT

T0.AcctCode

,T0.AcctName

,T1.Saldo_DC

,T1.SaldoPY_DC

,T1.SaldoFC_DC

,T0.Level1

,T0.Level2

,T0.Level3

,T0.Level4

,T0.Level5

,T0.Levels

,T0.Postable

,T0.ActCurr


,T0.GroupMask

,@MainCurr as MainCurr

,DATEADD(day,-1,@FinancYear) as PrevYear


LEFT OUTER JOIN #ResultJDT1 T1 ON T1.Account = T0.AcctCode

WHERE @ShowZAcc = 'Y' OR T0.AcctCode IN (SELECT DISTINCT Account FROM #ActiveAcct)

ORDER BY T0.GroupMask, T0.GrpLine


ProfitAndLoss2.6.2.3.2.2

/* @@Timeout=[1200] */

SET LANGUAGE German



DECLARE @FromDate AS DATETIME SET @FromDate = '[%FromDate]'


DECLARE @ShowZAcc as Varchar(1) set @ShowZAcc = '[%ShowZAcc]'

DECLARE @AddVoucher as Varchar(1) SET @AddVoucher = '[%AddVoucher]'




WHERE T1.F_RefDate <= @ToDate AND T1.T_RefDate >=@ToDate)

SELECT T0.Levels

, CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '1' THEN t0.AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '2' THEN t1.

AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN t2.AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4'

THEN t3.acctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t4.acctCode ELSE '0' END END END END

END as Level1

, CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '1' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '2' THEN t0.Acctcode

ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN t0.Fathernum ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4' THEN t1.

Fathernum ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t2.Fathernum ElSE '0' END END END END END as

Level2

, CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '1' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '2' THEN '0' ELSE

CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN t0.AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4' THEN t0.fathernum

ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t1.Fathernum ELSE '0' END END END END END as Level3


CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4' THEN t0.acctCode ELSE

CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t0.fathernum ELSE '0' END END END END END as Level4


CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN

t0.Levels = '5' THEN t0.acctCode ELSE '0' END END END END END as Level5

,T0.AcctCode

,T0.AcctName

,T0.GroupMask

,T0.GrpLine

,T0.Postable

,T0.ActCurr

INTO #OACTStructur

FROM oact t0

Left Outer JOIN Oact t1 ON t0.fathernum = t1.acctCode




WHERE T0.GroupMask Not in ('1','2','3')

/*Booking actual Year*/

SELECT

T0.Account





,ISNULL(T0.SYSDeb,0) As SYSDeb

,ISNULL(T0.SYSCred,0) AS SYSCred

,0 As Debit_PY

,0 As Credit_PY

,0 As FCDebit_PY

,0 As FCCredit_PY

,0 As SYSDeb_PY

,0 As SYSCred_PY

INTO #TempJDT1

FROM JDT1 T0



where (T0.refdate >= @FromDate

AND T0.refdate <= @ToDate)

AND NOT T0.TransType = -3


/*Vouchers actual year*/

UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Account





,ISNULL(T0.SYSDeb,0) As SYSDeb

,ISNULL(T0.SYSCred,0) AS SYSCred

,0 As Debit_PY

,0 As Credit_PY

,0 As FCDebit_PY

,0 As FCCredit_PY

,0 As SYSDeb_PY

,0 As SYSCred_PY


WHERE (T0.refdate >= @FromDate

AND T0.refdate <= @ToDate)





/*Bookings Previous Year */

UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Account

,0 As Debit

,0 As Credit

,0 As FCDebit

,0 AS FCCredit

,0 As SYSDeb

,0 AS SYSCred

,ISNULL(T0.Debit,0) As Debit_PY

,ISNULL(T0.Credit,0) As Credit_PY

,ISNULL(T0.FCDebit,0) As FCDebit_PY

,ISNULL(T0.FCCredit,0) As FCCredit_PY

,ISNULL(T0.SYSDeb,0) As SYSDeb_PY

,ISNULL(T0.SYSCred,0) As SYSCred_PY

FROM JDT1 T0


WHERE (T0.refdate >= DATEADD(year,-1,@FromDate)

AND T0.refdate <=DATEADD(year,-1,@ToDate))



/*Vouchers previous year*/

Union all

SELECT

T0.Account

,0 As Debit

,0 As Credit

,0 As FCDebit


,0 AS FCCredit

,0 As SYSDeb

,0 AS SYSCred

,ISNULL(T0.Debit,0) As Debit_PY

,ISNULL(T0.Credit,0) As Credit_PY

,ISNULL(T0.FCDebit,0) As FCDebit_PY

,ISNULL(T0.FCCredit,0) As FCCredit_PY

,ISNULL(T0.SYSDeb,0) As SYSDeb_PY

,ISNULL(T0.SYSCred,0) As SYSCred_PY


WHERE (T0.refdate >= DATEADD(year,-1,@FromDate)

AND T0.refdate <= DATEADD(year,-1,@ToDate))





/*Sum data*/

SELECT

T0.Account

,SUM(T0.Debit) As Debit

,SUM(T0.Credit) As Credit

,SUM(T0.FCDebit) As FCDebit

,SUM(T0.FCCredit) As FCCredit

,SUM(T0.SYSDeb) As SYSDeb

,SUM(T0.SYSCred) As SYSCred

,SUM(T0.Debit_PY) As Debit_PY

,SUM(T0.Credit_PY) As Credit_PY

,SUM(T0.FCDebit_PY) As FCDebit_PY

,SUM(T0.FCCredit_PY) As FCCredit_PY

,SUM(T0.SYSDeb_PY) As SYSDeb_PY

,SUM(T0.SYSCred_PY) As SYSCred_PY

/* SUM for Filtering */

,SUM(T0.Debit-T0.Credit) As Saldo_DC

,SUM(T0.Debit_PY - T0.Credit_PY) As SaldoPY_DC

,SUM(T0.FCDebit-T0.FCCredit) AS SaldoFC_DC

INTO #ResultJDT1

FROM #TempJDT1 T0

GROUP BY T0.Account

/* Structure with all active accounts */

SELECT

T0.AcctCode As Account

INTO #ActiveAcct




UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Level1




UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Level2





UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Level3




UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.Level4




UNION ALL

SELECT

T0.AcctCode




SELECT

T0.AcctCode

,T0.AcctName

,T1.Debit

,T1.Credit

,T1.FCDebit

,T1.FCCredit

,T1.SYSDeb

,T1.SYSCred

,T1.Debit_PY

,T1.Credit_PY

,T1.FCDebit_PY

,T1.FCCredit_PY

,T1.SYSDeb_PY

,T1.SYSCred_PY

,T0.Level1

,T0.Level2

,T0.Level3

,T0.Level4

,T0.Level5

,T0.Levels

,T0.Postable

,T0.ActCurr

,T0.GroupMask

,@MainCurr as MainCurr

,DATEADD(year,-1,@FromDate) as PrevYearStart

,DATEADD(year,-1,@ToDate) as PrevYearEND


LEFT OUTER JOIN #ResultJDT1 T1 ON T1.Account = T0.AcctCode

WHERE @ShowZAcc = 'Y' OR T0.AcctCode IN (SELECT DISTINCT Account FROM #ActiveAcct)

ORDER BY T0.GroupMask, T0.GrpLine

DROP TABLE #OACTStructur

DROP TABLE #TempJDT1

DROP TABLE #ResultJDT1

DROP TABLE #ActiveAcct


AccountHeader2.6.2.3.2.3

/* @@Timeout=[1200] */

DECLARE @FromAcct AS NVARCHAR(15)

SET @FromAcct = '[%FromAcct]'

DECLARE @ToAcct AS NVARCHAR(15)

SET @ToAcct = '[%ToAcct]'

IF @ToAcct=''

SET @ToAcct=@FromAcct

SELECT

T0.Account

,sum(CASE WHEN [%AcctMOrder] < '[%FromDate]' and T0.Account >= @FromAcct and T0.

Account <= @ToAcct THEN T0.Debit-T0.Credit ELSE 0 END) as VorSaldo

,sum(CASE WHEN [%AcctMOrder] < '[%FromDate]' and T0.Account >= @FromAcct and T0.

Account <= @ToAcct THEN T0.FCDebit-T0.FCCredit ELSE 0 END) as VorSalFC

,T1.ActCurr

FROM JDT1 T0

INNER JOIN OACT T1 ON T0.Account = T1.AcctCode

WHERE T0.Account >= @FromAcct and T0.Account <= @ToAcct

GROUP BY T0.Account,T1.ActCurr

order by T0.Account


AccountDetails2.6.2.3.2.4

DECLARE @FromAcct AS NVARCHAR(15)

SET @FromAcct = '[%FromAcct]'

DECLARE @ToAcct AS NVARCHAR(15)

SET @ToAcct = '[%ToAcct]'

IF @ToAcct=''

SET @ToAcct = @FromAcct

SELECT T0.TransID

,T0.ContraAct

,CASE WHEN T5.AcctName IS NOT NULL THEN T5.AcctName ELSE CASE WHEN T3.CardName IS

NULL THEN T4.CardName ELSE T3.CardName END END as ContraName

,CASE WHEN T3.CardName IS NULL THEN T4.CardCode ELSE T3.CardCode END as CardCode

,CASE WHEN T3.CardName IS NULL THEN T4.CardName ELSE T3.CardName END as CardName

,CASE WHEN T3.CardName IS NULL THEN T4.City ELSE T3.City END as City

,CASE WHEN T3.CardName IS NULL THEN T4.County ELSE T3.Country END as Contry

,T2.Number

,T0.RefDate

,T0.DueDate

,T0.TaxDate

,T0.ShortName

,T0.Account

,T3.DebPayAcct

,T2.Memo

,T1.AcctName

,T0.Debit

,T0.Credit

,(T0.Debit-T0.Credit) as Saldo

,T0.VatAmount

,T0.FCDebit-T0.FCCredit as FC

,T0.FCDebit

,T0.FCCredit

,T0.FCCurrency

,T0.Project

,T0.ProfitCode

,T0.SYSCred

,T0.SYSDeb

,T1.ActCurr

,T2.Ref1

,T2.Ref2

,T0.LineMemo

FROM JDT1 T0

LEFT OUTER JOIN OCRD T3 ON T0.ShortName=T3.CardCode

Left OUTER JOIN OCRD T4 ON T0.ContraAct = T4.CardCode

Left OUTER JOIN OACT T5 ON T0.ContraAct = T5.AcctCode

INNER JOIN OACT T1 ON T0.Account=T1.AcctCode

INNER JOIN OJDT T2 ON T0.TransId = T2.TransId

WHERE T0.Account >= @FromAcct and T0.Account <= @ToAcct

and [%AcctMOrder] BETWEEN '[%FromDate]' AND '[%ToDate]'

ORDER BY [%AcctMOrder]


Movements2.6.2.3.2.5

/* Account Movements 2nd Generation by Philipp Emmenegger, coresystems ag */


DECLARE @FromDate AS DATETIME SET @FromDate = '[%FromDate]'


/* Filter Accounts */

SELECT T0.AcctCode

INTO #AccountFilter

FROM OACT T0

WHERE T0.AcctCode = '[%Account]'

/* Calculation of Account brought forward */

SELECT T0.Account

,SUM(T0.Debit) AS BF_Debit

,SUM(T0.Credit) AS BF_Credit

,SUM(T0.SYSDeb) AS BF_SYSDeb

,SUM(T0.SYSCred) AS BF_SYSCred

,SUM(T0.FCDebit) AS BF_FCDebit

,SUM(T0.FCCredit) AS BF_FCCredit

INTO #BroughtForward

FROM JDT1 T0

INNER JOIN #AccountFilter T1 ON T0.Account=T1.AcctCode

INNER JOIN OJDT T2 ON T0.TransID=T2.TransID

WHERE T0.Refdate < @FromDate


GROUP BY T0.Account

/* Internal Matching */

SELECT T0.TransID

,T0.Line_ID

,SUM(T2.Total) as Total

,MAX(T2.ReconNum) AS ReconNum

INTO #InternalMatching

FROM JDT1 T0

LEFT OUTER JOIN ITR1 T1 ON T0.TransId = T1.TransId AND T0.Line_ID = T1.TransRowId

LEFT OUTER JOIN OITR T2 ON T1.ReconNum = T2.ReconNum

WHERE T0.Refdate>=@FromDate

AND T0.Refdate<=@ToDate

GROUP BY T0.TransID, T0.Line_ID

/* Complete posting List */

SELECT

T0.TransID

,T0.Line_ID

,T6.Total

,T6.ReconNum

,T0.Account

,T2.AcctName

,T0.Debit

,T0.Credit

,T0.SYSDeb

,T0.SYSCred

,T0.FCDebit

,T0.FCCredit


,T0.Refdate

,T0.DueDate

,T0.ShortName

,T0.ContraAct

,T0.LineMemo

,T1.Memo

,T1.Ref1

,T1.Ref2

,T0.Ref3Line

,T0.TransCode

,T0.Project

,T0.ProfitCode

,T0.VatGroup

,T0.VatRate

,T3.BF_Debit

,T3.BF_Credit

,T3.BF_SYSDeb

,T3.BF_SYSCred

,T3.BF_FCDebit

,T3.BF_FCCredit

,T4.CardName

,T4.City

,T7.CardName as CardName2

,T7.City as City2

,T1.Number

,T2.ActCurr

,T0.FCCurrency

FROM JDT1 T0

INNER JOIN OJDT T1 ON T0.TransID=T1.TransID


LEFT OUTER JOIN #BroughtForward T3 ON T0.Account = T3.Account

LEFT OUTER JOIN OCRD T4 ON T0.ShortName = T4.CardCode

INNER JOIN #AccountFilter T5 ON T0.Account = T5.AcctCode

LEFT OUTER JOIN #InternalMatching T6 ON T0.TransID = T6.TransID AND T0.Line_ID = T6.Line_ID

LEFT OUTER JOIN OCRD T7 ON T0.ContraAct = T7.CardCode

WHERE T0.Refdate>=@FromDate

AND T0.Refdate<=@ToDate



/* DROP Temporary TABLES */

DROP TABLE #BroughtForward

DROP TABLE #AccountFilter

DROP TABLE #InternalMatching


AP_Invoice_Description2.6.2.3.2.6

SELECT T0.VisOrder, T0.LineTotal,T1.TransID, T0.AcctCode, T0.Dscription, T0.ItemCode, T0.

OcrCode,T0.Project

FROM PCH1 T0

INNER JOIN OPCH T1 ON T0.DocEntry = T1.DocEntry

WHERE T1.DocDate >='[%FromDate]' AND T1.DocDate <='[%ToDate]'

ORDER BY T0.VisOrder


JournalEntry2.6.2.3.2.7

/* Internal Matching */

SELECT T0.TransID

,T0.Line_ID

,SUM(T2.Total) as Total

,MAX(T2.ReconNum) AS ReconNum

INTO #InternalMatching

FROM JDT1 T0

LEFT OUTER JOIN ITR1 T1 ON T0.TransId = T1.TransId AND T0.Line_ID = T1.TransRowId

LEFT OUTER JOIN OITR T2 ON T1.ReconNum = T2.ReconNum

WHERE T0.TransID ='[%TransID]'

GROUP BY T0.TransID, T0.Line_ID

SELECT T2.SeriesName, T0.Number, T0.Refdate, T0.DueDate, T0.TaxDate, T0.Ref1, T0.Ref2, T3.

TrnscodDsc, T0.Project, T4.PrjName, T0.Memo

,T1.Account, T5.AcctName, T1.ShortName, T1.Debit, T1.Credit, T1.FCDebit, T1.FCCredit, T1.

SYSDeb, T1.SYSCred, T1.VatGroup, T1.BaseSum, T1.TransID, T1.ContraAct, T1.LineMemo, T0.

TransType, T1.ProfitCode, T1.VatRate, T1.Line_ID

,T1.FCCurrency

,T6.ReconNum, T7.CardName

FROM OJDT T0

INNER JOIN JDT1 T1 ON T0.TransID=T1.TransID

INNER JOIN NNM1 T2 ON T0.Series = T2.Series

LEFT OUTER JOIN OTRC T3 ON T0.Transcode = T3.TrnsCode

LEFT OUTER JOIN OPRJ T4 ON T0.Project = T4.PrjCode


LEFT OUTER JOIN #InternalMatching T6 ON T1.TransID = T6.TransID AND T1.Line_ID = T6.Line_ID

LEFT OUTER JOIN OCRD T7 ON T1.ShortName = T7.CardCode

WHERE T0.TransID='[%TransID]'

DROP TABLE #InternalMatching


GPHeader2.6.2.3.2.8

DECLARE @FromCardCode AS NVARCHAR(15) SET @FromCardCode = '[%FromCardCode]'

DECLARE @ToCardCode AS NVARCHAR(15) SET @ToCardCode = '[%ToCardCode]'

IF @ToCardCode=''

SET @ToCardCode=@FromCardCode

SELECT

T0.ShortName

,sum(CASE WHEN [%AcctMOrder] < '[%FromDate]' and T0.ShortName >= @FromCardCode and

T0.ShortName <= @ToCardCode THEN T0.Debit-T0.Credit ELSE 0 END) as VorSaldo

,sum(CASE WHEN [%AcctMOrder] < '[%FromDate]' and T0.ShortName >= @FromCardCode and

T0.ShortName <= @ToCardCode THEN T0.FCDebit-T0.FCCredit ELSE 0 END) as VorSalFC

,T2.ActCurr

,T1.CardName

,T1.Currency as BPCurrency

FROM JDT1 T0

INNER JOIN OCRD T1 ON T0.ShortName = T1.CardCode


WHERE T0.ShortName BETWEEN @FromCardCode AND @ToCardCode

GROUP BY T0.ShortName,T2.ActCurr,T1.CardName, T1.Currency

ORDER BY T0.ShortName


GPDetails2.6.2.3.2.9

SELECT T0.TransID

,T0.ContraAct

,T3.AcctName as ContraName

,T2.Number

,T0.RefDate

,T0.DueDate

,T0.TaxDate

,T0.ShortName

,T0.Account

,T2.Memo

,T1.AcctName

,T0.Debit

,T0.Credit

,T0.VatAmount

,T0.FCDebit

,T0.FCCredit

,T0.FCCurrency

,T0.Project

,T0.ProfitCode

,T0.SYSCred

,T0.SYSDeb

,T1.ActCurr

,T2.Ref1

,T2.Ref2

,T0.LineMemo

,T4.CardName

,T4.Currency as BPCurrency

FROM JDT1 T0

INNER JOIN OACT T1 ON T0.Account=T1.AcctCode

INNER JOIN OJDT T2 ON T0.TransId = T2.TransId

LEFT OUTER JOIN OACT T3 ON T0.ContraAct = T3.AcctCode

INNER JOIN OCRD T4 ON T0.ShortName = T4.CardCode

WHERE T0.ShortName IN ('[%CardCode]') OR '' = '[%CardCode]'

and [%AcctMOrder] >='[%FromDate]'

and [%AcctMOrder] <='[%ToDate]'



Budget2.6.2.3.2.10

/*

* Budget Data and Actual Finance Data (Datasource)

* coresystems ag, 01.05.2008

*/

/* @@Timeout=[1200] */

SET DATEFORMAT dmy


DECLARE @IgnoreAdj AS VARCHAR(1) SET @IgnoreAdj= '[%IgnoreAdj]'

DECLARE @AddVoucher AS Varchar(1) SET @AddVoucher= '[%AddVoucher]'

DECLARE @PrcCode AS VARCHAR(8) SET @PrcCode = '[%PrcCode]'

DECLARE @OcrCode AS VARCHAR(8) SET @OcrCode = '[%OcrCode]'

DECLARE @PrjCode As VARCHAR(8) SET @PrjCode = '[%PrjCode]'

DECLARE @BudgId As INT SET @BudgId ='[%BudgId]'

IF @BudgId = ''

BEGIN

SET @BudgId = -1

END

DECLARE @FromDate As DateTime

SET @FromDate = '[%FromDate]'

DECLARE @ToDate As DateTime

SET @ToDate = '[%ToDate]'

-- Get the Acutal Finance Year




WHERE T1.F_RefDate <= @ToDate AND T1.T_RefDate >= @ToDate)

/*

* Parameter notice

* -GroupMask direct in Query impl.

* -BudgetID direct in Query impl.

*/

/*

* ChartOfAccout Structur

*/

SELECT

CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '1' THEN t0.AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '2'

THEN t1.AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN t2.AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels =

'4' THEN t3.acctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t4.acctCode ELSE '0' END END END

END END as Level1

, CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '1' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '2' THEN

t0.Acctcode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN t0.Fathernum ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4'

THEN t1.Fathernum ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t2.Fathernum ElSE '0' END END END END

END as Level2


'0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN t0.AcctCode ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4' THEN t0.

fathernum ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t1.Fathernum ELSE '0' END END END END END as

Level3


'0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4' THEN t0.acctCode

ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t0.fathernum ELSE '0' END END END END END as Level4



'0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '3' THEN '0' ELSE CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '4' THEN '0' ELSE

CASE WHEN t0.Levels = '5' THEN t0.acctCode ELSE '0' END END END END END as Level5

,T0.AcctCode

,T0.AcctName

,T0.CurrTotal

,T0.Finanse

,T0.Budget

,T0.Frozen

,T0.Postable

,T0.Levels

,T0.ExportCode

,T0.GrpLine

,T0.GroupMask

,CAST(CAST(T0.GroupMask AS VARCHAR) + CAST(T0.GrpLine AS VARCHAR) AS INT)

As SortBy

,T0.ActType

,T0.OverCode

,T0.ActCurr

,T0.FormatCode

INTO #OACTStructur

FROM OACT T0

LEFT OUTER JOIN OACT T1 ON T0.FatherNum = T1.AcctCode




WHERE T0.GroupMask IN ([%GroupMask])

/* J O U R N A L - V A L U E

* Actual Value (JDT1)

* With Journal Vouchers (BTF1)

*/

SELECT

-- Create Date (01.MM.YYYY)

CAST(

'01.' + CAST(MONTH(T0.RefDate) AS VARCHAR) + '.' + CAST(YEAR(T0.

RefDate) AS VARCHAR)

AS DATETIME)As RefDate

,(SELECT Y0.FinancYear FROM OACP Y0

INNER JOIN OFPR Y1 ON Y0.PeriodCat = Y1.Category

WHERE Y1.F_RefDate <= T0.RefDate AND Y1.T_RefDate >= T0.

RefDate) AS FinancYear

,T0.Account As Account

,'JE' As Typ

,ISNULL(T2.PrcCode,'') As PrcCode

,ISNULL(T2.OcrCode,'') As OcrCode

,ISNULL(T0.Project,'') As PrjCode

,CASE

WHEN T2.OcrTotal IS NULL OR T2.OcrTotal = 0 THEN

T0.Credit

ELSE

ISNULL(T0.Credit * (T2.PrcAmount/T2.

OcrTotal),0)

END As Credit

,CASE


T0.Debit

ELSE


ISNULL(T0.Debit * (T2.PrcAmount/T2.

OcrTotal),0)

END As Debit

INTO #TEMPJDT1

FROM JDT1 T0


LEFT OUTER JOIN OCR1 T2 ON T2.OcrCode = T0.ProfitCode

LEFT OUTER JOIN OPRC T3 ON T3.PrcCode = T2.PrcCode

INNER JOIN #OACTStructur T4 ON T0.Account = T4.AcctCode

WHERE T0.RefDate >= DATEADD(YEAR,-1,@FinancYear)

AND T0.RefDate <= DATEADD(DAY,-1,DATEADD(YEAR,1,@FinancYear))



AND CASE WHEN @OcrCode = '' THEN ISNULL(T2.OcrCode,'') ELSE @OcrCode END = ISNULL(T2.

OcrCode,'')

AND CASE WHEN @PrcCode = '' THEN ISNULL(T2.PrcCode,'') ELSE @PrcCode END = ISNULL(T2.

PrcCode,'')

AND CASE WHEN @PrjCode = '' THEN ISNULL(T0.Project,'') ELSE @PrjCode END = ISNULL(T0.

Project,'')

/*

* Add Vouchers

*/

UNION ALL

SELECT

CAST(

'01.' + CAST(MONTH(T0.RefDate) AS VARCHAR) + '.' + CAST(YEAR(T0.RefDate)

AS VARCHAR)

AS datetime)As RefDate

,(SELECT Y0.FinancYear FROM OACP Y0

INNER JOIN OFPR Y1 ON Y0.PeriodCat = Y1.Category

WHERE Y1.F_RefDate <= T0.RefDate AND Y1.T_RefDate >= T0.

RefDate) AS FinancYear

,T0.Account As Account

,'JEV' As Typ



,ISNULL(T0.Project,'') As PrjCode

,CASE


T0.Credit

ELSE

ISNULL(T0.Credit * (T2.PrcAmount/T2.

OcrTotal),0)

END As Credit

,CASE


T0.Debit

ELSE

ISNULL(T0.Debit * (T2.PrcAmount/T2.

OcrTotal),0)

END As Debit




LEFT OUTER JOIN OCR1 T2 ON T2.OcrCode = T0.ProfitCode

LEFT OUTER JOIN OPRC T3 ON T3.PrcCode = T2.PrcCode







OcrCode,'')


PrcCode,'')

AND CASE WHEN @PrjCode = '' THEN ISNULL(T0.Project,'') ELSE @PrjCode END = ISNULL(T0.

Project,'')



/*

* B U D G E T - V A L U E

* Actual Budget Value (BGT1)

*/

SELECT

/* Calc the Budget Month by LineID from BGT1 and FinancYear from OBGT*/

DATEADD("Month",T0.Line_ID,T1.FinancYear) As RefDate

,T1.FinancYear AS FinancYear

,T0.AcctCode As Account



,CASE


T0.CredLTotal

ELSE

ISNULL(T0.CredLTotal * (T4.PrcAmount/T4.

OcrTotal),0)

END As Credit

,CASE


T0.DebLTotal

ELSE

ISNULL(T0.DebLTotal * (T4.PrcAmount/T4.

OcrTotal),0)

END As Debit

,T0.BudgId As BudgId

INTO #TEMPBGT1

FROM BGT1 T0

LEFT OUTER JOIN OBGT T1 ON T0.BudgId = T1.AbsId

LEFT OUTER JOIN OBGS T2 ON T0.Instance = T2.AbsId

LEFT OUTER JOIN OCR1 T4 ON T4.OcrCode = T2.U_COR_OcrCode

INNER JOIN #OACTStructur T5 ON T0.AcctCode = T5.AcctCode

WHERE DATEADD("Month",T0.Line_ID,T1.FinancYear) >= DATEADD(YEAR,-1,@FinancYear)

AND DATEADD("Month",T0.Line_ID,T1.FinancYear) <= DATEADD(MONTH,12,@FinancYear)

AND CASE WHEN @BudgId=-1 THEN T0.Instance ELSE @BudgId END = T0.Instance


OcrCode,'')


PrcCode,'')


/* M E R G E - V A L U E

* Select Value per Month, FinanceYear, PreFinanceYear and Actual Month

*/

-- Actual Periode

SELECT T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,'JE_AP' AS Typ



,T0.PrjCode

,SUM(T0.Credit) AS Credit

,SUM(T0.Debit) AS Debit

,MAX(0) AS CreditBudget

,MAX(0) AS DebitBudget

-- Full Finance Year

,MAX(0) As CreditFinancYear

,MAX(0) As DebitFinancYear

,MAX(0) As CreditFinancYearBudget

,MAX(0) As DebitFinancYearBudget

-- Preview Year

,MAX(0) As CreditPrevFinancYear

,MAX(0) As DebitPrevFinancYear

,MAX(0) As CreditPrevFinancYearBudget

,MAX(0) As DebitPrevFinancYearBudget

-- Actual Month

,MAX(0) As CreditActualMonth

,MAX(0) As DebitActualMonth

,MAX(0) As CreditActualMonthBudget

,MAX(0) As DebitActualMonthBudget

-- Budget ID

,MAX(0) As BudgId

INTO #TEMPRES

FROM #TEMPJDT1 T0

WHERE T0.RefDate >= @FromDate

AND T0.RefDate <= @ToDate

GROUP BY

T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,T0.PrcCode

,T0.OcrCode

,T0.PrjCode


UNION ALL

-- Full Actual Finance Year (JDT1) with Vouchers

SELECT T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,'JE_FY' AS Typ



,T0.PrjCode

,MAX(0) AS Credit

,MAX(0) AS Debit




,SUM(T0.Credit) As CreditFinancYear

,SUM(T0.Debit) As DebitFinancYear



-- Preview Year





-- Actual Month





-- Budget ID

,MAX(0) As BudgId

FROM #TEMPJDT1 T0

WHERE T0.RefDate >= @FinancYear


GROUP BY

T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,T0.PrcCode

,T0.OcrCode

,T0.PrjCode

-- Full Previous Finance Year (JDT1) with Vouchers

UNION ALL

SELECT T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,'JE_PY' AS Typ



,T0.PrjCode

,MAX(0) AS Credit

,MAX(0) AS Debit









-- Preview Year

,SUM(T0.Credit) As CreditPrevFinancYear

,SUM(T0.Debit) As DebitPrevFinancYear



-- Actual Month





-- Budget ID

,MAX(0) As BudgId

FROM #TEMPJDT1 T0


AND T0.RefDate < @FinancYear

GROUP BY

T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,T0.PrcCode

,T0.OcrCode

,T0.PrjCode

-- Actual Month (JDT1) with Vouchers -> @ToDate

UNION ALL

SELECT T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,'JE_AM' AS Typ



,T0.PrjCode

,MAX(0) AS Credit

,MAX(0) AS Debit








-- Preview Year





-- Actual Month


,SUM(T0.Credit) As CreditActualMonth

,SUM(T0.Debit) As DebitActualMonth



-- Budget ID

,MAX(0) As BudgId

FROM #TEMPJDT1 T0

WHERE YEAR(T0.RefDate) = YEAR(@ToDate) AND MONTH(T0.RefDate) = MONTH(@ToDate)

GROUP BY

T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,T0.PrcCode

,T0.OcrCode

,T0.PrjCode

/*

*** Add Budget Values ***

*/

-- Budget Actual Periode

UNION ALL

SELECT T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,'BG_AP' AS Typ



,'' As PrjCode

,MAX(0) AS Credit

,MAX(0) AS Debit

,SUM(T0.Credit) AS CreditBudget

,SUM(T0.Debit) AS DebitBudget






-- Preview Year





-- Actual Month





-- Budget ID


FROM #TEMPBGT1 T0


WHERE T0.RefDate >= @FromDate

AND T0.RefDate <= @ToDate

GROUP BY

T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,T0.PrcCode

,T0.OcrCode

,T0.BudgId

-- Budget Actual Finance Year

UNION ALL

SELECT T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,'BG_FY' AS Typ



,'' As PrjCode

,MAX(0) AS Credit

,MAX(0) AS Debit






,SUM(T0.Credit) As CreditFinancYearBudget

,SUM(T0.Debit) As DebitFinancYearBudget

-- Preview Year





-- Actual Month





-- Budget ID


FROM #TEMPBGT1 T0

WHERE T0.RefDate >= @FinancYear


GROUP BY

T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,T0.PrcCode

,T0.OcrCode

,T0.BudgId


-- Budget Previous Finance Year

UNION ALL

SELECT T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,'BG_FY' AS Typ



,'' As PrjCode

,MAX(0) AS Credit

,MAX(0) AS Debit








-- Preview Year



,SUM(T0.Credit) As CreditPrevFinancYearBudget

,SUM(T0.Debit) As DebitPrevFinancYearBudget

-- Actual Month





-- Budget ID


FROM #TEMPBGT1 T0


AND T0.RefDate < @FinancYear

GROUP BY

T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,T0.PrcCode

,T0.OcrCode

,T0.BudgId

-- Budget Actual Month

UNION ALL

SELECT T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,'BG_FY' AS Typ



,'' As PrjCode

,MAX(0) AS Credit


,MAX(0) AS Debit








-- Preview Year





-- Actual Month



,SUM(T0.Credit) As CreditActualMonthBudget

,SUM(T0.Debit) As DebitActualMonthBudget

-- Budget ID


FROM #TEMPBGT1 T0

WHERE YEAR(T0.RefDate) = YEAR(@ToDate) AND MONTH(T0.RefDate) = MONTH(@ToDate)

GROUP BY

T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,T0.PrcCode

,T0.OcrCode

,T0.BudgId

/*

* SUM all Results

*

*/

SELECT T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account



,ISNULL(T0.PrjCode,'') As PrjCode

,SUM(T0.Credit) AS Credit

,SUM(T0.Debit) AS Debit

,SUM(T0.CreditBudget) AS CreditBudget

,SUM(T0.DebitBudget) AS DebitBudget


,SUM(T0.CreditFinancYear) As CreditFinancYear

,SUM(T0.DebitFinancYear) As DebitFinancYear

,SUM(T0.CreditFinancYearBudget) As CreditFinancYearBudget

,SUM(T0.DebitFinancYearBudget) As DebitFinancYearBudget

-- Preview Year

,SUM(T0.CreditPrevFinancYear) As CreditPrevFinancYear

,SUM(T0.DebitPrevFinancYear) As DebitPrevFinancYear


,SUM(T0.CreditPrevFinancYearBudget) As CreditPrevFinancYearBudget

,SUM(T0.DebitPrevFinancYearBudget) As DebitPrevFinancYearBudget

-- Actual Month

,SUM(T0.CreditActualMonth) As CreditActualMonth

,SUM(T0.DebitActualMonth) As DebitActualMonth

,SUM(T0.CreditActualMonthBudget) As CreditActualMonthBudget

,SUM(T0.DebitActualMonthBudget) As DebitActualMonthBudget

-- Account Details

,MAX(T1.AcctCode) AS AcctCode

,MAX(T1.AcctName) As AcctName

,MAX(T1.Level1) As Level1

,MAX(ISNULL(T2.AcctName,'')) As Level1Name







,MAX(ISNULL(T6.OcrName,'')) As OcrName

,MAX(ISNULL(T7.OcrName,'')) As PrcName

,MAX(ISNULL(T8.PrjName,'')) As PrjName

,MAX(T1.CurrTotal) As CurrTotal

,MAX(T1.Finanse) As Finanse

,MAX(T1.Budget) As Budget

,MAX(T1.Frozen) As Frozen

,MAX(T1.Postable) As Postable

,MAX(T1.Levels) As Levels

,MAX(T1.ExportCode) As ExportCode

,MAX(T1.GrpLine) As GrpLine

,MAX(T1.GroupMask) As GroupMask

,MAX(T1.SortBy) As SortBy

,MAX(T1.ActType) As ActType

,MAX(T1.OverCode) As OverCode

,MAX(T1.ActCurr) As ActCurr

,MAX(T1.FormatCode) As FormatCode

INTO #Budgetfinal

FROM #TEMPRES T0


LEFT OUTER JOIN OACT T2 ON T1.Level1 = T2.AcctCode




LEFT OUTER JOIN OOCR T6 ON T0.OcrCode = T6.OcrCode

LEFT OUTER JOIN OOCR T7 ON T0.PrcCode = T7.OcrCode

LEFT OUTER JOIN OPRJ T8 ON T0.PrjCode = T8.PrjCode

GROUP BY

T0.RefDate

,T0.FinancYear

,T0.Account

,T0.PrcCode


,T0.OcrCode

,T0.PrjCode

SELECT T0.*

FROM #Budgetfinal T0

ORDER BY T0.SortBy


2.6.3 CORESUITE layouts, reports & dashboards (in EN only)

This section includes all information about standard layouts and reports delivered with the coresuite countrypackage.

The overview displays a list of all available reports and layouts. These are grouped in categories and detailedinformation about the settings and data displayed is documented for each report.

Usually, for each report, you can define how what levels you want to display, if you want to include graphs,etc.:


Overview2.6.3.1

The following reports and layouts are included in the coresuite country package:

Name Description Usage and Menu entries

Outgoing Payment - LD(BAN1000)

Letter to a Business Partnerwhich includes relevantinformation about OutgoingPayments.*CD, LD

Bank ing > Outgoing Payments >Outgoing Payments (426) > Preview

Activity BP Letter - LD(BUP00100)

Letter to a Business Partnerwhich includes relevantinformation about a specificActivity.*CD, LD

Business Partners > Activity (651) >Preview

CRM Report - LD (BUP00301) This Report displays allrelevant information for acertain Customer (ContactDetails, Addresses, SalesVolume, Opportunities,Activities, Service Calls,Financial Information,...).Displayed are all opendocuments and documentscreated after the ReferenceDate entered by the user.*CD, LD

Business Partners > Business PartnerMaster Data (134) > Preview

CRM Report - CR (BUP20000) This Report displays allrelevant information for acertain Customer (ContactDetails, Addresses, SalesVolume, Opportunities,Activities, Service Calls,Financial Information,...).Displayed are all opendocuments and documentscreated after the ReferenceDate entered by the user.*CR

Business Partners > Business PartnerMaster Data (134) > Preview

Document ESR - LD(DOC00006)

Printing for the ESR documentattached to an AR Invoice.*CD, LD **CH

Sales - A/R > A/R Invoice (133) > Preview

Item Label - LD (DOC00007) Sample for label printing of allitems included in a Marketingdocument*CD, LD

To display the form adjust the relevantPrintdefinitionsBy default not assigned to anyPrintdefinition. This layout can be used toattach to any Marketing document.

Document DIN - LD(DOC00008)

Standard Marketing DocumentLayout to send to customersand vendors. Can be used forthe following marketing

Sales - A/R >Sales Quotation (149)Sales Order (139)Delivery (140)



document in SAP BusinessOne:Sales

Sales QuotationSales OrderDeliveryReturnA/R Down Payment RequestA/R Down Payment InvoiceA/R InvoiceA/R Credit NoteA/R Reserve Invoice

PurchasingPurchase Quotation (onlyavailable in SAP Version8.81 and higher)Purchase OrderGoods Receipt POGoods ReturnA/P Down Payment RequestA/P Down Payment InvoiceA/P Invoice A/P Credit NoteA/P Reserve Invoice

*CD, LD

Return (180)A/R Down Payment Request (65308)A/R Down Payment Invoice (65300)A/R Invoice (133)A/R Credit Memo (179)A/R Reserve Invoice (60091)

> Preview

or Purchasing - A/P >Purchase Quotation (540000988)Purchase Order (142)Goods Receipt PO (143)Goods Return (182)A/P Down Payment Request (56309)A/P Down Payment Invoice (56301)A/P Invoice (141)A/P Credit Memo (181)A/P Reserve Invoice (60092)

> Preview

Document DIN FR - LD(DOC00009)

Available for coresuite franceand benelux (Belgium) only.Standard Marketing DocumentLayout to send to customersand vendors. Can be used forthe following marketingdocument in SAP BusinessOne:Sales


PurchasingPurchase OrderGoods Receipt POGoods ReturnA/P Down Payment RequestA/P Down Payment InvoiceA/P Invoice A/P Credit NoteA/P Reserve Invoice

Sales - A/R >Sales Quotation (149)Sales Order (139)Delivery (140)Return (180)A/R Down Payment Request (65308)A/R Down Payment Invoice (65300)A/R Invoice (133)A/R Credit Memo (179)A/R Reserve Invoice (60091)

> Preview

or Purchasing - A/P > Purchase Order (142)Goods Receipt PO (143)Goods Return (182)A/P Down Payment Request (56309)A/P Down Payment Invoice (56301)A/P Invoice (141)A/P Credit Memo (181)A/P Reserve Invoice (60092)

> Preview



*CD, LD **FR

Document DIN FR Blue - LD(DOC00010)




*CD, LD **FR


> Preview

or Purchasing - A/P >Purchase Order (142)Goods Receipt PO (143)Goods Return (182)A/P Down Payment Request (56309)A/P Down Payment Invoice (56301)A/P Invoice (141)A/P Credit Memo (181)A/P Reserve Invoice (60092)

> Preview

Document DIN FR Green - LD(DOC00011)



PurchasingPurchase OrderGoods Receipt PO


> Preview

or Purchasing - A/P >Purchase Order (142)Goods Receipt PO (143)Goods Return (182)A/P Down Payment Request (56309)A/P Down Payment Invoice (56301)A/P Invoice (141)A/P Credit Memo (181)A/P Reserve Invoice (60092)



Goods ReturnA/P Down Payment RequestA/P Down Payment InvoiceA/P Invoice A/P Credit NoteA/P Reserve Invoice

*CD, LD **FR

> Preview

Dunning Letter - LD(DOC02500)

Layout to print Dunning Lettersfrom the SAP Dunning Wizard*CD, LD

To display the form from the Previewof the Form"DunningLetterSelect"See below

Dunning Letter - Select Grid(DOC02501)

A new Form"DunningLetterSelect" whichdisplays a Select Grid with thelist of Customers from theloaded Dunning Run.*CD, LD

To display the form from the Previewof the Form "DunningPrinting" (60014) Sales - A/R > Dunning Wizard > Load aSaved Wizard > Preview from Step 5 of 6in the Wizard

Document DIN - CR(DOC40000)

This Layout was created withCrystal Reports.Standard Marketing DocumentLayout to send to customersand vendors. Can be used forthe following marketingdocument in SAP BusinessOne:Sales



*CD, CR

To display the form adjust the relevantPrintdefinitionsBy default not assigned to anyPrintdefinition. This layout can be used toattach to any Marketing document.For coresuite america this layout can beaccessed by the preview from anymarketing document form:Sales - A/R >

Sales Quotation (149)Sales Order (139)Delivery (140)Return (180)A/R Down Payment Request (65308)A/R Down Payment Invoice (65300)A/R Invoice (133)A/R Credit Memo (179)A/R Reserve Invoice (60091)

Purchasing - A/P >Purchase Order (142)Goods Receipt PO (143)Goods Return (182)A/P Down Payment Request (56309)A/P Down Payment Invoice (56301)A/P Invoice (141)A/P Credit Note (181)A/P Reserve Invoice (60092)

Employee List - LD(EMP50000)

Listing of the names, phonenumbers and email addressesof all Employees of theselected department(s).*CD, LD

Human Resources > Human ResourcesReports > Employee List (EMP50000)



Chart of Accounts - LD(FIN05401)

Listing of all accounts and theexisting profit centers anddistribution rules.*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials > Lists >Chart of Accounts (FIN05401)

Balance Sheet - LD (FIN05402) Listing of assets and liabilitiesof the company's annualbalance sheet date.*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials > BalanceSheet > Balance Sheet (FIN05402)

Balance Sheet Template - LD(FIN05403)

Balance sheet according to anexternal Template (SAP®partners can create their owntemplates).*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials > BalanceSheet > Balance Sheet Template(FIN05403)

Profit and Loss (FIN05404) Profit and loss statementaccording to the chart ofaccounts (only standardsubtotals and standardgroupings) with possibility toanalyze for each profit center,project or distribution rule.*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials > Profitand Loss > Profit and Loss (FIN05404)

Profit and Loss by Template(FIN05405)

Profit and loss statementaccording to an externalindividual template (includingthe possibility to analyze foreach profit center, project ordistribution rule)*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials > Profitand Loss > Profit and Loss by Template(FIN05405)

Customer (A/R) Ageing Report- LD (FIN05406)

List of outstanding sales forbusiness partners (customers /debtors). Debtor list, which arehandled by the accountsreceivable manager.*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials >Customer (A/R) > Customer (A/R) AgingReport (FIN05406)

Profit and Loss vs. Budget(FIN05408)

Comparison of current incomeincluding the budget (brokendown according to the chart ofaccounts).*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials > Budget> Profit and Loss vs. Budget (FIN05408)

or in coresuite france and benelux(Belgium) only: Financials > Budget Setup > Etats >Profit and Loss vs. Budget (FIN05408)

Customer (A/R) AccountJournals - LD (FIN05410)

Account journal per businesspartner (all postings perbusiness partner)*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials >Customer (A/R) > Customer (A/R)Account Journals (FIN05410)

Opening Balance - LD(FIN05413)

Opening Balance (in generalthe 1st day of each fiscal year,without ongoing bookings for

coresuite Reports > Financials > BalanceSheet > Opening Balance (FIN05413)



the new fiscal year)*LD

VAT by Code (FIN05414) List of taxation and VAT baseamounts for each tax codedefined in the correspondingperiod.*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials > TaxReport > VAT by Code (FIN05414)

VAT by Account (FIN05415) List of taxation and VAT baseamounts for each account andtax code defined in thecorresponding period. Ideal toderive the VAT-liable turnover.*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials > TaxReport > VAT by Account (FIN05415)

Reconciliation - LD (FIN05416) Sub report used by defaultfrom other reports to displaydetails about the reconciliation.*LD

To display the form from the ReportSelect Linked Arrow in -> Journal Entry(FIN05419)

Customer (A/R) AgeingStatement - LD (FIN05418)

Statement of the openpositions of the BusinessPartners. The report can besent to a client or businesspartner via e-mail. It can beused as an alternative to thedunning letter.*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials >Customer (A/R) > Customer (A/R) AgeingStatement (FIN05418)

Journal Entry - LD (FIN05419) Collection and presentation ofall journal entries (possiblyfiltered by marketing documenttype).*LD

To display the form from the MainMenucoresuite Reports > Financials > Journal/Statement > Journal Entry (FIN05419)

orTo display the form from the Previewof the Form "Journal Entry" (392)Financials > Journal Entry

Journal Transactions(FIN05420)

Overview of a selection ofaccounts with Balance broughtforward and movements in aspecific time period. Includes agraphical representation of themovements.*LD

To display the form from the MainMenucoresuite Reports > Financials > Journal/Statement > Journal Transactions(FIN05420)

orTo display the form from the Previewof the Form "XX" (809)Financials -> XX

Business Assessment YoY -LD (FIN05424)

Available for coresuitegermany, switzerland andaustria only.*LD **DE

coresuite Berichte > Finanzwesen >Analytics > BWA Vorjahresvergleich(FIN05424)



Profit and Loss by Profitcenter- KPI (FIN05430)

Profit and loss statementdivided into profit centers(including KPI measures).

Correct Account Mappingis required to view this report.*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials > Profitand Loss > Profit and Loss by ProfitCenter (FIN05430)

Budget Report (FIN05433) Budget according to chart ofaccounts (only Budgetnumbers). Grouped accordingto chart of accounts.*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials > Budget> Budget Report (FIN05433)

BWA Kurzfristig (FIN05436) Available for coresuitegermany, switzerland andaustria only.*LD **DE

coresuite Berichte > Finanzwesen >Analytics > BWA Kurzfristig (FIN05436)

Profit and Loss - KPI(FIN05438)

Profit and loss statementaccording to KPI (with financialratios), including the option tofilter by profit center, project ordistribution rule.


coresuite Reports > Financials > Profitand Loss > Profit and Loss - KPI(FIN05438)

Profit and Loss vs. Budget -KPI (FIN05439)

Comparison of current incomeincluding the budget (brokendown into KPI measures).


coresuite Reports > Financials > Budget> Profit and Loss vs. Budget - KPI(FIN05439)

or in coresuite france and benelux(Belgium) only:Financials > Budget Setup > Etats >Profit and Loss vs. Budget - KPI(FIN05439)

Budget Report - KPI(FIN05440)

Budget (only Budget numbers)according to KPI (subtotals).the ideal report for the bank orthird party.


coresuite Reports > Financials > Budget> Budget Report - KPI (FIN05440)

Tax Report Switzerland(FIN05450)

Available for coresuiteswitzerland only. Countryspecific Report for TaxDeclaration. This report isavailable in the languagesGerman, French and Italianonly.*LD **CH

coresuite Reports > Financials > TaxReport > Tax Report Switzerland (FIN05450)



Journal des écriture - LD(FIN05500)

Available for coresuite franceand benelux (Belgium) only.*LD **FR

Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Journaux >Sélection/Code Transaction (FIN05500)

or Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Journaux >Sélection automatique

Achat (FIN05500)Vente (FIN05500)Stock (FIN05500)Ecriture (FIN05500)Chèque (FIN05500)Report à nouveau (FIN05500)Effet de commerce (FIN05500)Encaissement (FIN05500)Décaissement (FIN05500)Dépôt (FIN05500)Tous (FIN05500)

Plan comptable (FIN05510) Available for coresuite franceand benelux (Belgium) only.*LD **FR

Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Grands livres> Plan comptable (FIN05510)

Cumuls des BP (FIN05511) Available for coresuite franceand benelux (Belgium) only.*LD **FR

Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Cumuls >Cumuls des clients (FIN05511)or Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Cumuls >Cumuls des fournisseurs (FIN05511)

Cumuls des comptes généraux(FIN05513)


Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Cumuls >Cumuls des comptes généraux(FIN05513)

Journal centralisateur(FIN05515)


Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Journaux >Journal centralisateur (FIN05515)

Journal centralisé (FIN05516) Available for coresuite franceand benelux (Belgium) only.*LD **FR

Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Journaux >Journal centralisé (FIN05516)

Journal périodique (FIN05517) Available for coresuite franceand benelux (Belgium) only.*LD **FR

Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Journaux >Journal périodique (FIN05517)

Grand Livre devise interne(FIN05518)


Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Grands livres> Général > Devise interne (FIN05518)

Grand Livre toutes devises(FIN05519)


Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Grands livres> Général > Toutes devises (FIN05519)



Grand Livre centre / général(FIN05520)


Gestion financière > Comptabilitéanalytique > Etats > Grands livres >Centre / Général (FIN05520)

Grand Livre général / centre(FIN05521)


Gestion financière > Comptabilitéanalytique > Etats > Grands livres >Général / Centre (FIN05521)

Grand Livre projet / général(FIN05522)


Gestion financière > Comptabilitéanalytique > Etats > Grands livres >Projet / Général (FIN05522)

Grand Livre général / projet(FIN05523)


Gestion financière > Comptabilitéanalytique > Etats > Grands livres >Général / Projet (FIN05523)

Grand livre des BP (FIN05525) Available for coresuite franceand benelux (Belgium) only.*LD **FR

Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Grands livres> Clients > Grand livre clients (FIN05525)or Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Grand livres > Fournisseurs > Grand livre fournisseurs(FIN05525)

Balance collectifs / BP(FIN05527)


Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Etats de synthèse > Extension >Balances > Clients > Balance collectifs /clients (FIN05527)or Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Etats de synthèse > Extension >Balances > Fournisseurs > Balancecollectifs / fournisseurs (FIN05527)

Balance BP / collectifs(FIN05528)


Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Etats de synthèse > Extension >Balances > Clients > Balance clients /collectifs (FIN05528)or Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Etats de synthèse > Extension >Balances > Fournisseurs > Balancefournisseurs / collectifs (FIN05528)

Balance clients (FIN05530) Available for coresuite franceand benelux (Belgium) only.*LD **FR

Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Etats de synthèse > Extension >Balances > Clients > Balance clients(FIN05530)or Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Etats de synthèse > Extension >Balances > Fournisseurs > Balancefournisseurs (FIN05530)



Trial Balance - LD (FIN05533) List of all account withoutgrouping (Brought forward,Debit, Credit, Balance). This isthe ideal report for theaccountant who can retrieve abreakdown in Debit and Credit.*LD

Etats coresuite > Financiers > Journal/Déclaration > Balance générale(FIN05533)

or in coresuite france and benelux(Belgium) only: Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Etats de synthèse > Extension >Balances > Générale > Balance généraleDevise interne (FIN05533)

Balance centre / générale(FIN05534)


Gestion financière > Compatiblitéanalytique > Etats > Balances > Centre /Général (FIN05534)

Balance générale / centre(FIN05535)

Available for coresuite franceand benelux (Belgium) only. *LD **FR

Gestion financière > Compatiblitéanalytique > Etats > Balances > Général /Centre (FIN05535)

Balance générale / projet(FIN05536)


Gestion financière > Compatiblitéanalytique > Etats > Balances > Général /Projet (FIN05536)

Balance projet / générale(FIN05537)


Gestion financière > Compatiblitéanalytique > Etats > Balances > Projet /Général (FIN05537)

Cumuls analytique (FIN05538) Available for coresuite franceand benelux (Belgium) only.*LD **FR

Gestion financière > Compatiblitéanalytique > Etats > Cumuls analytique(FIN05538)

Grand livre collectifs / BP(FIN05540)


Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Grands livres> Clients > Grand livre collectifs / clients(FIN05540)or Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Grands livres> Fournisseurs > Grand livre collectifs /fournisseurs (FIN05540)

Grand livre BP / collectifs(FIN05542)


Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Grands livres> Clients > Grand livre clients / collectifs(FIN05542)or Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Comptabilité > Extension > Grands livres> Fournisseurs > Grand livrefournisseurs / collectifs(FIN05542)

Balance générale Deviseinterne (FIN05543)


Gestion financière > Etats comptables >Etats de synthèse > Extension >Balances > Générale > Balance généraleDevise interne (FIN05543)



Tax Report Switzerland01.01.2010 - 30.06.2010(FIN60002)

Available for coresuiteswitzerland only. Countryspecific Report for TaxDeclaration. This report isavailable in the languagesGerman, French and Italianonly.*LD **CH

coresuite Reports > Financials > TaxReport > Tax Report Switzerland01.01.2010 - 30.06.2010 (FIN60002)

Balansrapport - LF (FIN60005) Balance report specific for theSwedish Localization*CR **SE

Reports > Financials > Financial >Balansrapport - LF (FIN60005)

Account Balance - SAP Form(FIN60006)

*LD To display the form from the Previewof the Form "Account Balance" (805)Financials > Chart of Accounts > Preview

Text List - LD (GEN00001) Overview of all text elementsstored in the database, thatcan be used in Layouts andReports to be automaticallytranslated. This layout displaysall existing texts in the mainlanguage. The user can searchfor the corresponding code.*LD

coresuite Reports > Financials > Lists >Chart of Accounts (FIN05401)orAdministration > Add-ons > coresuitedesigner > Printdefinition > Preview

Configuration - LD (GEN00002) Overview of all Formtypes,Parameters, Print andLayoutdefinitions installed inthe system.*LD

Administration > Add-ons > coresuitedesigner > Printdefinition > Preview

Parameter Check - LD(GEN00012)

Report displays current Printand System Parameters suchas Versions, File Paths,Status,...*LD

Administration > Add-ons > coresuitedesigner > Printdefinition > Preview

SWA_LD_Master_Portrait(GEN01000)

Master Template in Portraitformat to be used as"MasterReport" in thedocument properties of otherreports and layouts.*LD

To use the Master ReportOpen any Layout in the Designer -> Selectthis Report as "MasterReport" in theDocument Properties

SWA_LD_Master_Landscape(GEN01001)

Master Template in Landscapeformat to be used as"MasterReport" in thedocument properties of otherreports and layouts.*LD

To use the Master ReportOpen any Layout in the Designer -> Selectthis Report as "MasterReport" in theDocument Properties

Production Order - LD(PRD07001)

Layout for Production Orders*CD, LD

Production > Production Order (65211) >Preview



Bill of Materials - LD(PRD07004)

Information about a Bill ofMaterials*CD, LD

Production > Bill of Materials (672) >Preview

Documents - Sales - LD(SAR06000)

Overview of all SalesDocuments*CD, LD

coresuite Reports > Sales > Documents -Sales - LD (SAR06000)

Sales Pivot (SAR06001) Pivot Table for Sales Revenue*CD, LD

coresuite Reports > Sales > Sales Pivot(SAR06001)

Sales Revenue Dashboard - XC(SAR130003)

Graphical Dashboard withSales information*CD, XC

coresuite Reports > Sales > SalesRevenue Dashboard (SAR0130003)

Sales Backorder Report - SAPForm (SAR130004)

To print SAP Business OneSales Backorder Report.

Sales - A/R > Sales Reports > Backorder(10065066) > Preview. This opens theBackorder window.

Service Dashboard - XC (SRV140000)

Graphical Dashboard withinformation about Service Calls*CD, XC

coresuite Reports > Service > ServiceDashboard (SAR0140000)

Stock Document - LD(STO08001)

Layout for Goods ReceiptGoods IssueReceipt from ProductionIssue for Production

with an overview of all items,locations, quantities and pricesincluding information aboutserial and batch numbers.*CD, LD

Inventory > Inventory Transactions >Goods Receipt (721)Goods Issue (720)

> Previewor Production >

Receipt from Production (65214)Issue for Production (65213)

> Preview

Stock Transfer - LD(STO08003)

Layout for stock transferdocument with an overview ofall items, locations, quantitiesand prices includinginformation about serial andbatch numbers.*CD, LD

Inventory > Inventory Transactions >Inventory Transfer (940) > Preview

Pick List - LD (STO08004) Layout for Pick List with anoverview of selected Orders,items, locations andquantities.*CD, LD

Inventory > Pick and Pack > Pick List(85) > Preview

LD - Created with integrated Sharpshooter DesignerCR - Created with external Crystal Reports

To view the report on versions prior to SAP 8.8 ensure that Crystal Reports Runtime (CR2008) is installedon the system. This is free of charge and available to download at the following website: http://wiki.sdn.sap.com/wiki/pages/viewpage.action?pageId=56787567.

XC - Created with external XCelsiusTo view the report on ensure that Flashplayer is installed on the system.


CD - Also available in the coresuite designer standalone version


Banking2.6.3.2

Outgoing Payment - LD (BAN1000)2.6.3.2.1

PurposeLetter to a Business Partner that includes relevant information about Outgoing Payments.

To display the form from the Preview of the Form "Outgoing Payment" (426)Modules > Bank ing > Outgoing Payments > Outgoing Payments

Documents2.6.3.3

The category Documents includes any layouts for Marketing documents to be sent to customers and vendors.

Document DIN - CR (DOC40000)2.6.3.3.1

DescriptionMulti-language DIN Layout created with SAP Business Objects Crystal Reports 2008. Designed for allMarketing documents under the Sales and Purchasing Modules. It applies the standard requirements of abusiness letter to be sent to customers and vendors. Due to the expandable data sources the layout can beadjusted with additional customized information stored in User Defined Fields.

The company logo is automatically updated from the logo defined in SAP under Modules > Administration >System Initialization > Print Preferences > GeneralIf they exist, Item Serial Numbers, Batches and Pictures are printed for each relevant document row.Relevant information about base documents, payment and tax information and down payments is printedwhen applicable.

UsageThis layout is automatically assigned to be used for all marketing documents (including draft documents):

Sales ModuleSales QuotationsSales OrdersDeliveriesReturnsA/R Down Payment RequestsA/R Down Payment InvoicesA/R Credit NotesA/R Reserved Invoices

Purchasing ModulePurchase OrderGoods Receipt POGoods ReturnA/P Down Payment RequestA/P Down Payment InvoicesA/R Credit NotesA/R Reserved Invoices

To display the form from the Preview of any Marketing document Form Select Sales AR >

Sales Quotation (149)Sales Order (139)Delivery (140)Return (180)


AR Down Payment Request (65308)AR Down Payment Invoice (65300)AR Invoice (133)AR Credit Note (179)AR Reserve Invoice (60091)

or select Purchasing AP >Purchase Order (142)Goods Receipt PO (143)Goods Return (182)AP Down Payment Request (56309)AP Down Payment Invoice (56301)AP Invoice (141)AP Credit Note (181)AP Reserve Invoice (60092)

These Marketing documents can be viewed in SAP Business One as preview before and after adding the actualdocument. They can be exported to Word or PDF and attached to Emails with predefined Subject and ToAddress.

RemarksIn order to be able to view the Layout Crystal Reports Viewer (integrated in SAP Business One Version 8.8 andhigher) is required on the system.In order to adjust the layout Crystal Reports 2008 is required.

See more details on how to customize the marketing layout with Crystal Reports in the coresuite designermanual.

The Marketing DIN Layout created with Crystal might be adjusted in a future version. Changes are NOTautomatically applied to the layout in the system. In order to get the latest version of the layout we suggest thefollowing steps:1. Duplicate the existing layout to ensure any customization is saved.2. Reinstall the layout.


Example2.6.3.3.1.1


Print definitions2.6.3.3.1.2

As the report created with Crystal Reports can only be viewed when Crystal Reports Viewer is installed, weuse the Standard Marketing DIN Layout in all printdefinitions for Marketing Documents. That means there areno preinstalled Printdefinitions defined to use this layout. In order to use the layout for your marketingdocuments change the existing printdefinitions to use this layout instead of the standard DIN layout "DocumentDIN (DOC00008)" as described below:

Step 1 (Option 1)Open an existing document of the relevant type, e.g. A/R Invoice.

Open the Print Layout Designer from the Icon in the top menu.

Step 1 (Option 2)Open the printdefinition and select the relevant formtype to adjust, e.g. 133:AR InvoiceChoose Find.

Step 2Go to the tab Document and change the layout from "DOC: Document DIN (DOC00008)" to "DOC: DocumentDIN -RPT (DOC40000)".

Step 3Choose Update for the changes to take effect.Repeat these steps for all relevant printdefinitions.


Financial Reports2.6.3.4

Profit and Loss2.6.3.4.1

Profit and Loss - KPI (FIN05438)2.6.3.4.1.1

PurposeProfit and loss statement according to KPI (with financial ratios), including the option to filter by profit center,project or distribution rule.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Profit and Loss > Profit and Loss - KPI (FIN05438)

Fields

Reference Datefrom

Earliest date in the query

Reference Dateto

Latest date in the query

Add Voucher The default setting is NO. In general it is possible to take parked documents (vouchers)into consideration by selecting YES. These would be selected in the query even thoughthey have not been posted.

IgnoreAdjustment (per13.)

YES - Ignore adjustments in the 13th periodNO - Adjustments in the 13th are taken into accountONLY - Only adjustments of the 13th period are displayed

Show previousyear

YES - Show previous yearNO - Do not show previous year

Display Accountas

AcctCodeName - Account Code: NameExtCodeName - External Code: NameAcctCodeForeign - Acctount Code: Foreign NameExtCodeForeign - External Code: Foreign Name

Optional Filter:

Profitcenter When entering a profitcenter the results are filters by profitcenter (several entries arepossible)

Project When entering a project the results are filters by project (several entries are possible)

DistributionRules

When entering a distributions rule the results are filters by distributions rule (severalentries are possible)

The 1st page is a contraction of the Profit and Loss statement which fits on a DIN A4 page. These areimportant for the operational manager to get an overview of the company.More details are usually only required for the accountant. The required details up to the individual postingcan be easily accessed by navigating through the tree on the left side of the report or by drilling downwith the orange arrows in the report.

Gross Profit I = Sales Profit; important comparative measure (with this profit all indirect costs arebalanced)

Gross Profit II = Operating Gross Profit after Salary; important comparative measure (with this profit allindirect costs are balanced)


Profit and Loss (FIN05404)2.6.3.4.1.2

PurposeProfit and loss statement according to the chart of accounts (only standard subtotals and standard groupings)with possibility to analyse for each profit center, project or distribution rule

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Profit and Loss > Profit and Loss (FIN05404)

Fields

Reference DateFrom


Reference DateTo





Show ZeroBalance

YES - Show zero balanceNO - Do not show zero balance

Show last level YES - Show last levelNO - Do not show last level

Show previousyear


Optional Filter:



DistributionRules


In comparison to the report Profit and Loss - KPI (FIN05438) there is no contraction in this report and thereport can therefore quickly become very long (depending on the number of accounts in the chart ofaccounts). There are also less subtotals.


Profit and Loss by Template (FIN05405)2.6.3.4.1.3

PurposeProfit and loss statement according to an external individual template (including the possibility to analyse foreach profit center, project or distribution rule)

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Profit and Loss > Profit and Loss by Template (FIN05405)

Fields

Template

Currency Local currencySystem currency

Reference DateFrom


Reference Dateto





Show last level YES - Display last level or account numberNO - Do not display last level or account number

Display Accountas



Profit and Loss by Profitcenter - KPI (FIN05430)2.6.3.4.1.4

PurposeProfit and loss statement divided into profit centers (including KPI measures)

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Profit and Loss > Profit and Loss by Profit Center (FIN05430)

Fields

Reference DateFrom


Reference Dateto





Show ZeroBalance

NO - Zero Balance is not displayed (Default)YES - Zero Balance is displayed

Show previousyear

YES - Display previous yearNO - Do not display previous year

Optional Filter:



DistributionsRules



Balance Sheet2.6.3.4.2

Balance Sheet - LD (FIN05402)2.6.3.4.2.1

Purpose Listing of assets and liabilities of the company's annual balance sheet date

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Balance Sheet > Balance Sheet - LD (FIN05402)

Fields

Reference Date(date calendarselection)

Select the annual balance sheet date

Add Voucher(drop-down box)

Define if Journal Vouchers (Journal Entries which have not yet been posted) should bedisplayed in the report or not. You can choose from the following options:

No (Default) - Do not display Journal VouchersYes - Display Journal Vouchers

IgnoreAdjustment (per13.)(drop-down box)

Define if Transactions with/without Adj. Trans (Period 13) are displayed. You can choosefrom the following options:

No (Default) - Display Transactions with and without Adj. Trans (Period 13) selectedYes - Ignore (do not display) Transactions with Adj. Trans (Period 13) selected. Onlydisplay Transactions without Adj. Trans (Period 13) selected.Only - Only display Transactions with Adj. Trans (Period 13) selected. Do not displayTransactions without Adj. Trans (Period 13) selected.

Show ZeroBalance(drop-down box)

Define if Accounts with Zero Balance should be displayed in the report or not. You canchoose from the following options:

No (Default) - Do not display Accounts with Zero BalanceYes - Display Accounts with Zero Balance

Show previousyear(drop-down box)

Define if the Balance of the Previous Year should be displayed in the report or not. Youcan choose from the following options:

No (Default) - Do not display the Balance of the previous yearYes - Display the Balance of the previous year

To Level(drop-down box)

Define to which Account Level the details should be displayed. You can choose from thefollowing options:

All (Default) - Display all account levels up to level 7Number 1 to 6 - Display accounts up to the selected level

Currency(drop-down box)

Select the Currency Type in which to display the amounts. You can choose from thefollowing options:

Local Currency (Default)System Currency

Display Accountas


Order By(drop-down box)

Thisparameter isavailable inGermanlocalization only

Define the sequence of the Accounts. You can choose from the following options:Chart of Account (Default) - Sort by SAP Business One Standard Chart of AccountAccount Level 2 - HGB - Sort by Account Level 2 from the Chart of Account.

The selection of Account Level 2 - HGB is according to the definition of the GermanLaw (HGB).


Balance Sheet Template - LD (FIN05403)2.6.3.4.2.2

PurposeBalance sheet according to an external Template (SAP® partners can create their own templates)

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Balance Sheet > Balance Template (FIN05403)

Fields

Template Select the external balance template if exists

Reference Datefrom

Annual balance sheet date



YES - Ignore adjustments in the 13th periodNO - Adjustments in the 13th are taken into account

Show ZeroBalance


Show previousyear


Currency Local currencySystem currency

Display Accountas



Opening Balance - LD (FIN05413)2.6.3.4.2.3

PurposeOpening Balance (in general the 1st day of each fiscal year, without ongoing bookings for the new fiscal year)

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Balance Sheet > Opening Balance (FIN05413)

Fields

Reference Date Opening balance date

Show ZeroBalance(drop-down box)

Define if Accounts with Zero Balance should be displayed in the report or not. You canchoose from the following options:

No (Default) - Do not display Accounts with Zero BalanceYes - Display Accounts with Zero Balance




IgnoreAdjustment (per13.)(drop-down box)



Currency(drop-down box)

Select the Currency Type in which to display the amounts. You can choose from thefollowing options:

Local Currency (Default)System Currency


Journal / Statement2.6.3.4.3

Print Journal Transactions from SAP Form2.6.3.4.3.1

coresuite country package provides two reports for printing journal transactions of G/L accounts.Journal Transactions (FIN05420)Journal Transactions - SAP Form (FIN60006)

To display the form from the Preview of the Form "Account Balance" (805)Modules > Financials > Chart of Accounts

Click on the yellow arrow next to the balance field.

The Chart of Accounts window appears.


Select the report you want to print from the list.

The system then displays the relevant report or the parameter criteria for the relevant report.

You can also print these two reports via the menu. This procedure is described in the following section.


Journal Transactions - SAP Form (FIN60006)2.6.3.4.3.2

PurposeDisplay Journal Transactions of a G/L account as displayed in the SAP Form "Account Balance".

All columns of the Standard Form Settings of the SAP Business One Account Balance Form aredisplayed. In order to display any other columns, coresystems can create a user defined report onrequest.


Journal Transactions (FIN05420)2.6.3.4.3.3

PurposeQuery of account activity, including the graphical representation of the movements

The report can be displayed from the Preview of the Form "Account Balance" (805) or from the menuunder:Modules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Journal/ Statement > Journal Transactions (FIN05420). Thisopens the Parameter window.

Fields

Reference Datefrom(date calendarselection)

Select the earliest date as filter in the datasource query.

The transactions displayed depend on your selection for the filter by parameter.

Reference Dateto(date calendarselection)

Select the latest date as filter in the datasource query.

The transactions displayed depend on your selection for the filter by parameter.

Filter by(drop-down box)

Define the transaction range by Reference Date or Due Date. You can choose from thefollowing options:

Reference Date (Default)Due Date

Account(ChooseFrom list)

Select the account(s) you want to display in the report. It is possible to select multipleaccounts. Only journal transactions posted on the selected account(s) will be displayed.

Display Settings The parameters below define which data or objects will be displayed in the report.

Add Voucher (drop-down box)



IgnoreAdjustment (per13.) (drop-down box)



Hide accountswith nomovements(drop-down box)

Define if accounts with no movements in the selected date range should be displayed inthe report or not. You can choose from the following options:

Yes (Default) - Do not display accounts with no movements in the selected date rangeNo - Display the balance brought forward of accounts with no movements in the selecteddate range

Hide cancelledJournal Entries(drop-down box)

Define if Cancelled Journal Entries including the Reversal Journal Entries should bedisplayed in the report or not. You can choose from the following options:

No (Default) - Display all Journal Entries including the Cancelled Journal Entries andReversal Journal EntriesYes - Do not display Cancelled Journal Entries nor Reversal Journal Entries

Details(Invoices) (drop-down box)

Define if Details from Invoices should be displayed in the report or not. You can choosefrom the following options:

Yes (Default) - Display all Invoice detailsNo - Do not display all Invoice details

New page afternew account (drop-down box)

Define if a new page should be started after each account or not. You can choose from thefollowing options:

Yes (Default) - Start a new page after each account.


No - All accounts are listed below each other

Show Chart (drop-down box)

Define if a bar chart of balance per month should be displayed in the report or not. The barchart is only relevant for profit and loss accounts. You can choose from the followingoptions:

No (Default) - Do not display the chartYes - Display the chart

The chart is only displayed when only one account is selected in the filter below

Optional Filter The parameters below allow to filter the data displayed in the report. All filters are optionaland can be left empty.

Profit center (ChooseFrom list)

Select the profit center(s) from the choose from list which should be displayed in thereport. It is possible to select multiple profit centers. Only Journal Transactions posted onthe selected profit center(s) will be displayed.

Project (ChooseFrom list)

Select the project(s) from the choose from list which should be displayed in the report. It ispossible to select multiple project. Only Journal Transactions posted on the selectedproject(s) will be displayed.

DistributionsRules (ChooseFrom list)

Select the distribution rules(s) from the choose from list which should be displayed in thereport. It is possible to select multiple distribution rules. Only Journal Transactions postedon the selected distribution rules(s) will be displayed.

Enter the relevant parameters and choose OK. The system then displays the report, either with the chart orwithout, depending on whether you set the parameter Show Chart to Yes or No.


Trial Balance - LD (FIN05533)2.6.3.4.3.4

PurposeList of all account without grouping (Brought forward, Debit, Credit, Balance)

The ideal report for the accountant who can retrieve a breakdown in Debit and Credit.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Journal/Statement > Journal Balance (FIN05533)

Fields

Reference DateFrom


Reference Dateto




Show ZeroBalance

NO - Zero balance is not displayed (Default)YES - Zero balance is displayed

Include End-Year

NO - End-Year is not includedYES - End-Year is included (Default)

Add JournalVouchers

NO - Journal Vouchers are not added (Default)YES - Journal Vouchers are added


Journal Entry - LD (FIN05419)2.6.3.4.3.5

PurposeCollection and presentation of all journal entries (possibly filtered by marketing document type)

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Journal/Statement > Journal Entry (FIN05419)

Fields

Reference Datefrom


Reference Dateto




Optional Filter:

Document Type (Text)

Select the marketing document type from a choose from list (e.g. Invoice). This is optional.


Budget2.6.3.4.4

Profit and Loss vs. Budget - KPI (FIN05439)2.6.3.4.4.1

PurposeComparison of current income including the budget (broken down into KPI measures)

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Budget > Profit and Loss vs. Budget - KPI (FIN05439)

Fields

Reference Datefrom (date calendarselection)


Reference Dateto (date calendarselection)







Budget (drop-down box)

Select one or all of the available budgets from the drop-down box. For example Internal/External Budget or Worstcase/Bestcase. In general budget scenarios are created on profitcenter, therefore the default value is All (all budgets of the individual profit centerscombined).

Show Chart (drop-down box)

Define if a bar chart of balance per month should be displayed in the report or not. The barchart is only relevant for profit and loss accounts. You can choose from the followingoptions:

No (Default) - Do not display the chartYes - Display the chart

The chart is only displayed when only one account is selected in the filter below

Show previousyear(drop-down box)

Define if the balance and budget of the previous year should be displayed in the report ornot. You can choose from the following options:

No (Default) - Do not display the previous year balance and budgetYes - Display the previous year balance and budget

This parameter is new as of country package version 3.0






Distribution Select the distribution rules(s) from the choose from list which should be displayed in the


Rules (ChooseFrom list)

report. It is possible to select multiple distribution rules. Only Journal Transactions postedon the selected distribution rules(s) will be displayed.


Profit and Loss vs. Budget (FIN05408)2.6.3.4.4.2

PurposeComparison of current income including the budget (broken down according to the chart of accounts)

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Budget > Profit and Loss vs. Budget (FIN05408)

Fields






The default setting is NO. In general it is possible to take parked documents (vouchers)into consideration by selecting YES. These would be selected in the query even thoughthey have not been posted.





Show ZeroBalance

Define if accounts with Zero Balance should be displayed in the report or not. You canchoose from the following options:

No - Do not display Accounts with Zero Balance (Default) Yes - Display Accounts with Zero Balance

Show last level YES - Show last level (Default)NO - Do not show last level

To Level Define to which Account Level the details should be displayed. You can choose from thefollowing options:

All - Display all account levels up to level 7 (Default) Number 1 to 6 - Display accounts up to the selected level

Optional Filter:





DistributionRules (ChooseFrom list)


In comparison to the report Profit and Loss vs. Budget - KPI (FIN05439) there is no contraction in thisreport and the report can therefore quickly become very long (depending on the number of accounts inthe chart of accounts). There are also less subtotals.


Profit and Loss vs Budget Dashboard - XC (FIN600001)2.6.3.4.4.3

PurposeThe coresuite Profit and Loss vs Budget Dashboard compares the current income including to the budget(broken down into KPI measures).Gross Profit, Turnover, Profit(loss), Total Costs and Budget are calculated according to the accountclassification of coresuite accounting.

This is a sample dashboard delivered for free within the country package to demonstrate how datarelated to financial key numbers can be visualized with Crystal Dashboard. To use this dashboard in aproductive environment contact [email protected] to buy the adjusted dashboard specific foryour company.

Requirements & settingsTo view the report on ensure that Flashplayer is installed on the system. We recommend the free AdobeFlashplayer 10.0.By default the values of the dashboard are refreshed automatically every 15 minutes. This interval can beadjusted by your administrator.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Budget > Profit/Loss Dashboard - XC (FIN60001)

General AuthorizationsOnly users with authorization right to the datasource "Profit/Loss Dashboard - XC (FIN60001)" can view thisreport. The authorization can be set in SAP Business One under Administration > System Initialization >Authorizations > General Authorizations > User Authorization > coresuite designer > Datasource > FIN >Profit/Loss Dashboard - XC (FIN60001).

mailto:[email protected]

http://get.adobe.com/flashplayer/



HelpClick on the Help tab to receive more information.


Budget Report - KPI (FIN05440)2.6.3.4.4.4

PurposeBudget (only Budget numbers) according to KPI (subtotals). the ideal report for the bank or third party.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Budget > Budget Report - KPI (FIN05440)

Fields


Select the earliest Date as filter in the datasource query.


Select the latest Date as filter in the datasource query.
















Budget Report (FIN05433)2.6.3.4.4.5

PurposeBudget according to chart of accounts (only Budget numbers). Grouped according to chart of accounts.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Budget > Budget Report (FIN05433)

Fields






The default setting is NO. In general it is possible to take parked documents (vouchers)into consideration by selecting YES. These would be selected in the query even thoughthey have not been posted.




Various budgets can be selected, if available (e.g. internal / external budget orWorstcase / Bestcase). In general budget scenarios are created on profile center.Therefore, the default value is All (all budgets of the individual profit centers combined).

Show ZeroBalance (drop-down box)


Show last level YES - Display last level or account numberNO - Do not display last level or account number

To level Define to which Account Level the details should be displayed. You can choose from thefollowing options:

All - Display all account levels up to level 7 (Default)Number 1 to 6 - Display accounts up to the selected level

Optional Filter:








Customer (A/R)2.6.3.4.5

Customer (A/R) Ageing Report - LD (FIN05406)2.6.3.4.5.1

PurposeList of outstanding sales for business partners (customers / debtors). Debtor list, which are handled by theaccounts receivable manager.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Customer (A/R) > Customer (A/R) Ageing Report (FIN05406)

Fields

Reference Date By default the current date is entered. That means all open postings are displayed.If the reference date is set to the past only postings with a posting date (Field: RefDate)BEFORE this date are displayed. Furthermore the "Age" of postings is calculated according to the date entered here.

Age by Select the date type to be used to calculate the age of the postings. The default is the"Due date" (Field: DueDate). It is also possible to age by posting (Field: RefDate) ordocument (Field: TaxDate) date.


Business Partner Filter the report by business partner(s). The default is empty that means all BusinessPartners will be displayed

Control Account Filter the report according to control account, which is defined for the customer (e.g.domestic and foreign). The default selection is for all open accounts.

Due date to Filter the report by Due Date to. That means postings with a later due date (Field:DueDate) will not be displayed.

Optional ParametersAdditionally there are optional parameters for specific customer requirements that can be activated on request.To activate the parameters it is required to duplicate the report and enter values in the input order. The coresuite standard reports do not display these parameters as it would lead to more complex and notuser-friendly reports.

Due Date from Parameter "FromDate": Filter the report by Due Date from. That means postings with aearlier due date (Field: DueDate) will not be displayed.

Posting Datefrom

Parameter "Date01": Filter the report by Posting Date from. That means postings witha earlier posting date (Field: RefDate) will not be displayed.

Document Datefrom

Parameter "Date03": Filter the report by Document Date from. That means postingswith a earlier document date (Field: TaxDate) will not be displayed.

Document Dateto

Parameter "Date04": Filter the report by Document Date to. That means postings witha later document date (Field: TaxDate) will not be displayed.


SampleThe age of a posting is calculated depending on the two parameters Age By and Reference Date.Postings on Account (e.g. unallocated Payments) always have the age 0 that means they will be displayed inthe column Postings on Account & not due Invoices.

ExampleAn Invoice was created on 01.01.2010 with due date 02.02.2010.Parameters entered:

"Reference Date" = "03.03.2010""Age By" = "Due Date"

>> Age of the Invoice is:

"03.03.2010" - "02.02.2010" = 29 days

Section 1 (Business Partner Overview)Shows the business partner overview.

Section 2 (Postings in detail by Business Partner)Shows the postings in detail, sorted by business partner.

When you select the star, you are redirected automatically to "Internal reconciliation" in SAP BusinessOne where you can reconcile the different postings.

Section 3 (Summary)Shows a summary.


Customer (A/R) Ageing Statement - LD (FIN05418)2.6.3.4.5.2

PurposeStatement of the open positions of the Business Partners

The report can easily be sent to a client or business partner via e-mail. It can be used as an alternativeto the dunning letter.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Customer (A/R) > Customer (A/R) Ageing Statement (FIN05418)

Fields

Reference Dateto

By default the current date is entered. That means all open sales are taken intoconsideration.

Age By Due DatePosting DateDocument Date

Optional Filter

BusinessPartner

Select a business partner.

BP Group Select a business partner group.

Sales employee Select a sales employee.

Display Detailsfrom

Select a date.


Customer (A/R) Account Journals - LD (FIN05410)2.6.3.4.5.3

PurposeAccount journal per business partner (all postings per business partner)

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Customer (A/R) > Customer (A/R) Account Journals (FIN05410)

Fields

Date From(date calendarselection)


The Date Type of the Journal Postings depends on the filter by set in the parameterafterwards.

Date To(date calendarselection)


The Date Type of the Journal Postings depends on the filter by set in the parameterafterwards.

Filter by(drop-down box)

Define which the Journal Entries are filtered according to the Date Range entered above.Also the details will be ordered by this date in the report. You can choose from thefollowing options:

Posting Date (RefDate) (Default)Due Date (DueDate)Document Date (TaxDate)

Display settings

New page afternew businesspartner (drop-down box)

Define if a new page should be created for each business partner or not. You can choosefrom the following options:

No (Default) - Do not create a new page for each business partnerYes - Create a new page for each business partner


Business Partner (ChooseFrom list)

Select the Business Partner(s) from the choose from list which should be displayed in thereport. It is possible to select multiple business partners. Only Journal Transactionsposted on the selected business partners(s) will be displayed. If nothing is selected alldata will be displayed.

IncludedDocumentTypes (ChooseFrom list)

Select the document type(s) from the choose from list which should be displayed in thereport. It is possible to select multiple document type. Only Journal Transactions postedon the selected document type(s) will be displayed. If nothing is selected all data will bedisplayed.


Vendor (A/P)2.6.3.4.6

Vendor (A/P) Ageing Report - LD (FIN05406)2.6.3.4.6.1

PurposeList of outstanding purchases from business partners (vendor / creditors). Creditors list, which are handled bythe accounts payable manager.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Vendor (A/P) > Vendor (A/P) Ageing Report (FIN05406)

Fields

Reference Date By default the current date is entered. That means all open postings are displayed.If the reference date is set to the past only postings with a posting date (Field: RefDate)BEFORE this date are displayed. Furthermore the "Age" of postings is calculated according to the date entered here.

Age by Select the date type to be used to calculate the age of the postings. The default is the"Due date" (Field: DueDate). It is also possible to age by posting (Field: RefDate) ordocument (Field: TaxDate) date.


Business Partner Filter the report by business partner(s). The default is empty that means all BusinessPartners will be displayed

Control Account Filter the report according to control account, which is defined for the customer (e.g.domestic and foreign). The default selection is for all open accounts.

Due date to Filter the report by Due Date to. That means postings with a later due date (Field:DueDate) will not be displayed.

Optional ParametersAdditionally there are optional Parameters for specific customer requirements that can be activated on request.To activate the parameters it is required to duplicate the report and enter values in the input order. The coresuite standard reports do not display these parameters as it would lead to more complex and notuser-friendly reports.

Due Date from Parameter "FromDate": Filter the report by Due Date from. That means postings with aearlier due date (Field: DueDate) will not be displayed.

Posting Datefrom

Parameter "Date01": Filter the report by Posting Date from. That means postings with aearlier posting date (Field: RefDate) will not be displayed.

Document Datefrom

Parameter "Date03": Filter the report by Document Date from. That means postings with aearlier document date (Field: TaxDate) will not be displayed.

Document Dateto

Parameter "Date04": Filter the report by Document Date to. That means postings with alater document date (Field: TaxDate) will not be displayed.


SampleThe age of a posting is calculated depending on the two parameters Age By and Reference Date.Postings on Account (e.g. unallocated Payments) always have the age 0 that means they will be displayed inthe column Postings on Account & not due Invoices.

ExampleAn Invoice was created on 01.01.2010 with due date 02.02.2010.Parameters entered:

"Reference Date" = "03.03.2010""Age By" = "Due Date"

>> Age of the Invoice is:

"03.03.2010" - "02.02.2010" = 29 days

Section 1 (Business Partner Overview)Shows the business partner overview.

Section 2 (Postings in detail by Business Partner)Shows the postings in detail, sorted by business partner.

When you select the star, you are redirected automatically to "Internal reconciliation" in SAP BusinessOne where you can reconcile the different postings.

Section 3 (Summary)Shows a summary.


Vendor (A/P) Account Journals - LD (FIN05410)2.6.3.4.6.2

PurposeAccount journal per business partner (all postings per business partner)

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Vendor (A/P) > Vendor (A/P) Account Journals (FIN05410)

Fields

Date from Earliest date in the query.

Date to Latest date in the query.

Filter by Reference DateDue Date Tax Date

Display Settings

New page afternew businesspartner

YES - A new page for each Business PartnerNO - Everything together

Optional Filter

Business Partner Filter by one or multiple Business Partners

IncludedDocument Types

Filter by one or multiple Document Types


Lists2.6.3.4.7

Chart of Accounts - LD (FIN05401)2.6.3.4.7.1

PurposeListing of all accounts and the existing profit centers and distribution rules.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Lists > Chart of Accounts (FIN05401)

Parameter formNo parameter form


Chart of Accounts KPI - LD (FIN05401)2.6.3.4.7.2

PurposeListing of all accounts, including the division into classes, class groups and Subtotals (KPI)

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Lists > Chart of Accounts KPI (FIN05401)

Fields

Show last level YES - Show all levels (default)NO - Do not all levels (only classes and class groups)


Chart of Accounts Template - LD (FIN05401)2.6.3.4.7.3

Purpose Listing of all accounts (including the profit center and distribution rules) of existing external chart of accountstemplates.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Lists > Chart of Accounts Template (FIN05401)

Fields

TemplateID Select an existing external chart of accounts template


Cash Flow2.6.3.4.8

The cash flow reports are documented in the section Liquidity Package.


Tax Report2.6.3.4.9

VAT by Code (FIN05414)2.6.3.4.9.1

PurposeList of taxation and VAT base amounts for each tax code defined in the corresponding period.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Tax Report > VAT by Code (FIN05414)

Fields

Reference Datefrom


Reference Dateto


Details YES - Default setting. Show details including the individual postings.NO - Only show the contraction of the tax codes

Code Filter by each tax code so that only the selected codes are displayed

VAT by Account (FIN05415)2.6.3.4.9.2

Purpose List of taxation and VAT base amounts for each account and tax code defined in the corresponding period.Ideal to derive the VAT-liable turnover.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Tax Report > VAT by Account (FIN05415)

Fields

Reference Datefrom


Reference Dateto


Details YES - Default setting. Show details including the individual postings.NO - Only show the contraction of the tax codes

Code Filter by each tax code so that only the selected codes are displayed

Tax Report Switzerland (FIN05450) - CH Only2.6.3.4.9.3

Purpose Country-specific report for tax declaration. This report is available in the languages German, French and Italianonly. It was used before 2010 only.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Tax Report > Tax Report Switzerland (FIN05450)

Fields

Reference Datefrom


Reference Dateto


Display TaxTutorial

Ja - Display the tutorial on how to adjust the settings in SAP for the tax declaration boxesas first page


Nein - Only show the tax declaration report

Tax Report Switzerland 01.01.2010 - 30.06.2010 (FIN60002) - CH Only2.6.3.4.9.4

Purpose Country-specific report for tax declaration. This report is available in the languages German, French and Italianonly.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Tax Report > Tax Report Switzerland 01.01.2010 - 30.06.2010(FIN60002)

Fields

Reference Datefrom


Reference Dateto


Display TaxTutorial

Ja - Display the Tutorial on how to adjust the settings in SAP for the Tax declarationboxes as first pageNein - Only show the tax declaration report

System MessageIn case one or more if the Tax Declaration Boxes is not defined in SAP, a message box will be displayed asinformation. To display the Report select OK.

Tutorial for Tax Declaration Box SettingsDisplay the Tutorial on how to adjust the settings in SAP for the Tax declaration boxes as first page byselecting Yes in the Parameter form.

For a correct Swiss tax report you need to enter exactly the following tax declaration boxes in SAP BusinessOne under Administration > Setup > Financials > Tax > Tax Declaration Boxes

Please ensure to fill in the correct:1) Boxcode2) Type3) Summary Field4) Debit/Credit5) Formula Syntax

Sales Reports2.6.3.5

Sales Revenue Dashboard - XC (SAR130003)2.6.3.5.1

PurposeThe coresuite Sales Revenue Dashboard displays Sales Revenue of the current Financial Year grouped bySales Employees, Countries, Customers or Item Groups (Service documents are marked as "Service" itemgroup) in comparison to the Previous Year To Day (YTD).The amounts displayed are the net amounts taken from the Sales Marketing Documents. Sales Revenue is thecombination of Invoices and Credit Notes. Discounts are taken into consideration, Tax or Freight are notincluded.

This is a Sample Dashboard delivered for free within the country package to demonstrate how datarelated to sales documents can be visualized with Crystal Dashboard. To use this dashboard in aproductive environment contact [email protected] to buy the adjusted dashboard specific for



your company.

Requirements & settingsTo view the report on ensure that Flashplayer is installed on the system. We recommend the free AdobeFlashplayer 10.0.By default the values of the Dashboard are refreshed automatically every 15 Minutes. This interval can beadjusted by your administrator.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Sales > Sales Revenue Dashboard - XC (FIN60001)orModules > Sales - A/R > Sales Reports > Sales Revenue Dashboard - XC (FIN60001)

General AuthorizationsOnly users with authorization right to the datasource "Sales Revenue Dashboard - XC (FIN60001)" can viewthis report. The authorization can be set in SAP Business One under Menu > Administration > SystemInitialization > Authorizations > General Authorizations > User Authorization > coresuite designer >Datasource > SAR > Sales Revenue Dashboard - XC (FIN60001).




Documents - Sales - LD (SAR06000)2.6.3.5.2

PurposeDisplay relevant data for selected sales documents. All amounts displayed are net amounts.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Sales > Documents - Sales - LD (SAR06000)

Fields

Order by(drop-down box)

Define by which Object Type the data is grouped. You can choose from the followingoptions:

Business Partner (Default)Delivery Date (Due Date)Document DateDocument OwnerSales PersonItem GroupCountryItem NameBusiness Partner GroupDist. Rule (Profit Center)

Document Type(drop-down box)

Select the Document Type(s) that you want to display in the report. You can choose fromthe following options:

Sales Quotation (Default)Sales OrderDelivery & ReturnDelivery OnlyReturn OnlyInvoice & Credit MemoInvoice & Credit Memo & down Payment InvoiceInvoice OnlyCredit Memo OnlyDown Payment Invoice All

Status(drop-down box)

Select the documents for which you want to display the status. You can choose from thefollowing options:

Open (Default) - Only display open documentsClose - Only display closed documentsAll - Display both open and closed documents

Detailed(drop-down box)

Define if the all document rows should be displayed in the report or not. You can choosefrom the following options:

No (Default) - Do not display document rowsYes - Display document rows

IncludedocumentFreight/Rounding(drop-down box)

Define if Freight and Rounding on Document Header should be calculated in the amountsdisplayed or not. You can choose from the following options:

No (Default) - Do not take the Freight and Rounding on Document Header intoconsiderationYes - Take the Freight and Rounding on Document Header into consideration

This parameter is new as of version 2.90. Before, the freight and rounding ondocument header was not taken into consideration. In general, the correct way would be totake it into consideration. For compatibility reasons we added this parameter and used thedefault value to display the same values as in older versions.

Optional FilterThe parameters below allow to filter the data displayed in the Report. All filters are optionaland can be left empty.


Business Partner(ChooseFrom list)

Select the Business Partner(s) that you want to display in the report. It is possible toselect multiple Business Partners. Only documents for the selected Business Partner(s)will be displayed.

Item(ChooseFrom list)

Select the item(s) that you want to display in the report. It is possible to select multipleitems. Only documents for the selected item(s) will be displayed.

Reference DateFrom(date calendarselection)

Select the earliest date as filter in the datasource query

Reference DateTo(date calendarselection)

Select the latest date as filter in the datasource query

Sales employee (ChooseFrom list)

Select the sales employee(s) that you want to display in the report. It is possible to selectmultiple sales employees. Only documents for the selected sales employee(s) will bedisplayed.


Sales Pivot (SAR06001)2.6.3.5.3

PurposeDisplay relevant data for selected sales documents. All amounts displayed are net amounts.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Sales > Documents - Sales - LD (SAR06000)

Fields

Order by(drop-down box)

Define by which Object Type the data is grouped. You can choose from the followingoptions:

Item GroupCountryItem NameBusiness PartnerBusiness Partner GroupDocument OwnerSales PersonDistribution Rule

Reference DateFrom(date calendarselection)

Select the earliest date as filter in the datasource query

Reference DateTo(date calendarselection)

Select the latest date as filter in the datasource query

Document Type(drop-down box)

Select the Document Type(s) that you want to display in the report. You can choose fromthe following options:

Invoice & Credit MemoInvoice & Credit Memo & down Payment Invoice

Optional FilterThe parameters below allow to filter the data displayed in the Report. All filters are optionaland can be left empty.

Business Partner(ChooseFrom list)

Select the Business Partner(s) that you want to display in the report. It is possible toselect multiple Business Partners. Only documents for the selected Business Partner(s)will be displayed.

Item(ChooseFrom list)

Select the item(s) that you want to display in the report. It is possible to select multipleitems. Only documents for the selected item(s) will be displayed.

Sales employee (ChooseFrom list)

Select the sales employee(s) that you want to display in the report. It is possible to selectmultiple sales employees. Only documents for the selected sales employee(s) will bedisplayed.


Sales Backorder Report - SAP Form (SAR130004)2.6.3.5.4

PurposeTo print SAP Business One Sales Backorder Report.

To display the form from the Preview of the Form "Backorder Report" (10065066)Modules > Sales - A/R > Sales Reports > Backorder. This opens the Backorder window.

Enter your selection criteria and click OK. The system then displays the Backorder Report.


Click on the Preview icon in the task bar. The system then displays the Sales Report.

All columns of the Standard Form Settings of the SAP Business One Sales Backorder Report windoware displayed. In order to display any other columns, coresystems can create a user defined report onrequest.


Service2.6.3.6

Service Dashboard - XC (SRV140000)2.6.3.6.1

PurposeThe coresuite Service Dashboard displays the queue of all open Service Calls in the SAP Business Onesystem and offers analysis of the Workload of Service Consultants with 3 integrated charts.

This is a Sample Dashboard delivered for free within the country package to demonstrate how datarelated to service calls can be visualized with Crystal Dashboard. To use this dashboard in a productiveenvironment contact [email protected] to buy the adjusted dashboard specific for yourcompany.

Requirements & settingsTo view the report on ensure that Flashplayer is installed on the system. We recommend the free AdobeFlashplayer 10.0.By default the values of the dashboard are refreshed automatically every 5 minutes. This interval can beadjusted by your administrator.

AccessModules > coresuite Reports > Service > Service Dashboard - XC (SRV140000)orModules > Service > Service Reports > Service Dashboard - XC (SRV140000)




131CORESUITE LIQUIDITY PACKAGE

CORESUITE LIQUIDITY PACKAGE3

The coresuite liquidity package is aimed at companies that want to control their liquidity proactively.

The coresuite liquidity package enables you to create forecasts (Liquidity Forecast) and analyses of the past(Cash Flow Statement with operational, investment and financial cash flow). The Customer Payment Ratingcalculates the average payment delay of your customers (Modules > Business Partners > Business PartnerMaster Data > Payment Terms > Average Delay) and takes this delay into account for your forecast. Otherthan with the standard SAP Cash Flow function, you can also include orders, purchase orders, deliveries andall other SAP documents in your calculation.

With the installment function you expand your order management by splitting purchase documents or salesdocuments into installments even before you create the invoice. By doing so, you can distribute large incomingor outgoing payments over a longer period of time.

The coresuite liquidity package consists of three reports and a function to define installments on marketingdocuments other than invoices. The three reports are:

Cash Flow Statement (FIN60004)Customer Payment Rating (FIN60007)Liquidity Forecast (FIN60000)

To open the reports, go to Modules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Cash Flow.


3.1 Cash Flow Statement (FIN60004)

Modules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Cash Flow > Cash Flow Statement (FIN60004)

With this report you can analyze the history of your liquidity. The report differentiates between operational cashflow, investment cash flow and financial cash flow. The reports show you why your liquidity has changed.

For this report to work, the coresuite accounting module must be mapped correctly.

3.1.1 Window Parameter: Cash Flow Statement (FIN60004)

Layout description Differentiation between operational cash flow, investment cash flow and financialcash flow.

Date Range:

Reference Date (Date) Enter the reference date.

Time Interval (Text) Choose the duration of the time interval from the drop-down list. You can choosefrom the following options:

12 Months6 Months3 Months4 Quarters2 Quarters1 Quarter

Display in Report:

Currency (Text) Choose the currency of the report from the drop-down list. You can choose fromthe following options:

Local CurrencySystem Currency

Display Settings:

Control Sum (Text) Choose Yes if you want to take into account the control sum in your report.Choose No if you do not want to take into account the control sum in yourreport.

Default Values [Button] Choose Default Values if you want to reset the parameters to the default values.

After entering the data, choose OK. The system then displays the report.


3.2 Customer Payment Rating (FIN60007)

Modules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Cash Flow > Customer Payment Rating (FIN60007)

This report calculates your customers’ payment behavior. If you want, you can transfer the value directly fromthe report into the business partner master data. The average delay is taken into account for the LiquidityForecast. This means that the forecast will be more accurate.

3.2.1 Window Parameter: Customer Payment Rating (FIN60007)

Enter the relevant data in this window or choose Default Values if you would like to use the default values foryour report.

Layout description Overview over your customers with invoices and average delay per invoice. Theaverage delay is calculated over the period of 1 year.

Date Range:

Year (Numeric) Enter a year. The report calculates the average delay for the year you choose andthe year before that. Enter the year in the format YYYY.

Display Settings:

Display Details (Text) Choose Yes if you want to display the details for your report. The report willthen not only display the average delay for the selected year and the yearbefore that, but also the payment delay for each invoice of the selected year.Choose No if you do not want to display the details for the report. The report willonly display the average payment delay for the selected year and the yearbefore that.

Optional Filter:

Business Partner (Text) If you want to restrict your report to one or more business partners, select therelevant business partner(s) from the choose-from list.


After entering all the data, choose OK. The system then displays the report.

The report is sorted by customers, so you will get a clear overview over the payment behavior of yourcustomers. The orange arrows in the report are linked directly to the SAP Business One system. When youclick on an arrow, the system opens the window A/R Invoice or the window Business Partner Master Data.


3.3 Liquidity Forecast (FIN60000)

Modules > coresuite Reports > Financials > Cash Flow > Liquidity Forecast (FIN60000)

This report enables you to control your liquidity: it summarizes all Cash Flow-relevant processes in your SAPsystem. You can also add a graph to visualize the information. While in the standard SAP Cash Flow report (Modules > Financials > Financial Reports > Financial > Cash Flow), only invoices are taken into account, theLiquidity Forecast takes into account both outgoing payments (e.g. payroll) and incoming payments (e.g.orders).

3.3.1 Window Parameter: Liquidity Forecast (FIN60000)

Layout description Summary of all Cash Flow-relevant processes in your SAP system.

Date Range:

Reference Date (Date) Enter the reference date here.

Time Interval (Text) Choose the duration of the time interval from the drop-down list. You can choosefrom the following options:

12 Months4 Quarters12 Weeks12 Days

Displayed Postings Types:

Include OpeningBalance (Postings onCash Accounts in past)(Text)

The Opening Balance is calculated from the Postings (Journal Entries) on CashAccounts with a Posting Date before the Reference Date selected.

Choose Yes if you want to include the opening balance in your report.Choose No if you do not want to include opening balance in your report.

Include Postings afterReference Date (Text)

The Postings after reference date are Journal Entries or Journal Vouchers on CashAccounts with a Posting Date equal or after the Reference Date selected.

Choose Yes if you want to include the postings in future in your report. In theOptional Filters section below, you can define the Posting Origin Types to beincluded.Choose No if you do not want to include postings in future in your report.

Include MarketingDocuments (Text)

Choose Yes if you want to include the marketing documents in your report. Inthe Optional Filters section below, you can define the Marketing DocumentTypes to be included.Choose No if you do not want to include marketing documents in your report.

Include MarketingDocuments Drafts (Text)

Choose Yes if you want to include the marketing documents drafts in yourreport. In the Optional Filters section below, you can define the MarketingDocument Types to be included.Choose No if you do not want to include marketing documents drafts in yourreport.

Include Payment Drafts(Text)

Choose Yes if you want to include payment drafts in your report.Choose No if you do not want to include payment drafts in your report.

Include RecurringPostings (Text)

Choose Yes if you want to include recurring postings in your report.Choose No if you do not want to include recurring postings in your report.

Include JournalVouchers (Text)

Journal vouchers (Modules > Financials > Journal Vouchers) are drafts that do notcreate any values in the general ledger.

Choose Yes if you want to include journal vouchers in your report.Choose No if you do not want to include journal vouchers in your report.

Include ProjectedPostings Table (Text)

You will find the table Projected Postings under Modules > Financials > FinancialReports > Financial > Cash Flow.

Choose Yes if you want to include the table Projected Postings in your report.Choose No if you do not want to include the table Projected Postings in your


report.

Display Settings:

Sort by (Text) Define how you want to sort the data in your report. You can sort the data by:Currency Document TypeChart of Accounts

Display Details (Text) Choose Yes if you want to take into account the details for the report.Choose No if you do not want to take into account the details for the report.

Show Chart (Text) Choose Yes if you want your report to include graphs.Choose No if you do not want your report to include graphs.

Calculation Method ofExpected Date andAmount (Text)

Choose STANDARD for the standard calculation method for marketingdocuments. This means that the expected date of the money will be calculatedaccording to the Payment Terms in the document.Choose DELAY to use the standard calculation method for marketingdocuments adding the average delay of the business partners.Choose CASHDISCOUNT if you want to take into account the cash discount. Ifthe cash discount is applicable (i.e. if the due date is still in the future), thesystem will take into account the highest cash discount possible.

Currency (Text) From the drop-down list, select the currency for your report. You can choose fromthe following options:

Local CurrencySystem Currency

Optional Filter:

Origin of Journal Entry(Postings afterReference Date) (Text)

From the choose-from list, select the origin type(s) of the journal entries you wantto include in the report. You can choose from the following options:

Incoming PaymentDepositJournal EntryOutgoing PaymentCheck for PaymentPredated Deposit

Marketing DocumentType (Text)

From the choose-from list, select the document type(s) you want to include in thereport. You can choose from the following options:

AR InvoiceAR Credit MemoDelivery NoteSales OrderAP InvoiceAP Credit MemoGoods Receipt POAR Down PaymentAP Down PaymentPurchase OrderSales Quotation

Account (Text) If you want to restrict your report to one or several accounts, select the relevantaccount(s) from the choose-from list.

Business Partner (Text) If you want to restrict your report to one or several business partners, select therelevant business partner(s) from the choose-from list.

Sales employees (onDocument HeaderLevel) (Text)

If you want to restrict your report to one or several sales employees, select therelevant sales employee(s) from the choose-from list.

Only the Sales Employee defined in the header section of the form will betaken into account. If you have defined several sales employees outside the


header level (e.g. on the Sales Order on the tab Contents in the column SalesEmployee), you will need to create individual records for each of them, if you wantto take them into account.

Project (on DocumentHeader Level) (Text)

If you want to restrict your report to one or several projects, select the relevantproject(s) from the choose-from list.

Only the project defined in the header section of the form will be taken intoaccount. If you have defined several projects outside the header level (e.g. on the Sales Order on the tab Contents in the column Project), you will need to createindividual records for each of them, if you want to take them into account.


After entering all the data, choose OK. The system then displays the report.


3.4 Define Installments

With the coresuite liquidity package you can define installments. Unlike with the standard SAP system, whereyou can define installments only in the Payment Terms, with the coresuite liquidity package you can defineinstallments for the following documents:

Sales:Sales QuotationSales OrdersDeliveriesReturns (Sales)AR Credit Memo

Purchasing:Purchase QuotationPurchase OrdersGoods Receipt POsReturns (Purchase)AP Credit Memo

For AR Invoices and AP Invoices you cannot define installments, because for these documents the SAPstandard system already provides a function for defining installments.

AccessOpen a document, e.g. a delivery, right-click on it and choose Define Installments. The window Installmentsappears:

Fields

Number of installments Enter the number of installments.

Due Date Define the due date for the installments.

Percent Enter the percent of the total amount that should be paid with this installment.

Amount This field displays the amount of the relevant installment.

Open Amount This field displays the amount that still needs to be paid.


ProcedureEnter the necessary data.Choose OK. The window will close.To display the installment data again, open the relevant document and right-click on it. Choose DefineInstallments again. The system displays the window Installments and you can see the relevant information.

If you defined installments for a document and then create an invoice as the target document, thesystem issues a warning that you have to define the installments on the invoice under Accounting.

If you defined installments for a document and then create a partial target document, the system issuesa warning that you have to redefine the installments on the target document.

139CORESUITE CUSTOMIZE

CORESUITE CUSTOMIZE4

4.1 System requirements

Hardware and software requirements for SAP Business OneThe hardware and software requirements for SAP Business One are available on www.sap.com or on the SAPPartner Portal (requires SAP superuser login).

Hardware and software requirements for coresuiteTo use coresuite customize, your system must meet the requirements for coresuite. You can download thelatest coresuite system requirements from our website: http://www.coresystems.ch/downloads.

http://www.sap.com

http://www.coresystems.ch/downloads


4.2 Introduction

coresuite customize is an add-on with which you can change the look and behavior of SAP Business Onewindows.

coresuite customize consists of five modules:OptimizerItem PlacementFunction ButtonNew ItemsNew Menu

With coresuite customize you can tailor SAP Business One to your needs and optimize your workflows toreduce administrative efforts. The customization of SAP Business One can be achieved by using coresuitecustomize rules. There are three ways to create rules:

Create your own rules using the right-click menuUsing the right-click menu you can create simple rules with which you can move fields, color fields, definerequired fields, etc. For more information, please refer to right-click menu.

Amend example rulesFor more information on example rules and how to import them, please refer to Import Example Rules andto the coresuite customize reference manual under Installed example rules.

Create your own rules from scratchCode your own rules. For more information on coding, please refer to the coresuite customize referencemanual under Basic skills - Coding.


4.3 Rules

What is a rule?A rule is a function, i.e. a validation, calculation or change in SAP Business One. Each coresuite customizemodule consists of rules. In the modules, each line corresponds to a rule.

Example: This is the window of the Optimizer module. The line marked in red represents a rule thatautomatically generates a customer number when you add a business partner.

Activating rulesTo activate a rule, activate the checkbox in the column Active and choose Update. The change is effectiveimmediately; you do not need to restart either SAP Business One or the add-on.

Exception: Rules with the Event Type StartUp. To activate these rules, you must stop and re-start theadd-on.

Deactivating rulesTo deactivate a rule, deactivate the checkbox in the column Active and choose Update.


4.4 Description of forms

This chapter describes the coresuite customize forms in which you can define and amend rules:

OptimizerItem PlacementFunction ButtonNew ItemsNew MenuExtended CodeExport / Import

AccessTo open the masks, go to Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize and select the relevantform.

AuthorizationAs of coresuite version 1.51 you can activate/deactivate each rule for defined user groups.

The default setting is that all existing rules (or rules for which you have not changed any authorizations)are active for all groups, i.e. that all user groups can access these rules.For more information, please refer to Authorizations.


4.4.1 Optimizer

In the form coresuite customize Optimizer you can create rules and edit existing rules.

The form mainly consists of a list. In this list, each line corresponds to a rule and each column corresponds toa property of the rule. Below, the columns are explained in detail. For examples of Optimizer rules, please referto the coresuite customize Reference manual.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Optimizer

Window

Fields

Blue section: General settings

In the blue section, you can define general settings. We recommend that you fill in these columns first,because some of the other columns depend on these ones.

Active Checkbox active: The rule is active. Checkbox inactive: The rule is not active.

RuleName In this column you can assign a name to the rule. Make sure you choose a name thatis unique, so you can differentiate the rules easily. The rules are sorted by this name.

Choose useful names for your rules; e.g. include the namespace of the person whocreates the rule. This will enable you to find them more easily later.

Type Select the type from the drop-down list. You can choose from the following options:CSCODE - c# codeVBCODE - Visual Basic codeSQL - Structured Query LanguageREGEX - Regular Expression

Action From the drop-down list, select the action that you would like to be carried out. Youcan choose from the following options:


VALIDATE - Select VALIDATE if you want the system to validate the format of thevalue that the user enters in this field. It only makes sense to choose this option if incolumn Type you have chosen SQL or REGEX.CHANGE VALUES - Select CHANGE VALUES if you want the system to convert theentry into another format (e.g. convert the zip code into the relevant city). It onlymakes sense to choose this option if in column Type you have chosen SQL.

Red section: Warnings

In the red area you can define error messages that should be displayed if the rule fails. "Failing" does notnecessarily mean that the rule contains errors. A rule could also fail because the REGEX validation fails, e.g.because the user entered a value that is not in the correct format.

Only Warning Here you can choose if the system should issue a warning if the validation fails. Theuser can then continue to work normally.

Checkbox active: The system will issue a warning.Checkbox inactive: The system will not issue a warning.

If you do not activate the checkbox Only Warning, the action will not be completed.This means that the value will not be added, or that the user can only leave a field whenhe has entered the value in the correct format.

Warning Text Here you can define which text the system should issue. Use parameters if you wantthis text to be in multilingual format. The syntax for this is the same as in coresuitedesigner. For more information, please refer to the coresuite customize referencemanual under Translation parameters.

Warning Box Here you can define if the system should issue the warning as a message box. In thiscase, the warning appears in a pop-up window. The user must confirm the message bychoosing OK to continue.

Checkbox active: The system will issue the warning in a message box.Checkbox inactive: The system will not issue the warning in a message box.

Statusbarmessage Here you can define if the system should issue the warning in the status bar. In thiscase, the warning appears in a red bar at the bottom of SAP Business One.

Checkbox active: The system will issue the warning in the status bar.Checkbox inactive: The system will not issue the warning in the status bar.

White section: Target

In the white section you can define base elements. If in column Action (in the blue section) you have selected CHANGE VALUES, a value can be written back in a base element. For this, the SQL query must return onevalue only. coresuite customize will then automatically insert this value in the defined base element. You onlyneed a base element if the trigger element is not the same as the element on which the action (validation/change value) should be performed.

FormType Base Here you can define the formtype of the base element. For more information onformtypes, please refer to the coresuite customize reference manual under FormType.If you enter several formtypes, separate them with commas.

ItemUID Base Here you can define the ItemUID (UID = Unique ID) of the base element.If the ItemUID of the base element is a matrix or a grid, you must also indicate the Column Base.

Column Base Here you can enter the column description of the base element (see ItemUID Base).You only have to fill in this field if the ItemUID of the base element is a matrix or a grid.

Green section: Trigger

In the green area you can define the element that triggers the rule. Apart from the trigger element you must


also indicate Event Type, Before Event and Form Mode.

Form Type Enter the formtype of the trigger element. For more information on formtypes, pleaserefer to the coresuite customize reference manual under FormType.If you enter several formtypes, separate them with commas.

ItemUID Enter the ItemUID of the trigger element. If you do not need the ItemUID, you can leavethis field empty.If you enter several ItemUIDs, separate them with commas.

Column Enter the column description of the trigger element. If you do not need the columndescription, you can leave this field empty.If you enter several column descriptions, separate them with commas.

Event Type Select the event type of the trigger from the drop-down list. You can select from all theSAP Business One event types.For an overview over the different event types, please refer to the SAP Business OneSDK. Here are the most important event types:

ItemPressed - Is triggered by any button (e.g. Update in the sales order).Click - Is triggered by clicking on any field with the mouse.ComboSelect - Is triggered by selecting a value from a drop-down list.ValueChanged - Is triggered by changing a value and then leaving the field.Validate - Is triggered by leaving a field.FormLoad - Is triggered by opening a form.FormDataAdd/Update/Load - Is triggered by creating and loading a document.Startup - Is triggered by starting SAP Business One.

Before Event Define if the system should react to the before event or to the after event. Checkbox active: It is a before event (before event: before SAP executes an action).Checkbox inactive: It is an after event (after event: after SAP executes an action).

If an SAP action should be prevented (e.g. do not allow Add if an entry is incorrect),then you must define a before event.

Form Mode Here you can define the form mode of the trigger element.You can choose from the following options:

0 - FIND 1 - OK 2 - UPDATE 3 - ADD 4 - VIEW 5 - PRINT-1 - ALL-2 - MODIFY

ALL contains all modes. MODIFY contains the modes ADD and UPDATE.

Be careful when you combine elements with events: Not all elements throw thesame events. A button, for example, does not have a Validate event.


Gray section: Expression

In the gray section you can define the execution code and manage authorizations.

Expression The expression contains the code that should be executed. This can be an SQL query,a RegEx expression or a c# or vb.Net code section.Expression is the most important column in the gray section of the table. Here you candefine what exactly should be validated. You cannot edit the column Expressiondirectly, only by using the relevant editor. There are two ways to open the editor:

by clicking on the orange arrow in the column Expressionby double-clicking on the row header.

The system automatically opens the relevant editor for the type that you have defined inthe blue section of the table (General settings). For more information on the differenteditors, please refer to Editors.

Refresh If rules are used for a matrix (example for a matrix: the items list in the Sales Order[Modules > Sales > Sales Order > Contents]), column descriptions might shift and nolonger match the actual columns. By activating the checkbox in the column Refresh,the list is refreshed and the columns and descriptions will match again.

Authorization Every rule can be assigned to user groups. Click on the orange arrow and activate the checkbox for the relevant user groups.For more information, please refer to Authorizations.

Buttons

Add row Choose Add row to add a new row.

Delete row Choose Delete row to delete a row.

Item Info On Choose Item Info On, then click on the item for which you want to see the information.The relevant information (height, length, position, etc.) will appear in the status bar.

Open EventLogger

See Event Logger.

By right-clicking on a row, the option Duplicate Row also becomes available.

Changes only become effective after you choose Update.


Event Logger4.4.1.1

With the Event Logger you can record all UI API events that are fired by the SAP Business One application.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > Optimizer > Open Event Logger

Window

Fields

Filter

Event From the drop-down list, choose the event by which you want to filter.

FormType Enter the formtype that you want to search for.

ItemUID Enter the ItemUID that you want to search for.

ColUID Enter the ColumnUID that you want to search for.

Table

Event Indicates the type of event.

FormType Indicates the formtype on which the event appears.

ItemUID Indicates the ItemUID on which the event appears.

ColUID Indicates the ColumnUID on which the event appears.

Before Event Indicates if the event is a before event or an after event:


True = Before EventFalse = After Event

FormMode Indicates the form mode: 0 - FIND 1 - OK 2 - UPDATE 3 - ADD 4 - VIEW 5 - PRINT-1 - ALL-2 - MODIFY

ALL contains all modes. MODIFY contains the modes ADD and UPDATE.

InnerEvent Indicates if the event is triggered by another function.True: The event is an inner event.False: The event is not an inner event.

Procedure1. Open the Event Logger (Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > Optimizer > Open Event Logger). The

Event Logger immediately starts recording events. For performance reasons, the system does not showthe events in real time. Choose Refresh to display the most recent events.

2. Define the filter criteria. You can filter the events by Event Type, Form Type, Item UID and Column UID. Ifyou do not define a filter, the Event Logger lists all events.

3. Continue working normally in SAP Business One and execute the process that you would like to record.While you are working, the Event Logger records all events in the background.

4. After you have finished executing the process, choose Refresh. You can then analyze the events.5. Choose Clear to delete the list and to start recording again. If necessary, go back and repeat steps 1-5.6. Choose Cancel to close the Event Logger. The Event Logger will no longer record any events.


Editors4.4.1.2

To edit code you must start the relevant code editor. There are two ways to do this:by clicking on the orange arrow in the column Expressionby double-clicking on the row header.

The system automatically opens the relevant editor for the type that you have defined in the blue section of thetable (General settings):

If in column Type the value is CSCODE or VBCODE, the system opens coresuite customize editor.If in column Type the value is REGEX, the system opens Regular expression editor (RegEx Editor).If in column Type the value is SQL, the system opens coresuite customize SQL editor.

coresuite customize editor4.4.1.2.1

With coresuite customize editor you can edit CSCODE and VBCODE queries.

AccessOpen the Optimizer (Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Optimizer) and click on theorange arrow in the column Expression. You can only open this editor if in column Type the value is CSCODEor VBCODE.

Window


Fields

[Ctrl + S] Save the code

[Ctrl + P] Print the code

[F5] Check the syntax of the code (parser)

[Ctrl + Z] Undo the last change

Redo the last change

[Ctrl + F] Search the code

[Ctrl + K + X] Insert code snippets

ProcedureIn the coresuite customize editor you can write normal C# or VB code. The system then compiles the codeand executes it for the relevant event. To make sure that the code contains no errors, you can parse it. To do

so, choose the third icon from the left ( ) in the menu bar of the coresuite customize editor. If there are anycompilation errors, the system will indicate them. The system executes the code using an auxiliary class. Inthe code, the object "pVal" then provides more detailed information for the event:

ActionSuccess Was the last SAP action successful? [true/false]

BusinessObjectKey

ID of the business object (in XML format) on which the event has been triggered (only forFormData Events).

CharPressed pressed key [number]

ColUID current column [string]

EventType event type that triggered the action

Form current form

FormUID Unique ID of the form [string]

InnerEvent Is the event an inner event? [true/false]

Item current item

Row current row [number]

Type Formtype of the current form (only for FormData Events)

Value Changed Has the value of the field been changed? [true/false]

BusinessObjectKeyString

ID of the business object on which the event hast been triggered (only for FormDataEvents).

PopUpIndicator When you choose an entry from a list, the PopUpIndicator contains the selected rownumber (starting at 0).

On the Sales Quotation (Modules > Sales - A/R > Sales Quotation) you chooseCopy To and from the list that appears you select the second line (Delivery). In thiscase, the value in the variable pVal.PopUpIndicator is "1", because you have selectedthe second row.

At the end of the query, you must return a Boolean value ("return true" or "return false"). This valuedecides if the validation is successful or not. "false" means that the validation failed and that SAPBusiness One cancels the initiated action. If you use global variables or classes (see Extended Code),you can of course use these here.


Regular expression editor (RegEx Editor)4.4.1.2.2

With the Regular expression editor you can edit REGEX queries.

AccessOpen the Optimizer (Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Optimizer) and click on theorange arrow in the column Expression. You can only open this editor if in column Type the value is REGEX.

Window

Fields

Templates Here you can choose a template from the drop-down list. If you do so, the field Expression will be filled automatically.

Expression Here you canwrite your own expression.load a template by choosing a template from the Templates drop-down list.

Example value Here you can enter an example value and then check if the expression is correct.

Test expression After entering a value under Example value, you can choose Test expression to checkif the example value matches the expression.

ProcedureExample

1. Select a template from the drop-down list under Templates.

Choose the template Email.

2. In the field Expression, the relevant REGEX queryappears.

Because you have chosen the template Email, thefollowing expression appears here: ^\w+([-+.']\w+)*@\w+([-.]\w+)*\.\w+([-.]\w+)*$.

3. Enter an example for the selected template in thefield Example value.

Enter an e-mail address, e.g. [email protected].

4. Choose Test expression to check if the value inthe field Example value matches the expression.

Choose Test expression. The status bar displays themessage "Regular expression matches".If under 3. you had entered an invalid e-mail address,e.g. john.masongmail.com, the status bar would havedisplayed the message "Regular expression does notmatch".



coresuite customize SQL editor4.4.1.2.3

With the coresuite customize SQL editor you can edit SQL queries.

AccessOpen the Optimizer (Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Optimizer) and click on theorange arrow in the column Expression. You can only open this editor if in column Type the value is SQL.

Window

Fields

[Ctrl + S] Save the code

[Ctrl + P] Print the code

Not available in coresuite customize SQL editor

[Ctrl + Z] Undo the last change

Redo the last change

[Ctrl + F] Search the code

Not available in coresuite customize SQL editor

ProcedureUnlike with the other editors, in coresuite customize SQL editor you can define parameters.If, for example, you want to use the CardCode of the form (e.g. Business Partner Master Data) in the SQLquery, you can use the following syntax: [%G;4]For more information on choosing parameters, please refer to Reading parameters.


If a value is validated, (i.e. if in the Optimizer you have selected VALIDATE in the column Action for the rule),the validation only fails if the value NULL or no value is returned; any other outcome is regarded as successful.


4.4.2 Item Placement

In the form coresuite customize: Item Placement you can create new rules or edit existing rules to move

items, to make them invisible, to change their size, etc.

The form mainly consists of a list. In this list, each line corresponds to a rule and each column corresponds toa property of the rule. Below, the columns are explained in detail. For examples of Item Placement rules,please refer to the coresuite customize Reference manual.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Item Placement

Window

Fields


Description Enter the description for the rule. If you use the Wizard (Modules > Add-Ons >coresuite customize > Enable Wizard/Disable Wizard), the system creates thedescription automatically and adds "by wizard" to the description.

Form Type Enter the formtype of the item that you would like to modify.If you enter several formtypes, separate them with commas.

ItemUID Enter the UID of the item that you want to move.

Reference Item Enter the ID of the reference element. You can find the ID in the system information. Toactivate the system information, go to View > System Information. The following information (Left, Top, Width, Height) relates to the coordinates of thisreference item.

Left Enter the horizontal distance to the reference item in pixels.If you enter a positive value, the item appears to the right of the reference item.If you enter a negative value, the item appears to the left of the reference item.

If you have not indicated a reference item, this value represents the horizontal distance


to the left edge of the window.

Top Enter the vertical distance to the reference item in pixels.If you enter a positive value, the item appears above the reference item.If you enter a negative value, the item appears below the reference item.

If you have not indicated a reference item, this value represents the vertical distance tothe top edge of the window.

Width Enter the width of the item in pixels.

Height Enter the height of the item in pixels.

From PaneLevel Enter the From Pane of the item that you want to move (see PaneLevel).

To PaneLevel Enter the To Pane of the item that you want to move (see PaneLevel).

TabOrder Here you can define the order in which the tab should go through the fields ("0" for thefirst field, "1" for the second field, etc.). If you do not define an order, the system willchose one.

Font Size Enter the font size for the text.

Font Style Choose the style for the text. You can choose from the following options:PlainBoldItalicUnderlineStrikeOutShadowCondenseExtend

Invisible Checkbox active: The item is invisible (i.e. it will not appear).Checkbox inactive: The item is visible.

Disabled Deprecated - Please no longer use

RunAsCode Define if you want to change the values in XML or in the code (with XML, theperformance is higher, but it does not always work).

Activate the checkbox if you want to change values in the code.Do not activate the checkbox if you want to change values in XML.



Delete row Choose Delete to delete a row.


Use Resize event Activate this checkbox if you want the item to move accordingly (i.e. in relation to theother elements) when you resize the window.If you do not activate this checkbox, the item will not move when you resize thewindow. In some cases it might be hidden by another field when you resize thewindow.

For windows with several customized items, this option can decrease performance,i.e. it might take a while for all items to display correctly after resizing the window.




The values in the columns Invisible and Disabled can only be changed from "false" to "true". A "disabled" item cannot be set to "active". These values are active the first time you open the form; assoon as SAP takes over again (e.g. when you change to another data record), SAP overwrites thesesettings with the default values.

If you do not want to change a property (Left, Top, Width, Height, From PaneLevel, To PaneLevel,TabOrder), you can leave the relevant field empty. The current values will be left unchanged. The valuesfor Left, Top, Width and Height can also be changed using "+" and "-". This then changes the old valueby the new value.


4.4.3 Function Button

In the form coresuite customize: Function Button you can create new rules or edit existing rules to add afunction to the Function button.

The form mainly consists of a list. In this list, each line corresponds to a rule and each column corresponds toa property of the rule. Below, the columns are explained in detail. For examples of Function Button rules,please refer to the coresuite customize Reference manual.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Function Button Window

Fields


Description Enter the description for the rule.

Type Select the function type from the drop-down list. You can choose from the followingoptions:

CSCODE - c# codeVBCODE - Visual Basic codeSHELL - Shell command (like commando line)

Name Enter the name of the function. This is the name that appears when the user chooses Functions. Use parameters if you want this text to be in multilingual format. The syntax forthis is the same as in coresuite designer. For more information, please refer to thecoresuite customize reference manual under Translation parameters.

Form Type This is the formtype on which you want to place the Functions button.If you enter several formtypes, separate them with commas.

PicturePath Enter the path for a picture (JPG or BMP, 16x16 pixels) that you want to appear in theright-click menu.


No Button Checkbox active: The function will not appear on the Functions button. The function isonly available in the right-click menu. Checkbox inactive: The function appears on the Functions button.

If there are several functions for the same formtype, you must activate No Button for allof them, otherwise the Functions button will appear regardless.

Position Here you can define the order in which the tab should go through the fields ("0" for the firstfield, "1" for the second field, etc.). If you do not define an order, the system will choseone.

Expression To edit the function in the relevant editor, click on the orange arrow or double-click on therow header (also see Editors).






The Functions button appears to the right of the Cancel button (the Cancel button usually has the ID"2"). If this space is already taken, or if you would like to place the Functions button somewhere else,you can move it using the Item Placement module (see Item Placement).


4.4.4 New Items

In the form coresuite customize: New Items you can create new rules or edit existing rules to add new items,such as text fields, drop-down lists, multiline text boxes and checkboxes.

The form mainly consists of a list. In this list, each line corresponds to a rule and each column corresponds toa property of the rule. Below, the columns are explained in detail. For examples of New Items rules, pleaserefer to the coresuite customize Reference manual.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > New Items

Window

Fields


Item Type Select the item type from the drop-down list. You can choose from the following options:TEXTEDIT - normal text fieldCOMBOBOX - drop-down listEXTENDEDTEXT - multiline text fieldCHECKBOX - checkbox

Name Enter the description for the item.

Form Type This is the formtype on which you want to place the item.If you enter several formtypes, separate them with commas.

ItemUID Enter a UID for the item. The UID must not exceed 8 characters. If you do not enter aUID, the system issues an error message.

Table name Enter the name of the table in which you want to save the value of the item.

Column name Enter the name of the table column in which you want to save the value of the item.

Reference Item Enter the ID of the reference element. You can find the ID in the system information. To


activate the system information, go to View > System Information.The following information (Left, Top, Width, Height) relates to the coordinates of thisreference item.

Description Enter the description of the item that should appear on the form. Use parameters if youwant this text to be in multilingual format. The syntax for this is the same as in coresuitedesigner. For more information, please refer to the coresuite customize reference manualunder Translation parameters.

DescriptionLength

Define the length of the label that proceeds the item (in pixels).

Left Enter the horizontal distance to the reference item in pixels.If you enter a positive value, the item appears to the right of the reference item.If you enter a negative value, the item appears to the left of the reference item.

If you have not indicated a reference item, this value represents the horizontal distance tothe left edge of the window.

Top Enter the vertical distance to the reference item in pixels.If you enter a positive value, the item appears above the reference item.If you enter a negative value, the item appears below the reference item.

If you have not indicated a reference item, this value represents the vertical distance tothe top edge of the window.

Width Enter the width of the item in pixels.

Height Enter the height of the item in pixels.

From PaneLevel Enter the From Pane of the item that you want to move (see PaneLevel).

To PaneLevel Enter the To Pane of the item that you want to move (see PaneLevel).

TabOrder Here you can define the order in which the tab should go through the fields ("0" for thefirst field, "1" for the second field, etc.). If you do not define an order, the system willchose one.

Affects FormMode

Checkbox active: If you adjust a value, the form mode changes from OK to Update.Checkbox inactive: The OK mode will remain, even if you make changes.

Invisible Checkbox active: The item is invisible (i.e. it will not appear).Checkbox inactive: The item is visible.

Disabled Indicates if the item can be edited or not.

Linked ObjectType

If you want to add an orange arrow (a so-called linked button), enter here the number towhich the arrow refers. For more information, and for a list of some of the available linkedobject types, please refer to the coresuite customize reference manual under LinkedObjectType. If you do not enter anything here, no orange arrow will appear.

Query Enter an SQL query if the system should display a ChooseFromList when the userpresses the tab key in the relevant field.

The value that is written back into the field must be defined as "VALUE".Example: If you enter the query "SELECT ItemCode AS VALUE, ItemName ASDescription FROM OITM", the system displays a list of all items and writes back thecode of the selected item into the field. It is possible to read the parameter from the form(also see Reading parameters and Editors).



New row Choose Add row to add a new row.





With Table name and Column name you can reference data from UDFs. However, it is not possible todisplay system data in two places.


4.4.5 New Menu

In the form coresuite customize: New Menu you can create new rules or edit existing rules to create new menupoints/menu structures.

The form mainly consists of a list. In this list, each line corresponds to a rule and each column corresponds toa property of the rule. Below, the columns are explained in detail. For examples of New Menu rules, pleaserefer to the coresuite customize Reference manual.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > New Menu

Window

Fields


Description Enter the description for the new menu item.

Menu name Enter the name of the menu point that should appear in the menu structure. Useparameters if you want this text to be in multilingual format. The syntax for this is thesame as in coresuite designer. For more information, please refer to the coresuitecustomize reference manual under Translation parameters.

Menu UID Enter the UID of the menu point. If you do not enter a unique ID, the system will issuean error message. The UID must consist of no more than 10 characters.

Parent Enter the menu UID of the parent item.

Position If you define several menu entries for the same level, you can define in which order theyshould appear ("0" for the first menu point, "1" for the second menu point, etc.). If you donot define an order, the system will chose one.

PicturePath Enter the path for a picture (JPG or BMP, 16x16 pixels) that you want to appear in theright-click menu.


Menu type Select the menu type from the drop-down list. You can choose from the followingoptions:

String - Normal menu point; you can add functions to this menu type.PopUp - Menu folder, sub-menu for other menu points; you cannot add functions.Seperator - Dividing line, used to group menu points.

FunctionType Select the function type from the drop-down list. You can choose from the followingoptions:

CSCODE - c# code sequenceVBCODE - Visual Basic code sequenceSHELL - Shell command (like command line)

Expression To edit the function in the relevant editor, click on the orange arrow or double-click onthe row header (also see Editors).


New row Choose Add row to add a new row.





4.4.6 Extended Code

For simple tasks you can, as described in Optimizer, execute code in a relatively simple method. However, formore complex tasks, this often is not enough.For more complex tasks it is better to use the menu point Extended Code. Here you can define global variablesand classes, which you can use in the modules Optimizer, Function Button and New Menu. Since the code ismanaged in one place only, you can reduce effort and also the number of errors. Furthermore, you can defineso-called "usings", i.e. abbreviations, so you do not need to type the entire namespace every time you want touse the code. For more information on the code, please refer to Basic skills - Code.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Extended Code

Window

Fields

Using/Importstatements

Define the abbreviation for the namespace.

Global methods andvariables

Enter the global code. This code is managed centrally, i.e. you only need to adapt itonce and then you can use it in the modules Optimizer, Function Button and NewMenu.

Execute in debugmode

Activate the checkbox if you want the editor to issue an error message includingerror code in the case of runtime errors.

We recommend you only use this function for test systems.

Code type Select the code type from the drop-down list. You can choose from the followingoptions:

CSHARPVB (Visual Basic)

It is not possible to access CSHARP code from VB code and vice versa.

Reload Rules If you choose this, the system reloads all code rules and ensures that it alwaysuses the latest versions.

Procedure1. Double-click on the field Using/Import statements or on the field Global methods and variables or choose

Edit. 2. The editor opens (see Editors).3. Edit the relevant code sequences.4. Save your changes, close the editor and close the window Extended Code by choosing OK.


4.4.7 Export / Import

Export Rules4.4.7.1

In the form coresuite customize: Export you can export coresuite customize rules. All rules are written into onefile (file with the extension *.cocu).

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Import / Export > Export Rules

Window

Fields

Type This column indicates in which module you can find the rule:OptimizerItem PlacementFunction ButtonNew ItemsNew MenuExtended Code

Name This column displays the name of the rule.

Export Activate this checkbox for all the rules that you want to export.


Procedure1. Activate the checkbox behind the rules that you want to export.2. Choose Export.3. Choose a name for the file and save it in the desired location. 4. A message confirms how many rules have been exported.

Click on the column header Export to select/deselect all rules at the same time.


Import Rules4.4.7.2

In the form coresuite customize: Import you can import rules that have been exported previously (e.g. byanother user) or import example rules.The file to import is a *.cocu file.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Import / Export > Import Rules

Window

Fields

… Opens a dialog box in which you can select the *.cocu file that you want to import.

Import [button] Imports the selected rules into the database.

Examples Choose Examples to re-import coresuite customize example rules. For moreinformation, please refer to Import Example Rules.

Delete Rules Choose Delete Rules to delete the old rules. For more information, please refer toDelete Rules.

Import [column] Activate the checkbox for the rules that you want to import.

Overwrite Activate the checkbox for the rules that you want to overwrite with the new rule if thenew rule has the same name as the existing rule.


Procedure for importing *.cocu files1. Enter the path to the location where the *.cocu file is saved and open the file. A system message appears,

asking you if you want to activate all rules, deactivate all rules or load all rules with presettings:All active - All rules are active.All inactive - All rules are inactive. Choose this option if you import several rules and then want to activatethem individually to make sure that they work.Presettings - All rules are loaded with presettings: If another user has exported the rules as "active" and youchoose the option Presettings, the rules will be imported as active. (If you only import example rules, thepresetting is "inactive", i.e. all rules are loaded as inactive.)

Example: A user exports rules A, B and C; with A and B being active and C being inactive. When youimport this file, rules A and B are loaded active and rule C is loaded inactive. 2. Select the relevant option. The rules from the *.cocu file then appear in the window coresuite customize:

Import. 3. If there is already a rule with the same name, activate the relevant checkbox in the column Overwrite. The

old rule will then be overwritten with the new rule with the same name. 4. Choose Import to import the rules. The rules are available immediately; there is no need to restart the add-

on. 5. A message confirms how many rules have been imported and deleted (overwritten).

Click on the column header Import or Overwrite to select/deselect all rules at the same time.


Import Example Rules (Examples)4.4.7.2.1

If you would like to set example rules back to their initial settings (e.g. if you have amended them, or if they nolonger work), just re-import the example rules and overwrite the existing example rules.

If you install coresuite country package for the first time, the example rules are installed automatically.However, they are all set to inactive, i.e. you must first activate them to be able to use them. To activateone or several rules, proceed as follows:1. Go to the relevant module (Optimizer, Item Placement, etc.)2. Activate the checkbox in the column Active for the relevant rule(s). 3. Choose Update.

A list of all example rules is available under Installed example rules.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Import / Export > Import Rules > Examples

Procedure1. Choose Examples. 2. A new system message appears, asking you if you want to set all rules to active / inactive or if you would

like to load them with presettings.All active - All rules are active.All inactive - All rules are inactive.Presettings - All rules are loaded with presettings: If another user has exported the rules as "active" and youchoose the option Presettings, the rules will be imported as active. (If you only import example rules, thepresetting is "inactive", i.e. all rules are loaded as inactive.)

Example: A user exports rules A, B and C; with A and B being active and C being inactive. When youimport this file, rules A and B are loaded active and rule C is loaded inactive. 3. Select the relevant option.

4. The window coresuite customize: Import now lists all example rules. Activate all rules in the column Importthat you want to import.

5. If a rule with the same name already exists, activate the checkbox in the column Overwrite. Only then will


the old rule be overwritten with the new one.

6. Choose Import to import the selected rules. 7. A message confirms how many rules have been imported and deleted (overwritten).


Delete Rules4.4.7.2.2

With this function, you can permanently delete all rules for a certain module.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Import / Export > Import Rules > Delete Rules

Procedure1. Go to Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Import / Export > Import Rules and

choose Delete Rules.2. The window coresuite customize: Delete appears.

3. Activate the coresuite customize module(s) for which you want to delete the rules. You can choose fromthe following options:

OptimizerItem PlacementFunction ButtonNew ItemsExtended CodeNew Menu

4. Activate one or more checkboxes and choose Delete. This deletes all rules for the selected module(s).


4.4.8 Import Excel rows to UDT

With this function, you can transfer data from an Excel table into a user-defined table (UDT).

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Import / Export > Import Excel rows to UDT

Window

Fields

Choose a UDT From the drop-down list, select the table to which you want to add the data from theExcel file.

Rollback on error Checkbox active: If an error occurs during the import process, the systemcancels the import process and discards all data imported so far.Checkbox inactive: The system imports data row by row. If an error occurs, thesystem cancels the import procedure. The data imported so far remains in thetable.

Overwrite table Checkbox active: Existing values will be overwritten.Checkbox inactive: Existing values will not be overwritten.

AliasID Indicates the ID of the SAP table.


The description of the columns in the Excel file must match this ID; otherwisethe system will not be able to recognize the columns to be imported.

Description Indicates the column header that will appear in the SAP table.

TypeId Indicates the format of the relevant column in the SAP table. The format of thecolumn in the Excel table must have the same format; otherwise the system will notbe able to import the data.

Browse .xls file Opens a dialog box in which you can select the *.xml file you want to import.

Import .xls file Choose Import .xls file to import the selected file.

Procedure (illustrated by an example)

ScenarioYou want to import the following data from an Excel file into the UDT: Country, Zip, City, StateName and State.

1. Select the target table from the Choose a UDT drop-down list.2. Rollback on errorHere you can define how the system should proceed if an error occurs (e.g. if the data format in the Excel filedoes not match the format in the table).

Checkbox active: If an error occurs during the import process, the system cancels the import process anddiscards all data imported so far.Checkbox inactive: The system imports data row by row. If an error occurs, the system cancels the importprocedure. The data imported so far remains in the table.

3. After selecting the table, the window Import Excel rows to UDT displays the columns of this table. 4. Choose Browse .xls file and enter the path to the Excel file from which you want to import data.5. Choose Import .xls file. The system checks which columns from the Excel file can be imported.6. If the system found matching columns, it highlights the relevant rows in the window Import Excel rows to

UDT and issues a message asking you if you want to import this data. Choose Yes to start the importprocess or choose Cancel if you do not want to import the columns.


The maximum number of rows in a UDT is 100,000,000 rows.For the import to work, the columns to be imported must have the same name as the columns of theSAP table (AliasID). Furthermore, the format (TypeId) must be the same in the SAP table and in theExcel file.


4.4.9 UDT Handler

With the UDT Handler, you can easily add data to existing UDTs. Thanks to parameters, most fields can bepre-filled automatically, so that you will have to spend less time on filling in the UDT. The main advantage of theUDT Handler is that you will no longer have to spend time on UI creation. Compared to the SAP standard, it ispossible to filter/limit data on the resulting UDT UI.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > UDT Handler

Window

In the general area of the UDT Handler, you can see the following two fields:

User defined Table Select the user-defined table from the drop-down list.

Form Title Enter the title you want to appear on the form.

When you right-click in this field, you can go to Insert Parameter and selectthe relevant parameter. The system then automatically enters it in the correctformat. For more information, refer to Practical example 3.

The data on the tabs General and Fields are described on the following pages.


General4.4.9.1

Window

Fields

Parameters In this table, you can define the parameters.

Key | ItemId | MatrixId This will be filled automatically.

... When you choose this field, a ChooseFrom list will appear where you can selectthe relevant parameter.

ParameterDescription

Enter a description for the parameter. This is the description that is displayed whenthe UDT will be opened form a menu. You can enter:

Free textPlaceholders (e.g. [@T000002]), in square brackets, if you want the descriptionto be multi-lingual (see Translation parameters for more information).

Parameter Expression Here you can enter a default value for designing purposes. You can enter thefollowing formats:

Drop-down list - a list with two columns in square brackets or a query in squarebrackets that returns a list

[1;Option 1;2;Option 2;3;Option 3]CFL - a list with two columns in curly brackets or a query in curly brackets thatreturns a list

{SELECT CardCode,CardName FROM OCRD ORDER BY [%ordercolumn] [%


order]}Default values - Text, number or SQL query that returns a value.

Filter (Where Clause) Here you can enter a WHERE clause that filters your UDT data by usingparameters.

When you right-click in this field, you can go to Insert Parameter and selectthe relevant parameter. The system then automatically writes it in the correct formatin your clause. For more information, refer to Practical example 3.

Form Type Enter the ID of the form type from where you want to start the UDT, e.g. "139" if youwant to trigger it from Sales Orders. You can find out the ID in the systeminformation in the status bar. To activate the system information, go to View >System Information.

Menu name Enter the name for the menu entry as it should appear in the right-click menu.

Menu UID Enter a menu ID.This is a mandatory field if you want to start the UDT from the menu.

Parent From the drop-down list, select the menu point under which you want the UDT toappear.

Resulting Form Type Define a unique form type ID for the UDT.

This form type can then be used in customize rules or other UDT Handler rules,for example.

SupportedFunctionality

Here you can define what the user can do on this UDT. Just select the relevantcheckboxes:

AddUpdateDelete

By default, all boxes are selected.


Fields4.4.9.2

Window

Fields

Field This is the name of the field as defined in the User-Defined Tables - Setup (Tools >Customization Tools > User-Defined Tables - Setup). For more information, pleaserefer to Practical example 3.

Visible Activate this checkbox if you want the field to be visible.

Editable Activate this checkbox if you want the field to be editable.

Title Enter the title for the field. Here you can also use the placeholders (e.g.[@T000002]), if you want the title to be multi-lingual (see Translation parameters formore information).

Pos Enter the position for the field. The higher the number, the further to the right thefield will appear.

Linked Table Here you can enter the ID of a table that you want to link to, e.g. OCRD for theBusiness Partner table or @COR_UDT if it is a UDT (for UDTs, you must includethe "@").

Value Enter the ID of the value you want to display, e.g. CardCode for the Code of theBusiness Partner.

Description Enter the ID of the description you want to display, e.g. CardName for the Name ofthe Business Partner.


Type The following options are available:ComboBoxChooseFromList


4.5 Right-click menu / Wizard

With coresuite customize, tailoring SAP Business One to your needs becomes fast and easy. coresuitecustomize enables you to hide, color, lock and move fields, define them as mandatory fields, etc. Thesefunctions are available via the right-click menu. For the coresuite customize right-click menu to appear, youmust activate the coresuite customize wizard. To do so, go to Modules > Administration > Add-Ons >coresuite customize > Enable Wizard. To deactivate the coresuite customize right-click menu, go to Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuitecustomize > Disable Wizard.

The right-click menu is only available to SAP superusers.

The following chapters outline the individual functions of the right-click menu:Add CFLHide fieldColor fieldLock fieldMake field mandatoryAdd folderMove FieldCopy UDF to main window


4.5.1 Add CFL

GoalYou want to change a field so that the user can no longer enter free text but has to choose a value from a list.

SolutionUse the coresuite customize function Add CFL to add a so-called ChooseFromList (CFL) to a field.

ProcedureRight-click on the relevant field and choose coresuite customize > Add CFL.

The window Please enter parameter appears.


Fields

Query Enter the SQL query. The results of this query will appear in the CFL from where youcan then select the relevant value.

Example: "SELECT ItemCode, ItemName FROM OITM"

Write back column This is the column from which the value is written back into the original field.

Example: ItemCode

The system closes the window and reopens it. When you now press the Tab key, the CFL appears.

Select an entry and choose Choose or double-click on the relevant entry.

Remove CFLIf you want to remove the CFL, just right-click on the relevant field and choose coresuite customize > RemoveCFL. Close the window and open it again for the changes to become effective.


4.5.2 Hide field

GoalYou want to hide a certain field.

SolutionUse the coresuite customize function Hide field.

ProcedureRight-click on the relevant field and choose coresuite customize > Hide field.

The system issues a message, asking you if you also want to hide the label for the field. Choose Yes if you want to hide the label too.Choose No if you do not want to hide the label.

The changes become effective immediately.


Show hidden fieldsTo show hidden fields again, right-click on the empty area on the form and choose Show hidden fields. ChooseShow all fields or select only the field that you want to be displayed again. The changes become effectiveimmediately.


4.5.3 Color field

GoalYou want to highlight a certain field or the label of a field.

SolutionUse the coresuite customize function Color field to highlight the field or the label in a certain color.

ProcedureRight-click on the relevant field or label and choose coresuite customize > Color field.

A color picker appears. Choose the color you want and choose OK.


The highlight appears immediately.

Reset colorTo remove the highlight again, right-click on the colored field/label and choose coresuite customize > Resetcolor. The changes become effective immediately.


4.5.4 Lock field

Goal You want to lock a certain field, so that the user cannot enter any data. You only want the field to be availablein the Add mode.

SolutionUse the coresuite customize function Lock field.

ProcedureRight-click on the relevant field and choose coresuite customize > Lock field.

For the first field that you lock, the window Please choose parameter appears. In the field Warning Text, enterthe text that should appear in the status bar when the user clicks on a locked field.

This text is the same for all locked fields. Choose a text that applies to all fields, e.g. "This field islocked" (rather than "The field 'Status' is locked").

The field is locked as soon as you reopen the form.

Unlock fieldTo unlock the field, right-click on the relevant field and choose coresuite customize > Unlock field. Close thewindow and reopen it for the change to appear.


4.5.5 Make field mandatory

GoalYou want to mark a field as a mandatory field.

SolutionUse the coresuite customize function Make field mandatory.

ProcedureRight-click on the relevant field and choose coresuite customize > Make field mandatory.

The window Please enter parameter appears. In the field Warning Text, enter the text that you want to appearwhen the user forgets to fill in this field. The warning will appear in a pop-up box.

Reset mandatory fieldTo convert the mandatory field back into a normal field, right-click on the relevant field and choose coresuitecustomize > Reset mandatory field. The changes become effective immediately.


4.5.6 Add folder

GoalYou want to add a tab to a form (e.g. to display UDFs on the main form or to add additional information).

SolutionUse the coresuite customize function Add folder.

ProcedureRight-click on an existing tab and choose coresuite customize > Add folder.

The window Please enter parameter appears. In the field Folder Name add the text that should appear in thetab and choose OK.

The system closes the window and reopens it. The new tab now appears on the form.


Remove folderTo delete the tab, right-click on the tab and choose Remove folder. The changes become effectiveimmediately.

The number of tabs that can be added is limited. Tabs cannot be added on all SAP windows.


4.5.7 Move Field

GoalYou want to place an existing system field (e.g. a text field or a drop-down list from SAP) at a new position.

SolutionUse the coresuite customize function Move Field.

ProcedureRight-click on the relevant field and choose coresuite customize > Move field.

The window Please enter parameter appears. Enter the relevant data.

Fields

Reference Item Enter the ID of the field that you want to be the reference item for the field to be moved.

Example: If you want the field Document Date on the A/P Credit Memo (Modules >Purchasing - A/P > A/P Credit Memo) to become the reference item, enter "46" as thereference item, since Document Date has the ID 46. You can find this ID in the systeminformation in the status bar. To activate the system information, go to View > System


Information.

Position Indicate the position of the field to be moved in relation to the reference item. You canchoose from the following options:

Exact - The field will be placed exactly at the position of the reference item. If youenter a factor in the next field it will be ignored.Above the reference item - The field will be placed above the reference item. Youcan define the factor in the next field.Below the reference item - The field will be placed below the reference item. Youcan define the factor in the next field.

Factor If in the previous field you have chosen Above the reference item or Below thereference item, you can define the distance in this field.

Example: If you select "Factor 3" from the drop-down list, the distance betweenthe reference field and the moved field will be three times the height of the moved field.

Visibility Define the visibility of the moved field. You can choose from the following options:Always - The UDF is always visible, regardless of which tab is active.Only on current folder - The UDF is only visible on the tab that is active. If you goto another tab, the field will not appear.

Choose OK.

The system closes the window and reopens it again. The field now appears at the new position.


Set field back to standard positionTo set the field back to the original position, right-click on the moved field and choose coresuite customize >Set field back to standard position.The system closes the window and reopens it. The field now appears at its original position.


4.5.8 Copy UDF to main window

GoalYou want to display a UDF (user-defined field) on the form.

SolutionUse the coresuite customize function Copy UDF to main window.

ProcedureOpen the relevant form and activate the user-defined fields. To do so, go to View > User-Defined Fields. Right-click on the field that you want to display on the form and choose coresuite customize > Copy UDF tomain window.

The window Please enter parameter appears. Enter the relevant data.


Fields

Description Enter the description (label text) that should appear next to the field. Use parameters ifyou want this text to be in multilingual format. The syntax for this is the same as incoresuite designer. For more information, please refer to the coresuite customizereference manual under Translation parameters.

Reference Item(Label)

Enter the ID of the field that you want to be the reference item for the field to be moved.

Example: If you want the field Owner on the Sales Quotation (Modules > Sales -A/R > Sales Quotation) to become the reference item, enter "230" as the referenceitem, since Owner has the ID 230. You can find this ID in the system information in thestatus bar. To activate the system information, go to View > System Information.

Position Indicate the position of the field to be moved in relation to the reference item. You canchoose from the following options:

Exact - The field will be placed exactly at the position of the reference item. If youenter a factor in the next field it will be ignored.Above the reference item - The field will be placed above the reference item. Youcan define the factor in the next field.Below the reference item - The field will be placed below the reference item. Youcan define the factor in the next field.

Factor If in the previous field you have chosen Above the reference item or Below thereference item, you can define the distance in this field.

Example: If you select "Factor 3" from the drop-down list, the distance betweenthe reference field and the moved field will be three times the height of the moved field.

Visibility Define the visibility of the moved field. You can choose from the following options:Always - The UDF is always visible, regardless of which tab is active.Only on current folder - The UDF is only visible on the tab that is active. If you goto another tab, the field will not appear.

Choose OK.

The system closes the window and reopens it. The changes are now visible.


Remove UDF from main windowTo remove the UDF, right-click on the relevant field and choose coresuite customize > Remove UDF from mainwindow. The system closes the window and reopens it. The UDF no longer appears on the form.


4.6 coresuite customize reference guide

This section provides supplemental information and some practical examples.

4.6.1 Authorizations

For each user, you can activate/deactivate each rule of each module. This means that you can enable certainrules for certain users and disable them for others.To make this process easier, we recommend you create user groups. You can create them in Modules >Administration > System Initialization > Authorizations > General Authorizations. For more information, pleaserefer to the official SAP Business One documentation.

AccessModules > Administration > System Initialization > Authorizations > General AuthorizationsIn the window Authorizations, the coresuite modules appear under User Authorizations. This is where you canmanage the authorizations for the coresuite modules.

Window

Authorizations are defined per user. Superusers can give all users the same authorizations or enable/disablecertain modules and rules for certain users only. Authorizations for superusers cannot be changed. For moreinformation, please refer to Defining Authorizations in the SAP Business One documentation: http://help.sap.com/saphelp_sbo88/helpdata/en/45/070defe02641dfe10000000a1553f6/frameset.htm

We recommend to classify users into logical groups, e.g. Financial Administration = Group 1, Warehouse =Group 2, Production = Group 3, Back Office = Group 4, etc.

After defining these groups, you can enable/disable all rules of all modules (Optimizer, Item Placement,Function Button, New Items, New Menu) for the relevant groups. The default setting is that all existing rules (orrules for which you have not changed any authorizations) are active for all groups, i.e. that all user groups canaccess these rules.

http://help.sap.com/saphelp_sbo88/helpdata/en/45/070defe02641dfe10000000a1553f6/frameset.htm

http://help.sap.com/saphelp_sbo88/helpdata/en/45/070defe02641dfe10000000a1553f6/frameset.htm


4.6.2 Basic skills - Coding

This chapter provides some examples for programming with C# with the aim of making it easier for you to workwith coresuite customize.

For more information on programming with SAP Business One, please refer to the official SAP DeveloperHomepage (sdn.sap.com).

To obtain the SAP Business One SDK objects, copy the following rules:

' VB .Net

Dim application As SAPbouiCOM.Application = customize.B1Connector().Application

Dim company As SAPbobsCOM.Company = customize.B1Connector().Company

// C#

SAPbouiCOM.Application application = customize.B1Connector.GetB1Connector().Application;

SAPbobsCOM.Company company = customize.B1Connector.GetB1Connector().Company;

Matrix4.6.2.1

In many cases, it is useful to run a calculation or validation on certain documents, e.g. to check that in amatrix all items have an item number. For this, you need a loop that runs through the entire list and checksthat the data is complete.You can do this by using code. Below you can see the base model for such a loop. The example here is for the Sales Order. The matrix in the Sales Order (i.e. the item list) has the ID = 38.

Matrix m = Matrix.GetFromUID(pVal.Form, "38");

for(int i = 0; i < m.Rows.Count-1; i++)

{

// 2 slashes mean that this line will be ignored. You can use this to write comments

// This code here is used for the number of rows in a list

// Reading a value (item code) from a list and writing it in the variable "value"

string wert = m.GetValue("1", i);

// now the variable "value" contains the item code of the current row (i) and you can...

}

http://sdn.sap.com


Reading values4.6.2.2

If you want to read a value from a form, you first need to know the type of the item that you want to read.In SAP Business One, there are the following item types:

Name Description Read value

TextEdit Normal text field string value = TextEdit.GetFromUID(pVal.Form, "id").Value;

ExtendedTextEdit Multiline text field string value = ExtendedTextEdit.GetFromUID(pVal.Form,"id").Value;

ComboBox Drop-down box string value = ComboBox.GetFromUID(pVal.Form, "id").Selected.Value;string description = ComboBox.GetFromUID(pVal.Form,"id").Selected.Description;

Matrix List string value = Matrix.GetFromUID(pVal.Form, "id").GetValue("ColumnID", row number);

CheckBox Checkbox bool checkmark = CheckBox.GetFromUID(pVal.Form,"id").Checked;

After the value has been read, it appears in the variable "value".For the item CheckBox the system returns a Boolean value (Boolean = true or false). This value indicates if thecheckmark is set (true) or not (false).

Creating items4.6.2.3

With coresuite customize editor you can create any SAP item (text fields, checkboxes). The base model isthe same for all items. However, it is possible to set specific attributes.

Base model:

// Creating a new element (here: UID 'COR_TE1')

TextEdit te1 = TextEdit.CreateNew("COR_TE1");

// Define position using a reference element (here: text field with the UID '4')

te1.SetSizeAndPosition(TextEdit.GetFromUID(pVal.Form, "4"));

te1.Top += 20;

// Alternatively you can set the attributes individually

te1.Top=125;te1.Width=100;te1.Left=5;te1.Height=20;

// Setting additional attributes (depending on type. For details refer to the SAP SDK)

te1.AffectsFormMode = false; te1.FromPane = 98; te1.ToPane = 98;

// The new element must be added to the existing form (current form == pVal.Form) and must

be refreshed

pVal.Form.AddItems(te1);

pVal.Form.Update();


Creating grids4.6.2.4

To create a list of results from a query, you need a grid. The base model for a grid looks as follows:

try

{

// GRID, WILL CONTAIN THE VALUES TO DISPLAY

Grid grid = Grid.CreateNew("COR_GR1");

grid.Width = 380; grid.Height = 260; grid.Top = 5; grid.Left = 5;

// SAP FORM, WILL CONTAIN THE GRID

Form form = Form.CreateNewForm("COR_CUS_SHOW1", "COR_CUS_SHOW1" + customize.Utils.

UniqueStringGenerator.Next());

form.Height = 300; form.Width = 400; form.Top = pVal.Form.Top; form.Left = pVal.Form.

Left;

form.Value = "Results";

// ADD GRID TO THE FORM

form.AddItem(grid);

// LOAD FORM

form.Load();

// YOUR QUERY

string query= "SELECT ItemCode, ItemName FROM OITM";

// ATTACH QUERY TO GRID

grid.ExecuteQuery(query);

// SET COLUMNS NON EDITABLE (DISPLAY ONLY)

grid.Columns["ItemCode"].Editable = false;

grid.Columns["ItemName"].Editable = false;

}

catch(System.Exception ex)

{

MessageBox.Show("Unexpected error happend while trying to display the values of the

query!\n" + ex.Message, "OK");

}

This code creates an SAP form with a list which is filled by the query (here: "SELECT ItemCode, ItemNameFROM OITM").

Line Description

string query= "SELECT

ItemCode, ItemName FROM OITM";Query that is executed. Replace this query with your own.

grid.Columns["ItemCode"].

Editable = false;

grid.Columns["ItemName"].

Editable = false;

Sets the column ItemCode and ItemName to not editable. If you wantyour users to only be able to view the results, but not to change them,add this code to all the relevant columns.

You can add this function to a menu point (see New Menu) or to a Function button (see Function Button).


4.6.3 User-defined tables

coresuite customize creates user-defined tables (UDTs) in which the entered data is saved.To access these tables, go to Tools > User-Defined Windows.

For coresuite customize, there are the following tables:

COR_CUSTOM_FIELD Optimizer

COR_CUSTOM_FUNCB Function Button

COR_CUSTOM_NEWITEMS New Items

COR_CUSTOM_NEWMENU New Menu

COR_CUSTOM_GSCRIPT Extended Code

COR_CUSTOM_PLACE Item Placement

We do not recommend to edit the data in these tables, because there is no validation mechanism if youopen the tables by going to Tools > User-Defined Windows.Instead, we recommend to change the data in the coresuite customize modules.


4.6.4 Install external DLLs

With coresuite customize you can import external DLLs that have been compiled with .NET Framework 2.0.To import an external DLL correctly, proceed as follows:

1. Check .NET Framework versionMake sure that the .DLL that you want to import has been compiled with .NET Framework 2.0.If you use MS Visual Studio you can check the version in the Solution Explorer properties.

If the .DLL has not been compiled with .NET Framework 2.0, compile it with .NET Framework.


2. Create installation structureCreate a new folder and name it "COR_Customize".

The name of the folder must be exactly the same (case-sensitive).

Create a subfolder and call it "DLL". Save your .DLL in this subfolder.

The structure should look as follows:

3. Creating the .sip fileConvert the folder COR_Customize into a .zip file (right-click on the folder COR_Customize > Send To >Compressed (zipped) folder. You can rename the .zip file if you like. Then convert the .zip file into a .sip file bychanging the extension from .zip to .sip.

You can now import this file into SAP Business One. To do so, go to Modules > Administration > Add-Ons >coresuite administration > Administration and import the file. For more information on how to install .sip files,please refer to the coresuite installation manual which is available for download from our website (www.coresystems.ch).

Restart coresuite (Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > Add-On Manager, select the coresuite add-on,choose Stop, wait for a few seconds, then select the add-on again and choose Start). You can then find anduse the imported .sip file in coresuite customize editor.

http://www.coresystems.ch



4.6.5 FormType

Each form, each window and each document in SAP Business One has a unique description, the so-calledformtype. With the formtype you can define coresuite designer layoutdefinitions or coresuite customize rules for afunction on a document or a form/window.

You can determine the formtype by using the System Information. To activate the system information, go to View > System Information. If you now roll the mouse over the relevant form, you can see the information in the status bar, e.g."Form=806".

Here you can find a list of the most important forms and the corresponding formtypes:

Financials

Description FormType

Chart of Accounts 806

Journal Entry 392

Journal Vouchers 229

Posting Templates 800

Recurring Posting 670

Exchange Rate Differences 370

Conversion Differences 372

Financial Report Templates 704

Document Printing 184

Opportunities


Opportunity 320

Sales - A/R


Sales Quotation 149

Sales Order 139

Delivery 140

Return 180

A/R Down Payment Invoice 65300

A/R Invoice 133

A/R Credit Memo 179

A/R Reserve Invoice 60091

Purchasing - A/P


Purchase Quotation 540000988

Purchase Order 142

Goods Receipt 143



Return 182

A/P Down Payment Invoice 65301

A/P Invoice 141

A/P Credit Memo 181

A/P Reserve Invoice 60092

Landed Costs 992

Business Partner


Business Partner Master Data 134

Activity 651

Inventory


Item Master Data 150

Goods Receipt 721

Goods Issue 720

Inventory Transfer 940

Production


Bill of Materials 672

Production Orders 65211

Receipt from Production 65214

Issue for Production 65213

Service


Service Call 60110

Customer Equipment Card 60150

Service Contract 60126

Solutions Knowledge Base 60120

Human Resources


Employee Master Data 60100


4.6.6 Installed example rules

Overview over the installed example rulesFor more information on how to install example rules, please refer to Import Example Rules.The following list gives you an overview over the preinstalled example rules:

Optimizer

Name Description

GEN:0001: Wallpaper Generates a dynamic wallpaper during the start ofSAP Business One. It contains company name,database name, shortcuts and other information.

DOC:0002: Show Business Partner Info If you select the business partner on a sales orpurchasing document, the system issues a messagewith remarks for the relevant business partner. Theseare the remarks from the tab Remarks on theBusiness Partner Master Data form.

SRV:0003: Show Business Partner Info If you select the business partner on a Service Call(Modules > Service > Service Call), the systemissues a message with remarks for the relevantbusiness partner. These are the remarks from the tab Remarks on the Business Partner Master Data form.

BUP:0004: Do not allow * in business partner name Does not allow to use asterisk ("*") in the field Nameon the form Business Partner Master Data.

ITM:0005: Do not allow * in item name Does not allow to use asterisk ("*") in the field Description on the form Item Master Data.

ITM:0006: Do not allow * in item group name Does not allow to use asterisk ("*") in the field ItemGroup on the form Item Groups - Setup (Modules >Inventory > Item Master Data > Item Group > Definenew).

ITM:0007: Do not allow * in warehouse code Does not allow to use asterisk ("*") in the field Warehouse Code on the form Warehouses-(Default) -Setup (Modules > Inventory > Item Master Data >Inventory Data > Whse Code > orange arrow).

ITM:0008: Do not allow * in warehouse name Does not allow to use asterisk ("*") in the field Warehouse Name on the form Warehouses-(Default) -Setup (Modules > Inventory > Item Master Data >Inventory Data > Whse Code > orange arrow).

BUP:0009: Validate email address on BP Validates the e-mail address on the form BusinessPartner Master Data.

BUP:0010: Validate website on BP Validates the website on the form Business PartnerMaster Data.

BUP:0011: Increase card code Increases the Code before the business partner isadded (by clicking on Add).

BUP:0012: Prevent adding the same BP several times Prevents the user to add a new business partner ifthe Name or Federal Tax ID is the same as for anexisting business partner.

BUP:0013: Color field Colors the field Account Balance on the formBusiness Partner Master Data, if the credit limit hasbeen exceeded.

GEN:0014: Size Of Query Manager Window In the Query Manager there is a drop-down list thatyou can use to define the height of the Query


Name Description

Manager text field.

BUP:0015: Create activity on Batch Printing This rule creates activities for business partners ifdocuments are sent or printed using batch printing.The relevant document will be attached in PDF formatto the activity.

Function Button

Name Description

FIN:0001: Update exchange rate Gets the current exchange rate from the Yahoo!Currencies Center (http://finance.yahoo.com/currency). You can activate this function by right-clicking on the column Currency on the form Set Ratefor Selection Criteria (Modules > Administration >Exchange Rates and Indexes > Set Rate forSelection Criteria).

BUP:0002: Open new Sales Quotation Opens a new Sales Quotation and fills the fieldCustomer with the Code from the form BusinessPartner Master Data.

BUP:0003: Open new Sales Order Opens a new Sales Order and fills the field Customerwith the Code from the form Business Partner MasterData.

BUP:0004: Open new Delivery Opens a new Delivery and fills the field Customer withthe Code from the form Business Partner Master Data.

BUP:0005: Open new Invoice Opens a new A/R Invoice and fills the field Customerwith the Code from the form Business Partner MasterData.

BUP:0006: Open new Service Call Opens a new Service Call and fills the field Customerwith the Code from the form Business Partner MasterData.

BUP:0007: Open new email Opens the default e-mail program and opens a new e-mail. The e-mail address is taken from the e-mailaddress saved in the Business Partner Master Data,and the subject line is filled with the Name of thecustomer.

BUP:0008: Show on google maps Opens the default browser and shows the address inGoogle Maps.

BUP:0009: Show route on google maps Shows the route to the customer in Google Maps inthe default browser. The code calculates the routefrom the Address that is saved in the CompanyDetails (Modules > Administration > SystemInitialization > Company Details) to Bill To address ofthe current business partner.

BUP:0010: Copy address Copies the Bill To address of a business partner tothe Ship To address. If a Ship To address has beenselected, it will be added to the Bill To addresses.This function is available on the form BusinessPartner Master Data.

BUP:0011: Fill BP Address by Zip Code On the form Business Partner Master Data under


Name Description

Addresses > Zip Code, users can enter the zip codeand then right-click and choose Fill BP Address byZip Code. The system opens a new window in whichthe user can choose the relevant entry. The rule thenautomatically fills the fields City, County and Country.

BUP:0012: Copy BP Data to Clipboard This rule copies the data from the following BusinessPartner Master Data fields to the clipboard, so youcan copy them into other documents (e.g. into Wordor Excel files):NameContact IDBill To address (Street/PO Box, Block , City, State,Zip Code, Country)Tel 1FaxWebsiteE-Mail

New Menu

Name Description

GEN:0001: Help-->Open Remotesupport Opens the coresystems ag Support page. Werecommend you change the link, so it links to thewebsite of the SAP Business One partner.

The example rules are provided with the aim to facilitate the introduction to coresuite customize. Theyare there for the users to copy and amend them. All example rules have been tested against the SAPdemo databases. However, they are delivered without any guarantee.


If you open an example rule with an editor (see Editors), you can define more advanced settings. Examplerules consist of an introduction and a paragraph that contains the definition of the parameters:


4.6.7 LinkedObjectType

A great advantage of SAP Business One is the option to link independent data. For example: The orange arrow that appears next to the field Freight on the Sales Quotation (Modules > Sales-A/R > Sales Quotation) links to the Freight Charges:


With coresuite customize you can also create orange arrows that link to another form. To do so, you need theSAP-internal link number of the relevant document. The following list compiles some of the most important linknumbers:

Example Value

No target object -1

User-defined object 0

G/L account object 1

Business Partner object 2

Item object 4

Sales employee object 53

Transaction template 55

Journal Posting object 30

Loading Factor object 62

Recurring Transaction object 34

Product Tree object 66

Check for Payment object 57

Payment Terms object 40

Deposit object 25

Predated Deposit object 76

Warehouse object 64

Import File object 69

Budget System object 78

Sales Tax Authorities object 126

Sales Tax Codes object 128

Run External Application object 86

Due Date objects 71

User Defaults object 93

Financial Period object 111

Sales Opportunity object 97

Confirmation Level object 120

Confirmation Template object 121

Confirmation Document object 122

Draft object 112

Goods Issue object 60

Goods Receipt object 59

Project Code object 63

Contact object 33

Journal Voucher object 28

Profit Center object 61

Vendor Payment object 46

Receipt object 24


Example Value

Quotation object 23

Order object 17

Delivery Note object 15

Delivery Note Return object 16

Invoice object 13

Invoice Credit Memo object 14

Purchase Order object 22

Goods Receipt PO object 20

Goods Return object 21

Purchase Invoice object 18

Purchase Invoice Credit Memo object 19

Correction Invoice object 132

Stock Transfer object 67

Work Instructions object 68

Alerts Template object 80

Special Prices object 85

Customer/Vendor Catalog Number 73

Special Prices object 7

Serial Numbers for Items object 94

Item Batch Numbers object 106

User Valid Values object 110

User Display Categories object 114

Address Format object 113

Indicator object 138

Cash Discount object 133

Delivery Type object 49

VAT Group object 5

VAT Indicator object 135

Goods Shipment object 139

Expense Definition object 125

Credit Card object 36

Business Partner Central Bank Indicator object 161

Business Partner Bank Account object 187

Discount Code object 3

Block Payment object for vendors and customers 159

Agent Person object 177

Period Indicator object for document numbering 184

Holidays Table object 186

Employee object 171

Pre-defined Text object for sales and marketing 215


Example Value

documents

Territory (geographic location, brand, or item) object 200

SAP Business One User object 12

Production Order object 202

Bill of Exchange object 181

Bill of Exchange Transaction object 182

Address Pattern object 131

Account Segmentation Code object 143

File Format object 183

Stock Revaluation object 162

Inventory Pick List object 156

Dunning Term object 196

Service Contract object 190

Contract Template object 170

Install Base object 176

Service Call object 191

Service Call Solution object 189

Item Groups object 52

Package Type object 206

Sales Forecast object 198

Payment Method object 147

Withholding Tax object 178


4.6.8 PaneLevel

When you change the look of SAP Business One you will come across the term "PaneLevel" (PL).

PaneLevel is a term coined by SAP. It is represented by a number (e.g. 6) and is a property on a window (e.g. Business Partner Master Data).With the PaneLevel you can display fields on several tabs.For this reason, each item has two specifications: "From PaneLevel" and "To PaneLevel". With these valuesyou can define on which tab(s) an item should appear.

ExampleThe form Business Partner Master Data hat a total of 8 tabs. Each tab corresponds to a PaneLevel. If youswitch from one tab to the next, the PaneLevel changes too and you can only see the items that are assignedto that PaneLevel.The tab General, for example, represents PaneLevel 1. All items that appear on this tab have "FromPaneLevel=1" and "To PaneLevel=1". If you switch to another tab, e.g. to tab Contact Persons, the PaneLevelis 3 and the system displays all items that have "3" in or between the "From PaneLevel" and "To PaneLevel".

The header and footer information has the property "From PaneLevel=0" and "To PaneLevel=0". Thisinformation always appears regardless of which PaneLevel is active.An item with "From PaneLevel=1" and "To PaneLevel=4" therefore appears on the tabs General, ContactPersons and Properties.


You can determine the properties of an item (among them From PaneLevel and To PaneLevel) by using theWizard that is available in the modules ItemPlacement and New Item.

Here you can find a list of PaneLevels of some SAP Business One windows:

Business Partner Master Data

Tab PaneLevel

Header and Footer 0

General 1

Contact Persons 3

Properties 4

Remarks 5

Payment Terms 6

Addresses 7

Payment System 8

Accounting 9

Item Master Data

Tab PaneLevel

Header and Footer 0

Purchasing Data 1

Sales Data 2

Inventory Data 3

Properties 4

Remarks 5

General 6

Planning Data 7

Sales/Purchasing documents

Tab PaneLevel

Header and Footer 0

Contents 1

Logistics 6

Accounting 7


4.6.9 Reading parameters

To add a parameter to an SQL query or a shell command, you must use a certain syntax.

The syntax for parameters is as follows: [%TYPE;ITEMUID;COLUID;ROW;KEY]

Name Explanation

TYPE You can choose from the following options: G = GeneralA = AlphanumericD = DateN = Numeric

If you are not sure about which option to choose, choose 'G' (this goes for 90% of allcases).

ITEMUID The description (UID) of the item to be read.

COLUID If an item is a matrix, you can indicate the column from which the value should be read.

ROW If the item is a matrix, you can indicate the row from which the value should be read. Ifyou do not indicate a row, the system will choose the currently active row.

KEY If an item is a drop-down list, you can use 'K' to read the key. A drop-down list alwaysconsists of a key and a value. In most cases, it is the value that is displayed, but thekey that is saved (e.g. you see "Swiss Franc" (value), but in the database this is savedas "CHF" (key)). If you do not indicate 'K', the system will read the value.

The parameter must be marked with square brackets:

Start: [%End: ]

Some examples

Description Parameter

To read the business partner code from a sales document [%G;4]

To read the currency (e.g. CHF) from a sales document [%G;63;;;K]

To read the column (quantity) of a row (e.g. 1) from a sales document [%G;38;11;1]

To read the column (quantity) from the current row from a sales document [%G;38;11]

If by using parameters alone you cannot achieve what you wish for, you can use code instead. By using codeyou have more possibilities, but it has a negative impact on the performance.


4.6.10 SAP windows

The windows in SAP Business One (also called forms or masks) all have a certain height and width, which aredefined in pixels. The top left corner is the starting point (0/0) of the window.There are several types of windows. For some of them, the size is static, for others, the user can make thembigger or smaller.

All items on the window are defined by four pixel values:Height: The height of the itemWidth: The width of the itemLeft: The distance from the left side of the windowTop: The distance from the top side of the window


4.6.11 Translation parameters

All text modules that have been created with coresuite customize can be translated using the logic of coresuitedesigner. In the following fields it is possible to use translation parameters:

Optimizer: Warning TextFunction Button: NameNew Items: DescriptionNew Menu: Menu name

The syntax for the translation parameter is as follows: [@T0000001]

T0000001 is the code from the text table. To open the table with all text modules, go to Tools > Default Forms > SWA_LD_TEXT - Text.

Here you can translate the original text into various languages. To do so, proceed as follows:1. Open the text table (Tools > Default Forms > SWA_LD_TEXT - Text). 2. In the window Text right-click on the entry that you want to translate and choose Translate. 3. The window Translations appears.

For more information on the window Translations, please refer to the official SAP Business One


documentation.

4. Add the relevant language in the column Language. 5. Enter the relevant translation in the column Translations. 6. Choose Update.


4.6.12 Practical example 1 - Validation

ScenarioYou want to configure the Business Partner Master Data form so that it is only possible to add a new businesspartner if the following conditions are met:a) A telephone number has been entered for the business partner.b) A valid e-mail address has been entered for the business partner.If these conditions are not met, it is not possible to add the business partner.

ProcedureCreate the relevant rules in the Optimizer module.

a) Define mandatory fieldOpen the Optimizer module (Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Optimizer) andenter the following data:

RuleName Enter a unique name, so that you can easily categorize the rules andtell them apart.

Type REGEX

Action Validate

Warning Text Please enter a phone number

Statusbarmessage Yes (checked)

FormType Base 134

ItemUID Base 43

Form Type 134

ItemUID 1

Event Type ItemPressed

Before Event Yes (clicked)

Form Mode MODIFY

Expression .̂+$ (corresponds to the template Mandatory TextEdit Field)

You can leave all other fields empty. They are either not relevant or will be filled in automatically.

b) Define valid e-mail formatOpen the Optimizer module (Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Optimizer) andenter the following data:

RuleName Enter a unique name, so that you can easily categorize the rules andtell them apart.

Type REGEX

Action Validate

Warning Text Please enter a valid e-mail address

Statusbarmessage Yes (checked)

FormType Base 134

ItemUID Base 60

FormType 134

ItemUID 1

Event Type ItemPressed


Before Event Yes (checked)

Form Mode MODIFY

Expression \̂w+([-+.']\w+)*@\w+([-.]\w+)*\.\w+([-.]\w+)*$ (corresponds to thetemplate Email)


If a user now enters an invalid e-mail address (e.g. john.masongmail.com instead of [email protected]),a warning appears in the status bar:

A similar message would appear when a user tries to add a business partner without entering a telephonenumber.

mailto:[email protected])


4.6.13 Practical example 2 - Display all prices

ScenarioFor each of your items, you have defined several prices. Instead of checking these prices individually (byselecting the relevant price from the drop-down list on the form Item Master Data under Price List), you want toaccess an overview from the form Item Master Data.

GoalOn the form Item Master Data, you want to add a Function button over which you want to be able to access allprices for the relevant item.

ProcedureTo add the Function button, proceed as follows:

1. Go to Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > Function Button. The windowcoresuite customize: Function Buttons appears.

2. Choose Add row and enter the following data:

Active Select the checkbox.

Description Show all prices for current item

Type CSCODE

Name Show all prices

Form Type 150Form Type1. Since you want the Function button to appear on the form Item Master Data, you

must enter the ID of this form in the window coresuite customize: FunctionButtons under Form Type.

2. To find out the ID, activate the System Information (View > System Information). 3. Then open the form Item Master Data (Modules > Inventory > Item Master Data).4. Move the mouse over the form Item Master Data. In the status bar you can now see

that this item has "Form=150", i.e. the ID of Item Master Data is "150".

No Button Do not select this checkbox.

Expression Enter the Code for practical example 2:1. Copy the Code for practical example 2.2. Click on the orange arrow in the column Expression. 3. The window coresuite customize editor opens.4. Paste the code that you have copied in step 1.5. Choose Save and then Parse. 6. Close the window coresuite customize editor.


3. Go back to the window coresuite customize: Function Buttons and choose Update. 4. Reopen the form Item Master Data. 5. Load a data record and choose Functions > Show all prices. 6. The window Item Prices opens. Here you can now see all prices for the relevant item:


Code for practical example 24.6.13.1

try{

// parametersint formWidth = 600; // width of the windowint formHeight = 400; // height of the windowint left = 10; // distance to the left

borderstring formTitle = "Item Prices"; // title of the new windowstring formType = "COR_CUS_SII"; // form type for new window

// read information from the current windowstring itemCode = TextEdit.GetFromUID(pVal.Form, "5").Value;string itemName = TextEdit.GetFromUID(pVal.Form, "7").Value;

// create items for new windowLabel label = Label.CreateNew("COR_LA1");label.Value = itemCode + " - " + itemName;label.Left = left; label.Top = 10; label.Width = 300; label.Height = 10;Grid grid = Grid.CreateNew("GR1");grid.SetPosition(label);grid.Top += label.Height + 5; grid.Height = formHeight - 80;grid.Width = formWidth - 25;Button buttonCancel = Button.CreateNew("2");buttonCancel.Left = left; buttonCancel.Top = formHeight-60; buttonCancel.Width = 85;

buttonCancel.Height = 20;

// create new windowForm form = Form.CreateNewForm(formType, "COR_CUS_SII" + SwissAddonFramework.Utils.

UniqueStringGenerator.Next());form.Height = formHeight;form.Width = formWidth;form.Top = pVal.Form.Top;form.Left = pVal.Form.Left;form.Value = formTitle;

// add items to windowform.AddItem(label);form.AddItem(grid);form.AddItem(buttonCancel);

// load window to screenform.Load();

// fill data to gridstring query = @"

SELECT ITM1.PriceList,OPLN.ListName,ITM1.Price,ITM1.Currency,ITM1.Factor

FROM ITM1 INNER JOIN OPLN ON OPLN.ListNum=ITM1.PriceListWHERE ITM1.ItemCode='" + itemCode + @"'ORDER BY ITM1.PriceList";

grid.ExecuteQuery(query);

// set all columns to not editable


foreach(GridColumn gc in grid.Columns.Values){

gc.Editable = false;}

// react if the user is doubleclicking on the header of the rowgrid.Columns["RowsHeader"].AddHandler_DoubleClick( ModeComponent.FormModes.ALL,

delegate(SwissAddonFramework.UI.EventHandling.ItemEvents.DoubleClick ev){try{

// get current pricelist namestring priceListName = grid.GetValue("ListName", ev.Row);

// open pricelistMenuItem.GetFromUID("3076").Activate();Form currentForm = Form.GetFormFromUID(SwissAddonFramework.

B1Connector.GetB1Connector().Application.Forms.ActiveForm.UniqueID);Matrix m = Matrix.GetFromUID(currentForm, "3");for(int i = 0; i < m.Rows.Count;i++){

string currentPriceList = m.GetValue("1", i);if(currentPriceList == priceListName){

m.Columns[0].Cells[i].Click(MatrixColumn.ClickTypes.Double, MatrixColumn.Modifier.None);

return;}

}}catch (System.Exception ex){

SwissAddonFramework.Messaging.StatusBar.WriteError("Error incustomize rule to show the price list: " + ex.Message);

}});

}catch (System.Exception exe){

SwissAddonFramework.Messaging.StatusBar.WriteError("Error in customize rule to showthe item prices: " + exe.Message);}

4.6.14 Practical example 3 - UDT Handler

The following use case illustrates how the UDT Handler can be used in a business scenario.

ScenarioOn the Sales Order, you want to be able to add additional information to your items, e.g. color and size of theitems.

Step 1: Define the UDT

1. User-Defined Tables - SetupGo to Tools > Customization Tools > User-Defined Tables - Setup. Create a new line with the following data:


Table Name LINEPROPERTIES

Description Additional Line Properties

Object Type No Object

Archivable Leave empty

Choose Update to save your changes and close the window.

2. User-Defined Fields - ManagementGo to Tools > Customization Tools > User-Defined Fields - Management. A new window opens. Go toAdditional Line Properties and add the following fields by choosing Add:

Title Property AltCardCode Print DocEntry Value LineNum

Description Property Altern.Vendor BP

Print DocEntry Value LineNum

Type Alphanumeric Alphanumeric Alphanumeric Numeric Alphanumeric Numeric

Length 10 30 1 (this creates acheckbox)

10 250 10

Structure Regular Regular Regular n/a Regular n/a

Set ValidValues forField

Checked

Value Struct.

C Color

S Size

n/a Checked

Value Struct.

Y Yes

N No

n/a n/a n/a


Step 2: Configure the UDT Handler

1. UDT HandlerOpen the UDT Handler (Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite customize > UDT Handler) and enterthe following data:

User defined Table Select LINEPROPERTIES - Additional Line Properties from the drop-down list.

Form Title Line properties for document [%DocNum] Line [%LineNum]

When you right-click in this field, you can go to Insert Parameter and selectthe relevant parameter. The system then automatically enters it in the correctformat.

2. UDT Handler - General tab

General

Key | ItemId | MatrixId This will be filled automatically.

... Click on the arrow and select the following entries from the ChooseFrom List:DocNum (on the Sales Order)LineNum (on the Sales Order)

Filter (Where Clause) U_LineNum = [%LineNum] AND U_DocEntry = '[%DocKey]'

When you right-click in this field, you can go to Insert Parameter and selectthe relevant parameter. The system then automatically writes it in the correct formatin your clause.

Form Type 139

Menu Name Line Properties

Menu UID

Parent Inactive

Resulting Form Type COR_LineProp

SupportedFunctionality

Update Checked

Add Row Checked

Delete Row Checked

3. ParametersThen choose Functions > Open Parameters. This opens the Parameter window (please refer to the chapterOpen Parameters in the coresuite designer manual for more information on this mask). Enter the followingparameter:

Code Code of the parameter. Do not enter anything here; this code is assignedautomatically when you save the parameter.

Key (In Queries) LineNum

Type of Parameter Numeric

Item Id 0

Matrix Id 38

Use Rownumber leave empty

Then link this parameter to the Sales Order.


4. UDT Handler - Fields tab

Fields

Field Vis. Edit. Title Pos LinkedTable

Value Description

Type

U_Property X X Property 10 ComboBox

U_AltCardCode

X X Altern. VendorBP

40 OCRD CardCode

CardName ChooseFromList

U_Print X X Print 30 ComboBox

U_DocEntry DocEntry 0 ComboBox

U_Value X X Value 20 ComboBox

U_LineNum LineNum 0 ComboBox

Save your changes.Then go back to a Sales Order, right-click on an item and select Line Properties. This will then open your UDTwhere you can easily select the data needed. You can see that the name of the business partner will be filledin automatically, for example.

The form will look like this:

Examples for other use cases:Hobby assignment for contact peopleDefinition of holding structures on business partnersDynamic attributes on equipmentsDefining time-dependent guarantees on items


Creating customer-specific price listsManaging credit limits for accountsetc.

232CORESUITE ENTERPRISE SEARCH

CORESUITE ENTERPRISE SEARCH5

How much time do you spend searching for SAP Business One documents every day? Wouldn't it be great tohave a tool that enables you to search for Business Partners, Marketing Documents, Master Data and muchmore... With coresuite enterprise search this is finally possible!


5.1 Quick access

coresuite enterprise search is a search tool that you can use after you have installed the coresuite countrypackage. No additional configuration is needed. There are two ways to start coresuite enterprise search:

Widget Add-On

Go to My Cockpit > Widget Gallery > coresuitewidgets > enterprise search.

Click on enterprise search and drag the element intothe cockpit. The window enterprise search nowappears in the cockpit.

The window will open automatically next time youstart coresuite.

Go to Modules > Administration > Add-Ons >coresuite enterprise search.

The system displays the window coresuite enterprisesearch.

The window will open automatically next time youstart coresuite.

coresuite enterprise search offers three different search options. They are visible in the top left area of thecoresuite enterprise search window:

Object searchWith this option you can search for contacts, items, sales orders and much more.

All my own open documentsHere you can display all the open documents that are in your name.

Recent modified objectsThis view shows all objects that have been modified in the last 10 days.



Hardware and software requirements for SAP Business OneYou can find the hardware and software requirements for SAP Business One on www.sap.com or on the SAPPartner Portal (SAP S-User Login required).

Hardware and software requirements for coresuiteTo be able to use coresuite enterprise search you must make sure the system meets the coresuiterequirements. The latest system requirements are published in the download section on our website: http://www.coresystems.ch/downloads. If you want to use the widget version of the enterprise search you must alsomake sure that your system runs on SAP Business One 8.8 PL12 (or higher).

Enabling the cockpitIn addition, you must enable the cockpit. If you are a superuser, go to Modules > Administration > System Initialization > General Settings > Cockpitand select the checkbox Enable Cockpit at Company Level. Then go to Tools > Cockpit > Enable MyCockpit. If you are not a superuser, you can enable the cockpit by going to Tools > Cockpit and then choose EnableMy Cockpit. If this is grayed out, contact the superuser (this could be your manager or the systemadministrator).

http://www.sap.com

https://websmp206.sap-ag.de/~sapidb/011000358700001241092005/





5.3 Option 1 - Object search

Options

(Show object functions)Choose Object functions to choose from more options. For sales orders, for example, you can choose from the following options: Open Document, Open BusinessPartner and Add a linked activity. To display these functions, select a document and choose Show object functions. You can also access these functions by right-clicking on the sales order.

(Search settings)When you choose Search settings, you can choose from the following options:

Search only in my documentsInclude document linesInclude closed documentsInclude canceled documentsInclude categories [there you can select the categories you want to include from a list]Searchable fields [this option is only available for superusers]

The Search settings are described in more detail in the following section.


5.3.1 Search Settings

Every user can choose different parameters to refine the search result. It is possible to select severalparameters at the same time.

The following parameters are available:

Search only in my documentsInclude document linesInclude closed documentsInclude canceled documentsIncluded categories [there you can select the categories you want to include from a list]Searchable fields [this option is only available for superusers]

This section looks more closely at these parameters.

Search only in my documents5.3.1.1

Activate this parameter if you would like to only search documents that are assigned to you.With this parameter you can restrict the search considerably.

Example:The user "Peter Knecht" activates the parameter Search only in my documents and performs a wildcardsearch. The system only returns the one document that is assigned to him. If he repeated this search with the parameter Search only in my documents deactivated, the system wouldreturn a far higher number of matches.

Categories affected by the parameter Search only my documents are: All marketing documents,drafts, service calls and sales opportunities.


Include document lines5.3.1.2

Activate this parameter if you would like to search document lines.

Example:The user activates the parameter Include document lines and enters the item number "I00008" in the searchfield. The system then displays all documents that contain this item number in the body.

Include closed documents5.3.1.3

Activate this parameter if you would like to include closed marketing documents, coresuite time subscriptionsand coresuite time projects in the search. If this parameter is active, the search includes both open and closeddocuments.In the search results, closed marketing documents, coresuite time subscriptions and coresuite time projectsappear in gray font.

Include canceled documents5.3.1.4

Activate this parameter if you would like to include canceled marketing documents in the search.In the search results, canceled marketing documents appear in gray font and are struck through.


Included categories5.3.1.5

Here you have the option to define the categories that should be included in the search.

You can choose from the following categories:Business PartnersContactsEmployeeItemsActivitiesOpportunitiesSales QuotationsSales OrdersDeliveriesReturns (A/R)A/R Down Payment InvoicesA/R InvoicesA/R Reserve InvoicesA/R Credit MemosPurchase OrdersGoods Receipt PosGoods ReturnsA/P Down Payment InvoicesA/P InvoicesA/P Reserve InvoicesA/P Credit MemoDraftsService CallsService ContractsProduction OrdersPurchase Quotations

coresuite time integrationIf coresuite time is enabled, the following categories are also available:

ProjectsSubscriptions

be.as integrationIf the external add-on be.as is installed, the following category is also available:

Work Order ID

Selecting too many categories could affect the performance. We therefore recommend selecting onlythe categories you really need.


Searchable fields5.3.1.6

This option is available to superusers only.As a superuser, you can use Searchable fields to define the fields that should be included in the search.These settings then apply to all users. You can choose from the most relevant standard fields of BusinessOne. Furthermore, include UDFs for each of the categories.

If, for example, you have defined the UDF "Object Status" in the business partner master data, you can now goto Searchable fields > Business Partners > UDFs and select Object Status. This UDF will then be included inthe search.

For superusers, these changes take effect immediately. All other users need to restart SAP Business One forthe changes to take effect.

Selecting too many categories could affect the performance. We therefore recommend selecting onlythe categories you really need.


Default searchable fields5.3.1.6.1

The following fields are enabled by default:

Category Field name

Business Partners BP Name

BP Code

City

Street

Zip Code

Contacts BP Code

BP Name

E-Mail

Contact Person Name

Employee First Name

Last Name

Items Item Description

Item No.

Preferred Vendor Code

Preferred Vendor Name

Activities Activity No.

BP Code

BP Name

Remarks

Opportunities BP Code

BP Name

Opportunity Name

Opportunity Number

Remarks

Marketing Documents BP Code

BP Contact Code

BP Contact Name

BP Name

Document Number

Item No.

Item/Service Description

Drafts BP Code

BP Contact Code

BP Contact Name

BP Name

Document Number

Item No.

Item/Service Description


Service Calls BP Code

BP Contact Code

BP Contact Name

BP Name

Service Call No.

Subject

Service Contracts BP Code

BP Name

Contact Person Code

Contact Person Name

Contract No.

Description

Production Orders BP Code

Item Description

Item No.

Product Nr.

Production Order Num.

Projects * Time Project Code

Subscriptions * BP Name

Subscription Code

Work Orders ** Work Order ID

Project

Doc. Entry

Customer Nr.

Customer Name

Item Code

* only available if coresuite time is installed.** only available if the be.as add-on is installed. You must have be.as add-on 2009 SP01 Build 19 or higher.

http://www.beas.de/


5.3.2 Search types

In the Object search, two search types are available: the indexed search and the free text search.

The indexed search is usually faster than the free text search. We therefore recommend using theindexed search whenever possible.

Indexed search5.3.2.1

When you start entering a search term in the search area, the system immediately starts searching formatches and displays them in a drop-down list. That means you do not have to finish writing, you can justchoose the relevant entry from the drop-down list. The drop-down list displays four types of results:

Business PartnersIf you select a business partner from the drop-down list, the search engine will retrieve- all documents that are related to the selected business partner - the contact persons of this business partner.

Business Partner ContactsIf you select a business partner contact from the list, the search engine will retrieve- the Business Partner to which the contact person belongs - all documents in which this contact person appears.

EmployeesIf you select an employee from the drop-down list, the search engine will retrieve- all documents assigned to the selected employee - the employee.


Items

If you select an item from the drop-down list, the search engine will retrieve- the master data form of the item itself - all documents in which the item appears in the document body.

The search results are displayed in a tree structure. Behind each category, the system displays the number ofsearch results.All open documents that are past their due date appear in red.Closed documents appear in gray.

Double-clicking on an entry to open the relevant window.Right-clicking on an entry to choose from additional functions. E.g. when you right-click on a business partneryou can create an activity, a sales quotation, a delivery, an A/R invoice, etc.

When you add a new business partner, contact, employee or item to the master data, it takes about10 seconds for the new entry to appear in the drop-down list.

The indexed search only shows the objects that the superuser has defined under (SearchSettings) > Searchable fields. For more information on this please refer to the chapter Includedcategories.


Free text search5.3.2.2

When you use the free text search, the system looks for the search term in all categories that you have

chosen in (Search Settings). They system also looks for the search term in all fields that the superuser

has defined under (Search Settings > Searchable Fields).

Enter the complete search term and choose Search to start the free text search.

Bear in mind that if you select a term that appears in the drop-down list, the indexed search will beused and not the free text search.

The menu entries Projects and Subscriptions are only available if coresuite time is installed.

The menu entry Work Orders is only available if the be.as add-on is installed.


Advanced free text searchBy using Boolean operators the simple search becomes an advanced search. You can use Boolean operatorsto search for several terms at the same time. Enter the search terms and the Boolean operators in the searchfield and then choose Search. As usual, the system displays the search results in a tree structure and showsthe number of search results in brackets behind each category.

Example: You would like to search for all documents with the code "I00012" related to the business partner"CTI Computers". In the search field you therefore enter "CTI Computer AND I00012" and the choose Search.


5.4 Option 2 - All my own open documents

All my own open documents gives you an overview over the documents that are currently assigned to you. Thesearch results are displayed in a tree structure. Behind each category, the system displays the number ofsearch results in brackets.Double-clicking on an entry to display the relevant form.Right-clicking on the entry to display the context menu.

Options

(Show object functions)Choose Object functions to choose from more options. For Sales Orders, for example, you can choose from the following options: Open Document, Open BusinessPartner and Add a linked activity.To display these functions, select a sales order and choose Show object functions. You can also accessthese functions by right-clicking on the sales order.

(Refresh)Choose Refresh to update the search results. This function is useful if you have added entries to the databaseor modified existing entries after opening All my own open documents.

For this function to work, you need to make sure that you assign a user code on the employeemaster data form. To do so, go to Modules > Employee Master Data, then select the User Code fromthe drop-down list.


5.5 Option 3 - Recent modified objects

Recent modified objects shows all documents that have been changed in the last 10 days. The search resultsare displayed in a tree structure and are sorted by the date they have been modified. Behind each category,the system displays the number of search results in brackets.

Options

(Show object functions)Choose Object functions to choose from more options. For Sales Orders, for example, you can choose from the following options: Open Document, Open BusinessPartner and Add a linked activity.To display these functions, select a sales order and choose Show object functions. You can also accessthese functions by right-clicking on the sales order.

(Refresh)Choose Refresh to update the search results. This function is useful if you have added entries to the databaseor modified existing entries after opening All my own open documents.


5.6 Legend of the icons

Icon Description

Business Partner

Customer Business Partner

Lead Business Partner

Vendor Business Partner

Business Partner Contact

Contact person of a Customer Business Partner

Contact person of a Lead Business Partner

Contact person of a Vendor Business Partner

Employee

Item

Activity

Opportunities

Service Calls and Service Contracts

High-Priority Service Call

Service Contract

Purchasing Documents

Sales Document

Production Order

Draft

coresuite time integrationIf coresuite time is enabled, the following icons will also appear in the search results:

Icon Description

Projects

Subscriptions

be.as integrationIf the be.as add-on is installed, the following icons will also appear in the search results:

Icon Description

be.as work orders

249CORESUITE DESIGNER

CORESUITE DESIGNER6



Hardware and software requirements for SAP Business OneThe hardware and software requirements for SAP Business One are available on www.sap.com or on the SAPPartner Portal (requires SAP superuser login).

Hardware and software requirements for coresuiteTo use coresuite designer, your system must meet the requirements for coresuite. You can download thelatest coresuite system requirements from our website: http://www.coresystems.ch/downloads.

6.2 Installation

You can download the detailed installation manual for coresuite framework, which is the base for all coresuitemodules, from the coresystems website (help.coresuite.ch).

To buy licenses, you must be registered as a user on portal.coresystems.ch. Only partners can buylicenses. If you are an end user, please contact your SAP partner.

Activating the coresuite modulesAfter you have installed coresuite framework and activated the licenses for all modules, you can download thenew modules in SAP Business One. To do so, go to Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite administration >Administration and choose Download updates. Choose the relevant modules and install them.

After downloading the modules, you need to restart coresuite. Go to Administration > Add-Ons > Add-OnManager, select "coresuite" and choose Stop. Wait for a moment, then restart the add-on.

http://www.sap.com




http://portal.coresystems.ch


6.3 Support and Service

If you have questions or suggestions regarding our products, please do not hesitate to contact us:

coresystems agVilla im ParkDorfstrasse 695210 WindischSwitzerland

Hotline: +41 (0) 848 088 088 Fax: +41 (0) 56 444 20 50E-mail: [email protected]: www.coresystems.ch

www.coresuite.ch

For support and service issues please follow the procedure outlined on the coresuite support website orcontact [email protected].



http://www.coresuite.ch

http://www.coresystems.ch/coresuite-support.html?&L=2



6.4 Authorizations

You can define the authorizations for all options described below in the General Authorizations of SAPBusiness One.

AccessModules > Administration > System Initialization > Authorizations > General Authorizations

For more information on Authorizations please refer to the official SAP Business One manual.

We recommend you create user groups, as this helps to manage authorizations (also see Users).

6.4.1 Data sources

In the Layoutdefinition you can find the most popular data sources for the relevant forms. For some of the datasources, you can change the user authorizations (see Setting user authorizations). Apart from the defined data sources, you can also define your own queries.

Setting user authorizations6.4.1.1

You can set the authorizations for some of the data sources, e.g. for coresuite financial reports, under Modules> Administration > System Initialization > Authorizations > General Authorizations > User Authorization >coresuite designer > Datasources.

Own queries6.4.1.2

You can create own queries using the Query Generator or the Query Manager (SAP Menu > Tools > Queries >Query Generator / Query Manager). Save your own queries in the Query Manager.For more information on the Query Generator and Query Manager, please refer to the official SAP BusinessOne documentation.

You can then use the queries in the Layoutdefinition under Queries.

Do not use special characters or periods in the query name, as this will cause errors.

Do not save your queries in the category General, as this category is not displayed in theLayoutdefinition.


6.5 Description of forms

This chapter describes all coresuite designer forms.

Overview over the forms

ConfigurationLayoutmanagementLayoutdefinitionPrintdefinition

6.5.1 Configuration

After installing coresuite designer, it is necessary to configure some parameters before using coresuitedesigner.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Configuration


General6.5.1.1

On the tab General you can make general settings to coresuite designer.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Configuration > General

Window

Fields

Text Language Shows the default language for the text modules. You use these text modules when youcreate layouts in coresuite designer. The system uses this language if the relevant textmodule is not (yet) available in the dynamic language. You can change the language on the tab Text.

Log Queries Activate this checkbox if you want that, before executing them, the system logs all queriesin a temporary file (%temp%/swald/%companyname%/queries/query.txt). You can use thefiles for debugging.

Force DefaultPrinter

Activate this checkbox if you want to always use the default printer.

Set Print-Flagwhen:

Define after which action the print flag is set:Printing - after printing the documentEmailing - after sending the document by e-mailFaxing - after sending the document by faxPDF - after converting the document into PDF format

Print in UpdateMode

Activate this checkbox if you want to allow printing in Update mode. This means that youcan print documents in which you made changes that you have not yet committed bychoosing Update (i.e. the changes are not in the system yet).

SWA_LD_DRAFTto Formtype

Activate this checkbox if you want to print drafts. If, for example, you want to print a draftof a DIN layout from a customized list, coresuite designer will not be able to recognize the


formtype (e.g. order, quote, etc.). If this checkbox is active, coresuite designer will convertthe formtype correctly.

Version Shows which version of coresuite designer is installed.


Text6.5.1.2

On the tab Text you can define the language for the text modules used in coresuite designer.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Configuration > Text

Window

Fields

Text Language Here you can change the default language for the text modules. You use these textmodules when you create layouts in coresuite designer. The system uses this language ifthe relevant text module is not (yet) available in the dynamic language.If you use the function Open Texts, the table appears in the language that you havedefined here. If you want to change the language, follow the instructions below.

Allow automaticMeta TextUpdates

Activate this checkbox if you want the system to automatically update (and thereforeoverwrite) the meta texts (file cor_txt_meta.xml) whenever you carry out an update.

ProcedureTo change the language, proceed as follows:1. Export the current languageChoose Export, enter a name for the .xml file, choose a location and save the file.

2. Import the relevant languageSelect the relevant language from the drop-down list and choose Import. Import the same .xml file that youexported in step 1.

It is important to first export the current language.


When you import new texts, existing text modules will be overwritten and new text modules will beadded.

You can also use the Export and Import functionality to translate existing text modules into otherlanguages. Simply export the existing text modules, send the .xml file to the translator and import thetranslated file. We recommend using notepad++ for editing purposes.

http://notepad-plus.sourceforge.net/


Preview6.5.1.3

On the tab Preview you can define the size of the preview window.

To open the preview, open a printdefinition or a layoutdefinition and choose (Preview).

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Configuration > Preview

Window

Fields

Preview window Here you can define the size of the preview window. You can choose from the followingoptions:

User - The preview window is half the size of the screen.Maximized - The preview window is the size of the full screen.Minimized - The preview window is minimized (i.e. appears in the bottom right corner ofthe screen).User - The preview window is the size that you defined when you last opened thepreview window.

100% Checkbox active: The content is shown in original size.


Install6.5.1.4

Here you can reinstall printdefinitions and layoutdefinitions or access the Layoutmanagement.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Configuration > Install

Window

Fields

Layoutmanagement

See chapter Layoutmanagement.

Reinstall Choose Reinstall, if you want to reinstall a printdefinition or layoutdefinition. This is useful ifyou suspect that one or several printdefinitions or layoutdefinitions contain errors.

Existing printdefinition and layoutdefinitions are not updated automatically. If you want to updateprintdefinition and layoutdefinitions, you must use the Reinstall function them.

During an update, only layouts of the type "System" (see Sys in Layoutmanagement) will be replacedwith a higher version.


Select Grid6.5.1.5

On the tab Select Grid you can adjust the select grid settings.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Configuration > Select Grid

Window

Fields

Autoselect Checkbox active: By default, all entries in the select grid are selected.

Step X When you open several select grids, they are offset. In this field you can define thehorizontal off-set in pixels.

Step Y When you open several select grids, they are offset. In this field you can define the verticaloff-set in pixels.


Email(Smtp)6.5.1.6

On the tab Email(Smtp) you can configure the SMTP server.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Configuration > Email(Smtp)

Window

Fields

Smtp Server Enter the address of the Smtp server.

Port If necessary, enter the port.

Smtp User Enter the user name.

Smtp Password Enter the password.

Use SSL Checkbox active: They system always uses an SSL connection.

Notification Define when you want to receive notifications by e-mail. You can choose from the followingoptions:

NeverOn Delay (when the email is sent with delay)On Failure (e.g. if the recipient's mail box is full)On Failure and DelayOn Success

The notification is sent to the e-mail address that you have entered as From Addressin the Printdefinition (Modules > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > Email/Fax > FromAddress).

Preview MailMode

Define the preview mode that should be used when you choose (E-Mail) in thepreview. You can choose from the following options:

Default


SAP PromptSmtp PromptMAPI Prompt

The Smtp settings become active when you choose them in the Printdefinition (Modules > coresuitedesigner > Printdefinition > Email/Fax > Send Mode = 3 - Smtp Prompt or 4 - Smtp direct).


Startlayout6.5.1.7

On the tab Startlayout you can define one or several layoutdefinitions that you want to display whenever youopen SAP Business One. A manager might want to see a dashboard showing him the latest sales figures while a sales person mightwant to see a list of opportunities.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Configuration > Startlayout

Window

Fields

User Select the relevant user from the drop-down list.

Layout Select the relevant layoutdefinition from the drop-down list.

Batchprint6.5.1.8

On the tab Batchprint you can define the settings for remote printing and batch printing.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Configuration > Batchprint

Window

Fields

User Select the relevant user from the drop-down list.

Alert Select the relevant alert from the drop-down list. You must first save this alert under Modules > Administration > Alert Management (for more information please refer to theofficial SAP Business One documentation).

PrintMode Select the relevant mode from the drop-down list. You can choose from the followingoptions:

PreviewPrintEmailFaxPDF

ParameterScan-Path

Enter the path to the folder where the .xml file for Remote Printing is saved. This .xml filelooks something like this:

<?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-16' standalone='no' ?><job> <type mode="Print" layoutid="0" formtype="" /> <paramsets> <paramset>

<params>  <param key="DocEntry" value="10" />  <param key="PrintDefId" value="DocSalesOrder" />

</params> </paramset> </paramsets></job>

Intervall [min] Enter at which interval [in minutes] the system should check if the document has alreadybeen printed.

ProcedureRemote Printing1. In the column User select a user from the drop-down list.2. In the column Parameter Scan-Path enter the path to the folder where the .xml file is saved. This .xml file

contains information about which document should be printed how often and in which format. PDFs will besaved in the folder that you have indicated in the Printdefinition (Modules > Add-Ons > coresuite designer >Printdefinition > Email/Fax > Exportpath). If no path has been indicated in the Printdefinition, the systemsaves the PDFs in the folder swald in the temp directory. The system also saves the files for the otheroptions (Email, Fax, Preview) in the folder swald.

3. Leave all other fields empty.4. Choose OK to confirm.

Batch Printing1. In the column User select a user from the drop-down list.2. In the column Alert select an alert from the drop-down list.3. In the column PrintMode choose the mode for printing the document. PDFs will be saved in the folder that

you have indicated in the Printdefinition (Modules > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > Email/Fax > Exportpath). If no path has been indicated in the Printdefinition, the system saves the PDFs in thefolder swald in the temp directory. The system also saves the files for the other options (Email, Fax,Preview) in the folder swald.

4. Indicate the interval [in minutes], in which the system should check if the alert has already been sent.5. Choose OK to confirm.


Editor6.5.1.9

On the tab Editor you can define settings for coresuite Editor.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Configuration > Editor

Window

Fields

Write back <BR/> for Newline

Checkbox active: coresuite Editor uses "<BR/>" to display new lines.Checkbox inactive: coresuite Editor does not use "<BR/>" to render new lines, butdisplays the text in WYSIWYG format.

Preserve Spaces Checkbox active: If you enter several blank spaces in coresuite Editor, the systemdisplays as many blank spaces as you entered.Checkbox inactive: If you enter several blank spaces in coresuite Editor, the systemreduces them to one blank space.


6.5.2 Layoutmanagement

The Layoutmanagement offers an overview over all printdefinitions and layoutdefinitions. In the Layoutmanagement you can:

Search for / filter layoutdefinitionsImport / Export layoutdefinitionsReinstall printdefinitions and layoutdefinitionsActivate / Deactivate printdefinitionsOpen printdefinitions and layoutdefinitions.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutmanagement

WindowThe Layoutmanagement form consists of four areas:

1) Filter areaHere you can search for printdefinitions and layoutdefinitions. Enter the search criteria and choose Filter.

If you do not enter any search criteria, the list in the browser area (see below) contains all existingobjects.

Objectname Enter the name (or part of the name) of a printdefinition or layoutdefinition.

Category Limit your search by choosing a category. You can choose from the following options:BAN - BankingBUP - Business PartnerCSM - coresuite timeDOC - Document


EMP - EmployeeFIN - FinancialGEN - GeneralITM - ItemMRP - MRPOPR - OpportunityPRD - ProductionPUR - Purchase ReportsSAR - Sales ReportsSRV - ServiceSTO - StockUSR - User

Type Limit your search by choosing a Type. You can choose from the following options:Empty - Choose this option if, for example, you want to choose a label printer directlyusing the control flag. The difference to the other option is that no template is attached.Master Layout - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of thetype Master Layout. With Master Layouts you can, for example, use the same headerand footer in several documents.

Try to avoid using Master Layouts as they greatly reduce layout flexibility.Document - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of the typeDocument.Data - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of the type Data.Other - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of the type Other.Select Grid - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of the typeSelect Grid.External Report - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of thetype External Report. External Reports are, for example, Crystal Reports, Excel, etc.User Query - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of the typeUser Query.

Status Limit your search by choosing a Status. You can choose from the following options:ActiveInactiveReinstall

Only MenuReports

Activate this checkbox if you want to limit your search to menu reports.


2) Browser areaHere the objects are grouped after category, formtype, layoutdefinitions and printdefinitions. You can select individual printdefinition or layoutdefinitions and move them to the actions list using the buttonsin the actions area.

Category This column indicates the category of the object.

Formtype This column indicates the formtype of the object.

Printdefinition This column indicates the printdefinition.

Layout This column indicates the layoutdefinition.

Version This column indicates the version of the object.

Sys This column indicates if the layoutdefinition is a system layout.

Double-clicking on a row header on the Category, Formtype or Printdefinition level opens thePrintdefinition. Double-clicking the row header on the Layout level opens the Layoutdefinition.

3) Actions areaIn this area you can choose which action you want to execute for the selected object.To do so, select the relevant object and choose the action you want to execute. The selected object thenappears in the action list.

Export Choose Export, if you want to export the selected object.

Reinstall Choose Reinstall, if you want to reinstall the selected object.

Deactivate /Activate

Choose Deactivate or Activate, if you want to deactivate / activate the selected object.

Open Choose Open, if you want to open the selected object (this opens the printdefinition /layoutdefinition).

4) Action listThis list displays all objects and the corresponding actions.

Action This is the action that you want to perform for the object.

Type This is the type of the object (i.e. Printdef or Layout).

Code This is the code of the object.

Description This is the description of the object.

To delete a line, right-click on the line and choose Delete line.If you are happy with the objects/actions in the list, choose Execute.


Export6.5.2.1

With the Export function, you can export selected objects.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutmanagement.

Procedure1. Open Layoutmanagement. 2. In the browser area (see Layoutmanagement), select the object you want to export and choose Export. 3. Once you have selected all relevant objects, choose Execute.


4. The system lists all objects that you want to export:

Fields

Your namespace Here you can enter your namespace. The namespace must be unique and consists ofthree characters. Entering your namespace is optional. However, it does help you to maintain thelayoutdefinitions on your clients' systems.

Type This displays the type of object (Printdef, Text, etc.).

Code This displays the code of the object.

Description This displays the description of the object.

Optional newCode

You can enter new code here. The system uses this code together with the namespace toautomatically create an 8-digit code.

If under Your namespace you entered the namespace "NCR" and if under Optionalnew Code you entered "5", the system creates the code "NCR00005". When you export this layoutdefinition/printdefinition and import it again (e.g. in a customersystem), the system imports the layoutdefinition/printdefinition with this new code. As partof the export, the system also adjusts the references in sub-reports.

Prepare groups, e.g. USR01000 - USR02000 for Marketing layouts. By doing so, youcan categorize the layouts easily and comfortably.


5. Choose Export.6. A new dialog box appears. Choose the location where you want to save the .xml file, enter a name for the

document and save it.7. The system then performs the export and displays the status of the export process in a protocol window.

The protocol window looks like this:

The system also recognizes and exports the following elements:Datasource QueriesCopy QueriesLanguage QueriesFormtypesParameters


Import6.5.2.2

With the Import function, you can import selected objects.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutmanagement. Choose Import.

Procedure1. Open Layoutmanagement and choose Import. A new dialog box appears. Navigate to an existing .xml file

and double-click on it.2. The following window appears. In this window you can define the settings for the three main types (Layout,

Printdef, Text).

Fields

Import Queriesto category

Choose Auto assign, to create the query categories according to the structure on theexport system.You can also choose a defined query category in which all query categories aresummarized (this is shown in the column Querycategories).

Set all actionsto:

If you want to set all objects to the same status, you can define it here. You can choosefrom the following options:

Overwrite - Only choose this option if you want to overwrite all existing layouts (i.e. thelayouts for which the checkbox Exists is active). In addition, make sure that the ExistingLayout name really matches the object that you are going to overwrite. Add new - This option adds the layouts as new layouts.Ignore - If you choose this option, the relevant object will not be imported.

Layouts This table displays the layouts that you import.


Code This is the code of the layout.

Description This is the description of the layout.

Querycategories The querycategory only appears if the system has to create it, i.e. if it does not yet existon the system (also see Import Queries to category above).

Existing Layoutname

This is the name of the existing layout.

Exists Checkbox active: The layout already exists.Checkbox inactive: The layout does not yet exist.

Action Here you can define the status for each layout if you do not want to import all layouts withthe same status. You can choose from the following options:

Overwrite - Only choose this option if you want to overwrite the existing layout (i.e. thelayout for which the checkbox Exists is active). In addition, make sure that the ExistingLayout name really matches the layout that you are going to overwrite. Add new - This option adds the layout as new layout.Ignore - If you choose this option, the relevant layout will not be imported.

Printdefinitions This table displays the printdefinitions that you import.

Code This is the code of the printdefinition.

Description This is the description of the printdefinition.

Existing Printdefname

This is the name of the existing printdefinition.

Exists Checkbox active: The printdefinition already exists.Checkbox inactive: The printdefinition does not yet exist.

Action Here you can define the status for each printdefinition if you do not want to import allprintdefinition with the same status. You can choose from the following options:

Overwrite - Only choose this option if you want to overwrite the existing printdefinition(i.e. the printdefinition for which the checkbox Exists is active). In addition, make surethat the Existing Printdef name really matches the printdefinition that you are going tooverwrite. Add new - This option adds the printdefinition as new printdefinition.Ignore - If you choose this option, the relevant printdefinition will not be imported.

Texts

If text alreadyexists

Here you can define what the system should do with text modules. Overwrite - Only choose this option if you want to overwrite all existing text modules. Add new - This option adds the text modules as new text modules.Ignore - If you choose this option, the text modules will not be imported.

3. Once you have defined the settings, choose Execute.4. The system then performs the import and displays the status of the export process in a protocol window.

If you select Add new, any references within the import package will automatically be adjusted.


Reinstall6.5.2.3

With the Reinstall function, you can reinstall existing printdefinitions and layoutdefinitions that have a version (i.e. that are from a layout package). If you have changed printdefinitions and layoutdefinitions you can resetthem to the original status by reinstalling them. When you do a reinstall, the printdefinitions and layoutdefinitions are re-imported from the file system into thedatabase.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutmanagement. Select the relevant object,choose Reinstall and then Execute.

Procedure1. Open Layoutmanagement. 2. In the browser area (see Layoutmanagement), select the object you want to reinstall and choose Reinstall.3. Once you have selected all relevant objects, choose Execute.4. The system then performs the reinstallation and displays the status of the reinstallation process in a

protocol window.

Do not perform a reinstallation if you have, for example, amended the layout Marketing DIN (T0000008)and are using it, because your version of the layout will be overwritten.In this case, we recommend you duplicate the layout first and then update the original layout using the Reinstall function.

Activate / Deactivate6.5.2.4

With this option you can deactivate active objects (Formtypes, Layouts, Printdefinitions) or activate inactiveobjects.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutmanagement. Select the relevant object,choose Deactivate or Activate and then Execute.

Procedure1. Open Layoutmanagement. 2. In the browser area (see Layoutmanagement), select the relevant object and choose Activate or

Deactivate. 3. Once you have selected all relevant objects, choose Execute. 4. The system then performs the activation/deactivation and displays the status of the activation/deactivation

process in a protocol window.


6.5.3 Layoutdefinition

In the Layoutdefinition you can define all information related to the layout. To be able to print a report from SAP, often a printdefinition is needed too. Printdefinitions are treated in thenext chapter.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition

Window

Fields

Name Enter a name for the layoutdefinition.

Category Choose a category for the layoutdefinition. You can choose from the following options:BAN - BankingBUP - Business PartnerCSM - coresuite timeDOC - DocumentEMP - EmployeeFIN - FinancialGEN - GeneralITM - ItemMRP - MRPOPR - OpportunityPRD - ProductionPUR - Purchase ReportsSAR - Sales ReportsSRV - ServiceSTO - StockUSR - User

DesignFormtype

Here you can select from pre-defined formtypes. coresuite designer provides the formtypesfor the most important SAP Business One forms.


Example: The DIN layout can be started from various forms. If you want to start thelayout directly from the layoutdefinition (with Preview or Open Designer), you must definethe formtype.

Type Define the type of your layout. Unless you choose the Master Layout, the type has noimpact on the layout.You can choose from the following options:

Empty - Choose this option if, for example, you want to choose a label printer directlyusing the control flag. The difference to the other option is that no template is attached.Master Layout - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of thetype Master Layout. With Master Layouts you can, for example, use the same headerand footer in several documents.

Try to avoid using Master Layouts as they greatly reduce layout flexibility.Document - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of the typeDocument.Data - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of the type Data.Other - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of the type Other.Select Grid - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of the typeSelect Grid.External Report - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of thetype External Report. External Reports are, for example, Crystal Reports, Excel, etc.User Query - Choose this option if you want to search for layoutdefinitions of the typeUser Query.

Version This indicates the version of the layoutdefinition.

Code This indicates the code of the layoutdefinition.

Datasource Several design formtypes are available for various data sources. You only have to decidewhich of them matches your report. Of course, you can also create your own datasources.

Format Choose the format (date format, decimal separator, etc.) for your layout. You can choosefrom the following options:

Default - The system uses the regional settings of the local PCSAP Business One - The system uses the settings in SAP Business One (Modules >Administration > System Initialization > General Settings > Display)Dynamic/country codes - The system uses the CultureInfo classes.

Status Choose the status for your layoutdefinition. You can choose from the following options:Active - the layoutdefinition appears in the menu.Inactive - the layoutdefinition does not appear in the menu.Reinstall - reinstalls the layoutdefinition. For the new layoutdefinition to become active,you must restart coresuite.

We recommend doing the reinstall in the Layoutmanagement (see Install).


Queries6.5.3.1

On the tab Queries you can define datasources that you want to use in coresuite designer.You can also define a second query and link it to the first one. This creates a hierarchy in the Data Viewer.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > Queries

Window

Fields

Query 1 Here you can select the relevant data source from the drop-down list.If you cannot find the data source you need, you can create a query in the SAP QueryManager (SAP Menu > Tools > Queries > Query Manager).

Example: You would like to see the employee information (name, phone number,etc.). Select the relevant query from the drop-down list.

Query 2 If you would like to enter a sub-query, select it from the drop-down list in this column.

Example: You would like to see the most recent orders of each employee. Select therelevant query from the drop-down list.

Link Field 1 Link Field 1 relates to Query 1 and indicates the foreign key from this table.

Example (see Query 1): The foreign key for the Employee Master Data (table: OHEM)is "empID".You can enter several keys. If you do so, separate them by semi-colon.

Link Field 2 Link Field 1 relates to Query 1 and indicates the foreign key from this table.

Example (see Query 2): In the orders (table: ORDR), the foreign key for the relevantemployee from Query 1 is "OwnerCode".You can enter several keys. If you do so, separate them by semi-colon.

My FormType Define the formtype. The formtype must be unique. You can only edit this column if you


have defined the Type as Select Grid.

Title Enter the title for the Select Grid. You can only edit this column if you have defined theType as Select Grid.


Parameters6.5.3.2

On the tab Parameters you can define the parameters for coresuite designer.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > Parameters

Window

Field

Get fromDatasource

Choose Get from Datasource to get the parameters that are available for your report. Thisfunction searches all queries and datasources for parameters (format: [%YZE]) andindicates them if they exist. If the function finds a parameter that does not yet exist, youcan create the parameter by right-clicking on Functions and choosing Open Parameters.

Parameter Select the relevant parameter from the drop-down list.

Description Enter a description for the parameter. This is the description that is displayed when a useropens the report. You can enter:

Free textPlaceholders (see Text List), in square brackets

Design ParamValue

Here you can enter a default value for designing purposes. You can enter the followingformats:

Drop-down list - a list with two columns in square brackets or a query in squarebrackets that returns a list

[1;Option 1;2;Option 2;3;Option 3]CFL - a list with two columns in curly brackets or a query in curly brackets that returnsa list

{SELECT CardCode,CardName FROM OCRD ORDER BY [%ordercolumn] [%order]}Default values - Text, number or SQL query that returns a value.

Parameter Mode Define the mode for the parameter. You can choose from the following options:Default - Default setting (parameter appears but is already filled in)


Always use design value - deprecated; please no longer use this optionNo prompt if already filled - If a parameter is defined for an active form (e.g. if you arealready on the Business Partner Master Data form), the ID is provided as parameter andis no longer required.

Input order If you define several parameters, you can define the order in which you want to displaythem. The order is alphanumeric.

For each parameter that you want to be displayed on the parameter form, you mustenter a value here.

History Checkbox active: The system saves the parameters in a cache and suggests themagain.Checkbox inactive: The system does not save the parameters and does not suggestthem again.


Details6.5.3.3

On the tab Details you can add information and notes.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > Details

Window

ProcedureEnter the relevant information in the field and choose Update.


Printer6.5.3.4

With coresuite designer you can define extensive printer settings. For each layout, you can define the printerand printer tray to be used.

For example: For an invoice you can define that pages 1 and 2 are printed on printer A with paper fromtray 1, while the last sheet is a pay-in slip that should be printed on printer B with paper from tray 4.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > Printer

Window

Fields

User Select the user for whom the definition applies.

Copy Enter, where the copy should be printed.

The number of copies is defined in the Printdefinition (Printdefinition > Document >Copies).

Example: You want to print two copies. The first copy should be printed on printer Aand the second copy should be printed on printer B. To do so, add two rows: In the first row, you enter the value "0" in the column Copy (i.e. copy 1) and the value "A"in the column Printer.In the second row, you enter the value "1" in the column Copy (i.e. copy 2) and the value"B" in the column Printer.

Page Define which copies you want to print on which printer. You can choose from the followingoptions:

All other - Choose this option to print all/all remaining pages on the selected printer.First Page - Choose this option to print the first page on the selected printer.Last Page - Choose this option to print the last page on the selected printer.

FormType Select the formtype from the drop-down list. This is necessary, because the same layout


can be used for several formtypes.

Example: The layout for an invoice, an offer or an order is the same.

Free Text Here you can enter free text that you have defined in the Printdefinition (Modules > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > Document > Free Text).

Example: You want to use the same layout for two print jobs: an offer and aproduction list. In the printdefinition, you have defined the free text "Prod list". Re-enter"Prod list" in the column Free Text here in the Layoutdefinition to instruct coresuitedesigner to use the layout that you have defined for the production list.

The free text needs to be written in the exact same way as in the printdefinition.

Lang Select the language that should be displayed in the layout. This can also have an impact on the format (date/decimal separator) if in the Layoutdefinition under Format you have chosen the option "Country".

Choose Checkbox active: Before printing, the system displays a window where you can amendthe number of copies or change the printer.Checkbox inactive: The document will be printed directly, the system does not displayan additional window before printing.

Printer In this field you can enter a server path to a network printer. You can also select a printerfrom the drop-down list in the next column.

P If you have not entered a server path to a network printer in the column Printer, select theprinter from the drop-down list.

Tray This field displays the printer tray that you can choose in the next column.

P Select the relevant printer tray from the drop-down list.

Back sideLayout

Select the layoutdefinition from the drop-down list that you want to use to print the backside of the document.

This function is not supported for external reports.


Users6.5.3.5

On the tab Users you can define which users are authorized to use the layout. With this function, you canrestrict data, e.g. a financial report, to certain people.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > Users

Window

Fields

Enable only forfollowing Users

Checkbox active: Only the users defined under Users can access the layoutdefinition.Checkbox inactive: The system ignores any settings under Users.

Authorisation This button opens the SAP window Authorizations. There you can define theauthorizations for coresuite designer datasources for each user (in the windowAuthorizations go to coresuite designer > Datasources > choose the layout category >choose the name of the authorization).This button is only active if in the header area of the Layoutdefinition you choose a Datasource for which you can define authorizations.If the button is active, you can see which users have which authorizations and you canchange them, if necessary.

User Select the relevant user from the drop-down list whom you want to grant access to thelayoutdefinition. It is possible to select several users.

If a user tries to access a layoutdefinition for which he has not authorization, the system displays anerror message.


External Report6.5.3.6

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > External Report

Window

Fields

Data Export Options:

Data ExportFormat

Define the format for the data export. You can choose from the following options:

No Export - No data is exported and no files are saved in the cache.

Opening an application from the menu or from am form.Excel / Word - Generates a dataSchema and a data file (.xml files), which are saved inthe cache.

Displaying a report in Excel (see Example 1 below)CSV File(s) - Generates a .csv file per query. The files are saved in the cache.

Word serial letterCrystal Reports - Generates a dataSchema file (.xml file), which is saved in the cache.

Displaying a report in Crystal ReportsXcelsius XML - Generates a data file (.xml file), which is saved in the cache.

Creating a dynamic dashboardSimple Xcelsius XML - Generates a data file (.xml file), which is saved in the cache (seeExample 2 below).

Creating a simple dynamic dashboard that works independently of the name of thequery

DataSet XML - Generates data file only (.xml file).


General applications that use the data-file only.DataSet Schema - Generates dataSchema file only (.xml file).

Applications that use the DataSchema file only.

ConnectionType

This option is available only if under Data Export Format you have chosen the optionCrystal Reports.Choose from which Database the report gets the data:

From File - Uses the connection that is indicated in the file (e.g. when data from severaldatabases should be displayed).Current Company - Uses the current SAP Business One company database (defaultsetting).

Optionally export

Company/User Activate this checkbox if you want to export system information on the current company/user (OADP, OADM and OUSR tables).

Parameter Activate this checkbox if you want to export the parameters that are defined for the currentlayoutdefinition.

Text Activate this checkbox if you want to export all texts from the table SWA_LD_Text in thecurrent language.

Refresh[seconds]

Define the interval (in seconds), in which the data files should be refreshed.

Generate DataOnly (Do notlaunch Preview)

Activate this checkbox if you want to create the data file only, i.e. without creating apreview.

File Options:

File Path Enter the path to the file that should be opened when you choose Preview.

File Id Shows the name of the folder in the explorer. This is the main folder that contains all filesfor the current layoutdefinition.

Open inExplorer

Opens the folder that contains the file.

Use Design File Enter the path to the file that should be opened when you choose Open Designer.Checkbox active: The file will be used.Checkbox inactive: The file will not be used.

Deployment options:

Save in DB The file that opens when you choose Preview is saved in the database/the database isupdated. This enables the import and export of the layoutdefinition to/from otherdatabases.

Remove fromDB

The file that opens when you choose Preview is exported from the database and isremoved from the database. The file is then saved in the explorer and will be openeddirectly from there.

Deploy File fromDatabase

Checkbox active: The file that opens when you choose Preview is started from thedatabase.Checkbox inactive: The file that opens when you choose Preview is opened from theExplorer.

In some cases it is useful to use both a Preview file and a Design file, in other cases it is useful to just have aPreview file. The following examples illustrate the difference:

Simple Excel export:You want to export data to Excel.To do this, you only need a Preview file. This file is also used when you choose Open Designer.


Xcelsius Dashboard:To display and edit Xcelsius files, you need both a Preview file and a Design file.The Design file is the .xlf file that Xcelsius start, when you choose Open Designer.The Preview file is a flash file that Xcelsius exports and which is also used when you choose Preview.

If you need only one file, use the Preview file, because this is multi-user enabled.

All External Report files are saved in the Extension Folder. You can define the path here: Modules >Administration > System Initialization > General Settings > Path > Extension Folder.If you do not define a path in the Extension Folder, the files will be saved in the add-on in the structure SWA_LD.


Example 1 - Create report in Excel1. Open the layoutdefinition and search for "Campaign". Select the layoutdefinition "Business Partner

Campaign - Select Grid" and duplicate it. 2. Change the name of the layoutdefinition to "Display addresses in Excel (form letter)". 3. Choose Update. 4. Go to the tab Queries and delete the entries under My FormType and Title and choose Update. 5. Change the Type to External Report and choose Update. 6. Go back to the tab External Report. 7. Enter the following data:

Data ExportFormat

Excel / Word

Parameter Activate this checkbox.

Choose Update.

File Path Select the template Template Excel2007WithoutMacro.

File Id This ID appears automatically after you have defined the file path to the template.

8. Choose Open Designer. 9. The window Parameter: Display addresses in Excel appears. This window displays all parameters that are

listed on the tab Parameters in the layoutdefinition. If do not want to display a certain parameter, set the Design Param Value for this parameter to "01" and delete the value under Input Order.

10. Choose OK. The report will now be opened in Excel.11. In the Excel file, go to Source and Choose XML Maps. Choose Add and enter the path to the File Id (see

above). Select the dataSchema file and choose OK. 12. The parameters now appear in the Excel file on the right hand side under XML Source. 13. Now you can drag and drop the relevant parameters from XML Source into the Excel worksheet. For our

example, drag the parameter CardCode into the worksheet. Next, drag the folder BPSelectGrid into theworksheet. Right-click on this entry and choose Import. Select the data file. The data now appears in theExcel worksheet.

14. Save the Excel report in the relevant location or close it without saving your changes.

Opening the report directly from the menuYou can also open the Excel report directly from the menu. To do so, go to the tab Menu and enter the menupoint from where you want to open the report.


Example 2 - Creating a simple dynamic dashboard that works independently of the name of thequery1. Open the layoutdefinition and search for "Sample". Select the layoutdefinition "Sample Column Chart-Stock

(GEN70002)" (also see Sample Column Chart - Stock (GEN70002)) and duplicate it. 2. Change the name of the layoutdefinition to "Chart-Stock on order". 3. Choose Update. 4. Open the Query Manager, go to category SWA_LD-SYS-STO and select the entry

COR_COL_Top12ItemsOnHand.5. Click on the pen to the right of the query, right-click the query and choose coresuite Script Editor to edit it.6. Replace all occurrences of "Is Committed" with "On Order" and all occurrences of "IsCommitted" with

"OnOrder" in the query. Choose OK and save the query with the name "MyStockQuery" in the categorySWA_LD-SYS-STO.

7. Go back to the layoutdefinition and set the Refresh interval to 20 seconds.8. Choose Preview. The dashboard appears.9. When you now change the quantity on a purchase order, this change will appear on the dashboard within

20 seconds.


Templates6.5.3.6.1

The following templates are installed with coresuite:

File Description

Excel2007WithInitMacro

Excel 2007 file with initialization macro that automatically connects to the Xml (DeveloperTools Tab in Excel).

Excel2007WithoutMacro

Empty Excel 2007 file.

Word2007MailMerge

Example for form letter using macros. Use the macro "AddDataSource" to update thefield list.

XcelsiusDashboard

Empty Xcelsius xlf file.

EmptyReport_Landscape

Empty Crystal Reports rpt file in landscape format.

EmptyReport_Portait

Empty Crystal Reports rpt file in portrait format.

Ensure that the macro security settings are set to low.

When you press the Enter key when you open Office documents, the macros are not executed.


Menu6.5.3.7

On the tab Menu you can define new menus/menu points.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > Menu

Window

Fields

User area You can edit anything in this area.

Parent Select the relevant parent from the drop-down list. The parent is an existing SAP BusinessOne menu point.

Example: If you want that the element appears in the menu point Bank ing, select theentry "Banking" from the drop-down list.

Description Enter the description for the new menu point. You can also use placeholders, i.e. dynamictext codes that will be displayed in the language of the active system (see Text List). Ifyou do not enter a description, the system displays the menu point with the Name.

Pos If you assign several layouts to a parent, you can define the order for the layouts here.

Function Optional: The parameter [%MenuFunction] will be filled with the value set in this columnwhenever you open the report from this menu entry. You can use this parameter [%MenuFunction] anywhere, for example to set different filters.


System area This area is managed by the system. You can edit the Parent, Description and Position ofthe menu entry, but you cannot delete or add rows. We recommend you do not changethe data in this area, if possible.

Id Displays the unique ID. You cannot edit this.

Parent Displays the parent.

Description Displays the description of the new menu point.

Pos Displays the order for the layouts.

Function Indicates the value of the parameter [%MenuFunction]. You cannot edit this.

Choose Update Menu to update the entire menu structure.


6.5.4 Printdefinition

In the Printdefinition is the connection between one or more layoutdefinitions and one formtype.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition

Window

Fields

Name Enter the name of the printdefinition.

FormType Select the formtype from the drop-down list, to which you want to assign layoutdefinitions.

Language Select the language for the printdefinition from the drop-down list. You can override thislanguage for each layout (also see Documents > Language).

Shortcut Here you can define a shortcut for the printdefinition. You can choose from the followingoptions:

No KeyCtrlAlt

This key is useful if you have assigned several printdefinitions to a formtype. Usually, after

you choose (Preview) from the formtype, the system displays the list of availableprintdefinitions for this formtype. If you use printdefinition "A" more often than printdefinition"B", you can assign a key to printdefinition "A", e.g. "Ctrl". In this case, you can use the

combination + Ctrl on the formtype. By doing so, you can skip the selection ofprintdefinitions, and the system uses printdefinition "A".

Checkboxes Here you can choose when the printdefinition should be opened. The printdefinition will be


opened when you choose in the tool bar. You can choose from the following options: Print after SavePrintEmailFaxPDFMS WordMS Excel

Status Choose the status for your printdefinition. You can choose from the following options:Active - the layoutdefinition appears in the menu.Inactive - the layoutdefinition does not appear in the menu.Reinstall - reinstalls the layoutdefinition. For the new layoutdefinition to become active,you must restart coresuite.

We recommend doing the reinstall in the Layoutmanagement (see Install).

You can also open the printdefinitions from the relevant form by choosing (Layoutdesigner).

You can duplicate printdefinitions using the context menu. To do so, right-click on the printdefinition andchoose Duplicate.


Documents6.5.4.1

On the tab Documents, you can define layouts and the corresponding definitions.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > Documents

Window

Fields

Layout Select the layout from the drop-down list for the printdefinition. If you want to print severalreports, also with different layoutdefinitions, while running a printdefinition, you can do thisby adding a new row.

Copies Enter how many copies you want to print.

Copies M. M. stands for mass printing (which is the same as batch printing). As opposed to normalprinting, you can define a different number for copies for scheduled printing jobs (SAPDocument Printing) and batch printing jobs (coresuite select grid).

Free Text In this column you can enter free text which can be used as a parameter in theLayoutdefinition (Layoutdefinition > Printer > Free Text).

Export FileName

Enter a file name for the document. This file name is used if you export the document inPDF format (see Printdefinition > Checkboxes).

Language Choose the language in which the layout should be printed. This setting overrides thesetting in the header area of the printdefinition under Language.

Example: You want to print a delivery note and a production order (2 different layouts).You want to print the delivery note in the language of the customer and the productionorder in the language of the team. Define the relevant language for each layout.

Printjob Option Here you can define settings if you are printing documents that need to be stapled or


folded. You can choose from the following options:

Standard - see belowGroup 1 - see belowGroup 2 - see belowGroup 3 - see below1 Job per Copy - With this option, each job is treated separately.Driver Copy - Choose this option if you print large volumes of the same document (thisprevents the system from crashing).

If you choose the same option for two print jobs (e.g. Group 2 for both print jobs), the printjobs are processed as one job, e.g. everything will be stapled together.If you choose two different options for both jobs (e.g. Group 1 for the first print job andGroup 2 for the second print job), the two jobs are processed separately.


Extended Definition6.5.4.2

On the tab Extended Definition you can define extended definitions for the printdefinition.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > Extended Definition

Window

Fields

Matrix Id Enter the description of the grid/matrix that should be taken into account.

ParameterExpression

If you want to print a layout from a certain tab, you can enter the relevant SQL query here.

Example: You want the printdefinition to be active only if the user is on the SalesOrder on the tab Logistics. In this case you would enter the following query: '[%logistic]' ='Y'

Open Word/Excel/PDF

Checkbox active: The document will be opened in the relevant Microsoft program.Checkbox inactive: The document will be opened in SAP.

Name Id Here you can define a unique ID for the current printdefinition. You can then use this ID incustomize rules, for example.

MultilanguageName

If you want to display the name of the printdefinition in the current system language, justenter the relevant text code in this field.

Example: You have defined two printdefinitions for the Sales Order. When you openthe Sales Order and choose the icon Preview from the menu bar, a select grid appears inwhich the two printdefinitions are listed. Using the field Multilanguage Name you candisplay the names in this list in the current system language. To do so, just enter therelevant text code, e.g. [@T0000009].


For more information about text codes, refer to Text List.


Email/Fax6.5.4.3

On the tab Email/Fax you can define if coresuite designer should generate e-mail or fax messages.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > Email/Fax

Window

Fields

File Type Choose which format should be used for attachments. You can choose from the followingoptions:

PDFRTFTIFGIFEMFJPGBMPXLS

Send Mode Choose the mode for sending messages. You can choose from the following options:0 - Standard - This option prioritizes Outlook.1 - SAP Prompt - This option uses the SAP Business One Mailer Service and displaysa preview of the e-mail before it is sent.2 - SAP direct - This option uses the SAP Business One Mailer Service withoutshowing a preview of the e-mail first.3 - Smtp Prompt - This option sends the e-mail via the configured Smtp service (seeEmail(Smtp)) and displays a preview of the e-mail before it is sent.4 - Smtp direct - This option sends the e-mail via the configured Smtp service (see


Email(Smtp)) without displaying a preview of the e-mail first.5 - MAPI Prompt - This option uses the Windows default client and displays a previewof the e-mail before it is sent.6 - MAPI direct - This option uses the Windows default client without displaying apreview of the e-mail first.7 - SAP Fax - This option is available, but does not yet work, because SAP BusinessOne is not yet compatible.

Res. Res. stands for resolution and indicates the resolution for the attachment. Enter theresolution in dpi (dots per inch).

Quality Here you can define the print quality for embedded pictures. Enter the print quality inpercent.During the export, all pictures are converted to the JPEG format (even if they were in PNGor TIFF format).

Exportpath Enter the export path. If you do not enter an export path, the system saves the exportedfiles under tempfolder\swald\dbname\export.

To Address Enter the e-mail address(es) of the recipient(s). You can enter the e-mail address as follows:

e-mail address (if you enter several e-mail addresses, separate them by semi-colon)query

CC If you want to send a carbon copy of the email, enter the e-mail address(es) of therecipient(s) here.You can enter the e-mail address as follows:


BCC If you want to send a blind copy of the email, enter the e-mail address(es) of the recipient(s) here.You can enter the e-mail address as follows:


Subject Enter the subject for the e-mail. You can enter the subject as follows:

placeholderqueryfree textcombination of the above

Email Text Enter the body text for the e-mail.

Html(Mode 0,3,4) Activate this checkbox if you want that the e-mail can also be displayed in HTML format.The HTML format can only be used if under Send Mode you chose the option 0 - Default, 3- Smtp Prompt or 4 - Smtp direct.

From Address Enter the sender of the e-mail.You can enter the sender as follows:

namee-mail address (if you enter several e-mail addresses, separate them by semi-colon)

Prio (1,2,3) Here you can define the priority, with which the e-mail is sent. You can choose from thefollowing options:1 = high priority2 = medium priority3 = low priority


BP6.5.4.4

deprecated - please no longer use this

We recommend you manage the user authorizations using copy queries (Printdefinition > Documents >Copies/Copies M.).


6.5.5 Functions menu

This chapter describes the most important options that are available in the Functions menu.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > right-click on FunctionsorModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > right-click on Functions

Open Data Viewer6.5.5.1

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenData Viewer

GoalWith this option you can verify if your query / the link between the queries works.The tooltip shows you additional information, e.g. the number of rows.


Open Querygenerator6.5.5.2

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenQuerygeneratororModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenQuerygenerator

The window Query Generator appears.

Window

For more information about the Query Generator please refer to the official SAP Business One documentation.


Open Querymanager6.5.5.3

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenQuerymanagerorModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenQuerymanager

The window Query Manager appears.

Window

For more information about the Query Manager please refer to the official SAP Business One documentation.


Open Texts6.5.5.4

With this option you can add text modules or amend existing text modules.For each text modules you can define the relevant translations (see Translate).

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenTextsorModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenTextsorgo to Tools > Default Forms > SWA_LD_TEXT - Text.

The window Text appears. In this window, the standard language is displayed (i.e. the language that youdefined in the Configuration under Text).

Window

Fields

Code Code of the text module. Do not enter anything here; this code is assigned automaticallywhen you save the text module.

Text Text of the text module.


ProcedureAdd new text modulesEnter the relevant text in the column Text and choose Update. The system then automatically assigns this textmodule a code.

Edit existing text modulesYou can edit the text in coresuite Script Editor. To open coresuite Script Editor, right-click the relevant entryand choose coresuite Script Editor from the context menu. For more information, please refer to coresuiteScript Editor.

Translate text modulesPlease refer to the chapter Translate.


Translate6.5.5.4.1

With this option you can translate text modules. The translations are then loaded dynamically into the relevantlayout using the assigned code. This function enables you to manage multi-lingual documents easily andcomfortably.

You are using an invoice in 10 different languages. Now you want to amend the layout and amend someof the text. Since the layout is managed independently of the text, you only need to change it once - itthen applies to all languages. The text modules are managed centrally. This means, you only need tochange the text modules in one place and you do not need to amend 10 individual layouts.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenTextsorModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenTextsorgo to Tools > Default Forms > SWA_LD_TEXT - Text.

In the window Text, right-click on the entry you want to translate and choose Translate. The windowTranslations appears.

Window

For more information about the Translations window please refer to the official SAP Business Onedocumentation.

Procedure1. Enter the relevant language in the column Language. 2. Enter the translation in the column Translation. 3. Choose Update.


coresuite editors6.5.5.4.2

When you use coresuite, you can use various editors in SAP Business One text fields.To do so, the coresuite designer module must be installed and active.

If you copy text from an editor, you must leave the editor open until you paste the text. If you close theeditor before pasting the text, the copied text is no longer available.

coresuite Editor6.5.5.4.2.1

With this editor, you can color text, display it as bold, in italics, underlined, etc..

Use this editor for remarks on marketing documents, for example (e.g. on the delivery).

This editor corrupts special characters: e.g. ">" becomes ">". Do not use this editor for code or queries.

By default, all users have access to the coresuite Editor. To change this setting, go to Modules >Administration > System Initialization > Authorizations > General Authorizations > User Authorization >coresuite designer > coresuite Editor).

coresuite Script Editor6.5.5.4.2.2

This is the editor for simple code sequences. Use this editor for code and queries.By default, only superusers have access to the coresuite Script Editor. You can change this setting under Modules > Administration > System Initialization > Authorizations > General Authorizations > UserAuthorization > coresuite designer > coresuite Script Editor).


Open Parameters6.5.5.5

With this option you can create parameters and link them to the relevant formtype.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenParametersorModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenParameters

The window Parameters appears.

Window

Fields

Code Code of the parameter. Do not enter anything here; this code is assignedautomatically when you save the parameter.

Key (In Queries) Indicate with which key the parameter has been used in the query.

If you use the parameter "empID" in a query, you must use it in the followingform: [%empID]

For alphanumeric keys, the parameter must be written with inverted commas inthe query, e.g.: '[%empID]'

Type of Parameter Select the type of the parameter from the drop-down list. You can choose thefollowing options:

NumericAlphanumericDate

Item Id Enter the ID of the field that you want to you use as parameter. In the menu bar,choose View > System Information. If you now move the mouse over the field that youwant to use as parameter, the ID of the field appears in the status bar.

Example: You want to find out the ID of the field Employee No. in the Employee


Mater Data. To do so, open the Employee Master Data (Modules > Human Resources> Employee Master Data) and move the mouse over the field Employee No. Thestatus bar at the bottom of the screen displays the following information:

You can see that the ID of the field Employee No. is "33".

Matrix Id Define the matrix to be taken into account.

Use Rownumber deprecated - please no longer use this

Open Array Select the relevant row and choose Open Array. This opens a new window where youcan link the parameter to a formtype. To do so, just select the relevant formtype from the drop-down list and choose Updateand then OK.


Open Formtypes6.5.5.6

With this option you can define a formtype if it is not yet available in the printdefinition.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Layoutdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenFormtypesorModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > right-click on Functions > OpenFormtypes

The window Form Types appears.

Window

Fields

Code Code of the formtype. Do not enter anything here; this code is assigned automaticallywhen you save the formtype.

Formtype Enter the ID of the formtype. You can find the formtype using the System Information. Inthe menu bar, choose View > System Information. If you now move the mouse over therelevant object, the ID of the formtype appears in the status bar (Form=XY).

Name Enter the name of the formtype.

Object Id Enter the object ID on the form. You can find the object ID using the System Information(ID=XY).

Replace This is needed for forms that have the same structure, e.g. for Sales Quotations (OQUT),Sales Orders (ORDR) and Deliveries (ODLN). The tables behind these forms have thesame structure, so there is no point in writing individual queries for all of them.

With The expression in this column replaces the expression in the column Replace.

Example: A query like "SELECT CardCode FROM O@@RDR" works on the SalesQuotation, the Sales Order and the Delivery, because "@@RDR" will be replaced by"QUT", "RDR" and "DLN" respectively.

Category Assign the formtype to the relevant category.


6.5.6 Reportwizard

The Reportwizard helps you create a layoutdefinition.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Reportwizard

1 - Which Category should be used?

Fields

Category Select a category for the layoutdefinition from the drop-down list. You can choose from thefollowing options:

BAN - BankingBUP - BusinessPartnerCSM - coresuite timeDOC - DocumentEMP - EmployeeFIN - FinancialGEN - GeneralITM - ItemMRP - MRPOPR - OpportunityPRD - ProductionPUR - Purchase ReportsSAR - Sales ReportsSRV - ServiceSTO - StockUSR - User

This category will appear in the Layoutdefinition under Category.


2 - Which Datasource should be used?

Field

User Datasource Enter a search term in the yellow field and then press the Tab key. They system displaysa ChooseFrom list from which you can select the relevant datasource.This entry will appear in the Layoutdefinition under Queries.You can also leave this field empty and choose Next.


3 - How would you like to use the report?

Fields

Layout Name Enter the name for the Layoutdefinition.This entry will appear in the Layoutdefinition under Name.

Start Reportfrom Menu

Choose this option if you want that the report can be started from the menu.

Start Reportfrom Form

Choose this option if you want that the report can be started from the relevant form.


4a - Where in the menu should the report be placed (Use System Information and the Modules menuto retrieve the ID)?

Fields

Menuposition Select the menu point from the drop-down list, under which the report should appear.This entry will appear in the Layoutdefinition under Menu > Parent.

MenuDescription

Enter the description that should appear for the report.This entry will appear in the Layoutdefinition under Menu > Description.

This window appears if you chose the option Start Report from Menu in the previous step.


4b - For which form this layout should be valid? Select an existing form or define a new one.

Fields

Use existingFormtype

Select the formtype from the drop-down list from which the report can be started or select Define New, to define a new formtype.Here you can create a new formtype (instead of right-click on Function on theLayoutdefinition or Printdefinition).This entry will appear in the Layoutdefinition under Design Formtype.

New FormtypeID

Enter the ID of the new formtype.This entry will appear in the Printdefinition under FormType.

Description Enter the description for the new formtype.This entry will appear in the Printdefinition under FormType.

This window appears if you chose the option Start Report from Form in the previous step.


5 - Parameterdefinition first step

Fields

SystemDatasource

Select the relevant system datasource from the drop-down list.The options available in the drop-down list change depending on the category that youchose at the beginning.

Extracted Key In this column, the system displays the available parameters and queries.You can change these entries.

Map to this Key If you enter a key here, this overwrites the query.

Parameter Type In this column, the parameter type appears. There are three types:A (Alphanumeric)D (Date)N (Numeric)

You can change these entries.


6 - Parameterdefinition last Step

Fields

Key In this column, the key of the parameter appears.This entry will appear in the Layoutdefinition under Parameters > Parameter.

Description Here you can enter a description for the parameter. This entry will appear in the Layoutdefinition under Parameters > Description.

Value Here you can enter an example value.This value will then appear in the Layoutdefinition under Parameters > Design ParamValue.

Type Here the type of the parameter appears. There are three types:A (Alphanumeric)D (Date)N (Numeric)

This value will appear in the Layoutdefinition under Parameters > Parameter Mode.

Input Activate this checkbox if you want to define the input order. You can amend the input orderlater in the layoutdefinition under Parameters > Input order.

Choose Create. The system then displays the Layoutdefinition that you created with the Reportwizard. You canadd more information to the Layoutdefinition if needed.


6.5.7 Text List

The Text List offers an overview over the coresuite text modules. The content of this list is the same as in thelist that opens when you use Open Texts. However, it has the advantage that you can use Ctrl+F to search fortext.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Text List. The window Text List appears.

Window

Choose the orange arrow next to the relevant entry. The window Text appears. Here you can amend the text(also see Open Texts].


By right-clicking on an entry and choosing Translate, you can enter/amend the relevant entry (also seeTranslate).

When you upgrade coresuite designer, all text codes from T0009000 to T0009999 will be overwritten.These text codes can be found in the .xml file cor_txt_meta.xml.


6.5.8 Sample Queries

This report contains all queries that are available in the system. When a new query is added (e.g. as part of anupdate), the list will be updated automatically.

AccessModules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Sample Queries. The window Sample Queriesappears.

Window


6.6 coresuite designer reference guide

6.6.1 Practical example 1 - Creating a simple layout

ScenarioFor the same items, your customers use other catalog numbers than you do. You have saved the customers'catalog numbers in the Business Partner Catalog Numbers (Modules > Inventory > Item Management >Business Partner Catalog Numbers):

GoalYou want to create a dynamic report, which displays your catalog numbers on the left, and the customer'scatalog numbers on the right. The report should look like this:


ProcedureTo create this report, the following steps are necessary:1. Create printdefinition2. Create formtype3. Create parameter4. Create query5. Create layoutdefinition6. Format the layout


Create printdefinition6.6.1.1

In the first step, you have to create the printdefinition.

1. Open the Printdefinition (Menu Bar > Tools > Print > Select Design or go to Modules > Administration >Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition).

2. Create a new Printdefinition with the following data:

Name Catalog Numbers

FormType 993You first need to define this formtype. For instruction, please refer to Create formtype.


3. Choose Add.

4. Next you need to check if the print definition works. To do so, go to the tab Document and select theparameter GEN:Parameter Check from the drop-down list in the column Layout. In the column Copies youenter "1".

Later, you must replace this parameter with the new parameter BUP:Catalog Numbers (also see Createlayout definition, step 3).

5. Start the preview from the window Business Partner Catalog Numbers. The document that appears offersan overview over the parameters that are available:


Create formtype6.6.1.1.1

From the System Information (Menu Bar: View > System Information) you can see that the formtype of thewindow Business Partner Catalog Numbers is "993".In the field FormType in the printdefinition this formtype is not defined yet, which means you cannot select it inthe drop-down list. Therefore, you first need to create this formtype. To do so, proceed as follows:

1. In the Printdefinition, right-click on Functions and choose Open Formtypes.

2. Enter the following data in the window Form Types:

Formtype 993


Category Business Partner


3. Choose Update and OK.

You have now created the formtype and it is now available for selection in the FormType drop-down list.

Create parameter6.6.1.2

To display the data in the report, you must define a key. In our example, the key is the value Code in thewindow Business Partner Catalog Numbers. The ID of this field is CardCode (you can see this in the SystemInformation). Since this ID does not appear in the document, you must first create it.To do so, proceed as follows:

1. In the printdefinition or layoutdefinition, right-click on Functions and choose Open Parameters.

2. Create a parameter with the following data:

Key (In Queries) CardCode(you can see this in the System Information)

Type ofParameter

Alphanumeric

Item Id 10(you can see this in the System Information: Item=10)


3. Next, you must link the parameter to the formtype. To do so, right-click on the row header of the parameteryou just created. The window SWA_LD Param FormType - Definition [Code of the parameter] appears.Select the formtype Catalog Numbers from the drop-down list. Choose Update and OK in this window andthen in the window Parameter.

4. Check the new values by starting again the preview from the form Business Partner Catalog Numbers. Youcan see that now the parameter CardCode is there:


Create query6.6.1.3

In order for the data from the table in the window Business Partner Catalog Numbers to be displayed, you mustcreate a query. From the System Information you can see that the ID of this table is "OSCN". Use the QueryGenerator (Open Querygenerator) to create the following query (for more information on the Query Generatorplease refer to the official SAP Business One documentation):

SELECT T1.* FROM OSCN T1 WHERE T1.CardCode = '[%CardCode]'

Save this query in the category SWA_LD_Data with the name Catalog Number.

You must not use point in the name of the queries, since this will make the system crash.


Create layoutdefinition6.6.1.4

Next you must create a layoutdefinition.

1. Create a layoutdefinition with the following data:

Window header


Category BusinessPartner

Type Data

Tab Queries

Query 1 Select the query SWA_LD_Data:Catalog Numbers that you have just created from thedrop-down list.

Tab ParametersChoose Get from Datasource.

Parameter After you choose Get from Datasource, this field is filled automatically.

Description GP Code

Design ParamValue

Enter the example value "C70000" (this is the code of the business partner: seescreenshot at the start of the chapter).

Parameter Mode Default


2. Choose Add.

3. Now you have created the Layoutdefinition and you can use it in the Printdefinition. To do so, replace theparameter GEN:Parameter Check, which you have entered in the Printdefinition on the tab Documents inthe column Layout with the new parameter BUP:Catalog Numbers that you have just created.


Format the layout6.6.1.5

After creating the Layoutdefinition, choose Open Designer.Amend an existing layout or create a new one, that looks similar to the one below:

Next, you must link the values on the layout with the values from the system.

To do so, activate the relevant element and choose (Bindings). Go to the field Value and open the ScriptEditor.

Field Binding Path

1 CardCode CardCodeD [Description]

(Data Sources > LD > Par> CardCodeD)

2 CardCode CardCode [actual value]

(Data Sources > LD > Par> CardCode)

3 Our Reference Not necessary, as this is not a dynamicheader.

-

4 Your Reference Not necessary, as this is not a dynamicheader.

-

5 According to ourCatalog

Not necessary, as this is not a dynamicheader.

-

6 According to yourCatalog

Not necessary, as this is not a dynamicheader.

-

7 Our Item ItemCode (Bands > Catalog


[the tooltip shows that these are "our"catalog numbers, e.g. A00001]

Numbers > ItemCode)

8 Your Item Substitute[the tooltip shows that these are thecustomer's catalog numbers, e.g.abc0009]

(Bands > CatalogNumbers > Substitute)

Finished layout6.6.1.6


6.6.2 Practical example 2 - Multilingual document

ScenarioYour company runs a special offer in July and you want to let your customers know.

GoalOn the Sales Order you want to add additional text that promotes the special offer. You want this text toappear in the language of the relevant business partner.

The layout should something like this:


ProcedureTo add this special text, the following steps are necessary:1. Adjust printdefinition2. Create promotion text3. Create translations for the promotion text4. Adjust the layout using coresuite designer5. Check the layout

Adjust printdefinition6.6.2.1

1. Open a Sales Order (Modules > Sales A/R > Sales Order).

2. Choose to open the printdefinition. For the promotion text to automatically appear in the language ofthe business partner, you must make sure that in the printdefinition under Language you have chosen theoption "From Document". ("From Document" refers to the language that you have defined in the SalesOrder under Logistics > Language.)

Create promotion text6.6.2.2

1. Right-click on Functions and choose Open Texts. The window Text appears and displays the text modulesin the language that you have defined in the Configuration under Text.

2. Enter the promotion text in the column Text. If your language in the window Text is English(US), enter thepromotion text, e.g. "Special offer during July: get 50% off on all products".

You must enter the text in the main language. If in the Configuration under Text you defined "English(US)" as the main language and then enter German text, the system thinks that the text you haveentered is English. This can lead to inconsistencies in the layout.

3. Choose Update. The system then creates an 8-digit code. You will need this code later (see Adjust thelayout using coresuite designer, step 7). Make a note of it to find it more easily later.

Create translations for the promotion text6.6.2.3

1. Right-click on the text that you have just entered and choose Translate. The window Translations appears.

2. In the column Language select the language "German" and enter the German translation ("Bis Ende Juliprofitieren Sie von 50% Rabatt auf alle Produkte") in the column Translation.

3. Choose Add and OK.

4. In the window Text also choose OK.


Adjust the layout using coresuite designer6.6.2.4

1. Go back to the printdefinition, select the relevant layout on the tab Documents and choose Open Designer.

2. Let's say you want to display the promotion text in the header. Add a new header with a textbox.

3. Activate the header and go to Properties > Name. Under Text enter the text "Promotion", so you can easilyrecognize the databand.

4. Then activate the textbox in this header and go to Properties > Name. Under Text enter the text "PromotionText".

5. Activate the textbox "Promotion Text" and choose the icon (Bindings) on the right hand side.

6. Go to Value and open the Script Editor.

7. In the Script Editor choose Data Sources and go to LD > Txt. Select the code for the promotion text (seeCreate promotion text, step 3).

The tooltip displays the text; this makes it easier to select the correct code.

8. Double-click on the relevant code and choose OK to close the Script Editor.

9. Save your changes.

Check the layout6.6.2.5

1. Go back to the Sales Order and choose (Preview).

2. The promotion text now appears on the Sales Order.

3. If you start the preview from a Sales Order for which under Logistics > Language the language is "German",the promotion text appears in German.

4. If you start the preview from a Sales Order for which under Logistics > Language the language is "English(UK)", the promotion text appears in English.

If in the Sales Order you define the language "English (UK)" and if for the promotion text you define thelanguage "English", the English Sales Order will not display the promotion text in English. You mustensure that you always use the same language locale (e.g. "English (UK)"). This applies to alllanguages, not just English, of course.


6.6.3 Practical example 3 - Parameters

ScenarioAn employee of the company wants to see an overview over the open Sales Orders in the system.

GoalYou want to create a report that shows the open Sales Orders for a certain period of time and for certainbusiness partners and countries. You want to be able to open the report from the menu.

The window to enter the parameters should look something like this:

ProcedureTo create this report, the following steps are necessary:1. Create query (SQL syntax for parameters)

2. Create layoutdefinition3. Create parameters4. Adjust the order of parameters on the form5. Define standard values for the parameters


Create query6.6.3.1

1. Go to Menu > Tools > Queries > Query Generator. The window Query Generator opens. Choose Execute. The window Query Preview opens.

2. Choose to switch into editing mode.3. Enter the following SQL query:

SELECT *FROM RDR1 T0INNER JOIN ORDR T1 ON T0.DocEntry=T1.DocEntryLEFT OUTER JOIN OCRD T8 ON T1.CardCode = T8.CardCodeLEFT OUTER JOIN OCRY T11 ON T8.Country = T11.CodeWHERE T1.CANCELED = 'N' AND T1.DocStatus = 'O'AND CASE WHEN '[%FromDate]'='' THEN T1.[%DateType@=DocDate] ELSE '[%FromDate]' END <=T1.[%DateType@=DocDate]AND CASE WHEN '[%ToDate]'='' THEN T1.[%DateType@=DocDate] ELSE '[%ToDate]' END >= T1.[%DateType@=DocDate]AND (T1.CardCode IN ('[%CardCode]') OR '[%CardCode]' = '') AND (T11.Code = '[%CardCountry@=]' OR '' = '[%CardCountry@=]')

Choose Save and save the query with the name ORDR_SalesOrders in the category SWA_LD_Data.

General InformationFor the parameters to work, you must use a special syntax:

'[%ParamName]' or '[%ParamName@=DefValue]'

You must use the square brackets and the percentage sign, otherwise the query will not recognize theparameters.

As of coresuite country package version 2.90 it is possible to use standard values for parameters in theSQL datasource. This enables you to use datasources without having to define all parameters in thelayoutdefinition.

In our example there are 5 parameters. Below you can find more information on the parameters with specialsettings.

Optional filters: Business PartnerIf the user does not select a business partner, all business partners will be displayed in the report.

...AND (T1.CardCode IN ('[%CardCode]') OR '[%CardCode]' = '') ...

DataType with standard valueIf the parameter DateType is not defined in the layoutdefinition, DocDate will be used as the standard value.

...

... T1.[%DateType@=DocDate] ...

...


Optional filter: Country with empty standard valueIf the parameter CardCountry is not defined in the layoutdefinition, an empty value will be used as the standardvalue. This means that all countries will be displayed in the report.

...AND (T11.Code = '[%CardCountry@=]' OR '' = '[%CardCountry@=]')

Create layoutdefinition6.6.3.2

Now you need to create a layoutdefinition.

1. Create a layoutdefinition with the following data:

Name Sales Orders

Category Sales Reports

Type User Query

Tab Queries

Query 1 Select the query SWA_LD_Data:ORDR_SalesOrders that you have just created from thedrop-down list.

Tab DetailsEnter the text you want to appear under Layoutdescription on the form, e.g. "This is an example".

Tab Menu

Parent Business Partner ReportsYou will then be able to open the report from Modules > Business Partners > BusinessPartner Reports.

Description Sales Orders

Choose Update Menu.

Tab ParametersChoose Get from Datasource.

The columns Parameter and Parameter Mode will automatically be filled for 4 of the 5 parameters used in thequery. Since last parameter, CardCountry, does not yet exist, the system issues as warning and informs you that youneed to create this parameter first. The next chapter explains how to do this.

2. Choose Add to create the layoutdefinition.

3. Open the layoutdefinition that you have just created and proceed with the next step.



Since the parameter CardCountry does not yet exist, you need to create it first.

1. Right-click on Functions in the layoutdefinition and choose Open Parameters.

2. Create a parameter with the following data:

Key (In Queries) CardCountry(This is the exact same ID as in the query. This is case-sensitive.)

Type ofParameter

Alphanumeric

You can leave all other fields empty. They are either not relevant or will be filled automatically by the system.

3. Choose OK to close the window. Go back to the layoutdefinition, select the tab Parameters and chooseGet from Datasource again. The five parameters now appear in the list and the columns Parameter andParameter Mode are already filled. Choose Update to save your changes.


Adjust the order of parameters on the form6.6.3.4

Next, you need to define in which order the parameters should appear on the form. To do this, go to thelayoutdefinition and select the tab Parameters.

Additional line for grouping the parametersTo get a better overview, it is a good idea to split the parameters into different groups. You can do this byentering a placeholder. In our example, we have added the placeholder Optional filter:.To insert placeholders, you need the parameter SWA_LD_Space. Add a new line to the list of parameters andenter the following data:

Parameter SWA_LD_Space

Description [@T0060075]: (will be translated as Optional filter:)

Parameter Modus Default

Description in several languages

Parameter Description

DateType: Text [@T0070020] (will be translated as Date type)

FromDate: Text [@T0070019] (will be translated as Date from)

ToDate: Text [@T0070018] (will be translated as Date to)

CardCode: Text [@T0002023] (will be translated as Business Partner)

CardCountry: Text [@T0070003] (will be translated as Country)

SWA_LD_Space: Text [@T0060075]: (will be translated as Optional filter:)

These text codes are from the Text List. Open the Text List (Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuitedesigner > Text List) and use Ctrl+F to find out if the text code that you want to use already exists. If it does,use the text code from the list. If it does not exist yet, you need to create a text code. For more information,please see here: Open Texts.

Input orderTo display the parameters in the form, you need to enter a value in the column Input order. If there are severalparameters, you need to define the order in which you want them to be displayed.

Parameter Input Order (alphanumeric)

DateType: Text 01

FromDate: Text 05

ToDate: Text 10

CardCode: Text 20

CardCountry: Text 25

SWA_LD_Space: Text 15


Define standard values for the parameters6.6.3.5

There are different ways to enter parameters. To prevent errors from occurring when users enter parameters, itis a good idea to define default values in the form of ChooseFrom lists and combo boxes.

To do so, define the following values in the column Design Param Value:

Parameter Design Param Value

DateType: Text [DocDate;Posting Date;DocDueDate;Due Date;TaxDate;Document Date]

FromDate: Date SELECT CONVERT(NVARCHAR,FinancYear,112) FROM OACP WHERE YEAR(GetDate()) = Year

ToDate: Date

CardCode: Text {Select CardCode,CardName FROM OCRD WHERE CardType='C'}

CardCountry:Text

{SELECT T0.[Code], T0.[Name] FROM OCRY T0}

SWA_LD_Space:Text

Text or data input without default valuesThe user has to enter the value in the correct format.

ToDate (Date to)

For this parameter you do not need to enter any value in the column Design Param Value.

Text or data input with default valuesThe user has to enter the value in the correct format.

FromDate (Date from)

To create a default value, you must enter an SQL query without any brackets.

SELECT.... FROM......

The query must return exactly one value.

For parameters of the type Date, a date picker will appear on the form.

Combo boxThe user has to select a parameter from a combo box. Combo boxes are useful for a small selection ofparameters. The user must then choose a value.

DateType (Date type)

To create a combo box, you have to enter the parameter in square brackets. In each row, you have todefine the parameter and the relevant description.

[Parameter1;Description1;Parameter2;Description2]

For combo boxes you must define two columns. One column needs to contain the exact value of theparameter, the second column needs to contain a description.

ChooseFrom listThe user can choose defined parameters from a ChooseFrom list. ChooseFrom lists are useful for a large


selection of parameters. The user can select one or several of these values, but this is optional.

CardCode (Business Partner) and CardCountry (County)

To create a ChooseFrom list you must enter an SQL query in curly brackets:

{SELECT.... FROM......}

The ChooseFrom list only works if you have created a query. The parameters must be defined in SQLqueries.

Unlike with combo boxes, you can display any number of columns.

To see what tables and columns you need, use the System Information.

Choose Update to save your changes.

If you now choose Preview, the following mask appears:

If you now choose OK, the report opens. However, this is still empty. You need to create the layout bychoosing Open Designer on the layoutdefinition. For further information, please refer to Format the layout inPractical example 1.


6.6.4 Practical example 4 - Select Grid

ScenarioYou want to send a letter to all business partners with a balance of >5000.

GoalA Select Grid enables you to select one or several lines and print them, so you want to create a Select Gridthat lists all business partners with a balance of >5000. With this Select Grid you can then select the businesspartners from the list for whom you want to print the letter to be sent to them.

ProcedureTo create this Select Grid, the following steps are necessary: 1. Layoutdefinition for the letter 2. Query for Business Partners3. Layoutdefinition for Select Grid4. Create formtype5. Create parameter6. Printdefinition for Select Grid


Layoutdefinition for the letter6.6.4.1

Create a new layout for the letter. Enter the following data:

Name Christmas campaign


DesignFormtype

134: Business Partner

Type User Query

Datasource BusinessPartner

Format Default

Status Active

Go to the tab Parameters and choose Get from Datasource.The parameter CardCode appears.Choose Add to create the layoutdefinition.

Choose Open Designer and create the layout of the letter.

This example shows the address of the business partner only. You can of course customize the layout to fityour needs.


Design

Query for Business Partners6.6.4.2

On the layoutdefinition, right-click on Functions and choose Open Querymanager.

The following query returns the business partners with a balance of >5000. Save the query as Christmascampaign in the folder Own Reports:

SELECT T0.CardCode, T0.CardName, T0.BalanceFROM OCRD T0Where T0.Balance > 5000

This query will be used in the layoutdefinition for the Select Grid (see next step).


Layoutdefinition for Select Grid6.6.4.3

Next, you need to create a layoutdefinition for the Select Grid. In this layoutdefinition, you will include the querythat you just created. The Select Grid needs a formtype, which is why we enter formCampaign in the columnMy FormType. In the column Title you can enter text that will appear as the title of the Select Grid window.

Enter the following data:

Name Christmas campaign - Select Grid


DesignFormtype


Type Select Grid


Format Default

Status Active

Tab Queries

Query 1 Own Reports:Christmas campaign

My FormType formAktion

Title Please select the Business Partner(s)

Tab Menu

Parent Business Partner Reports

Description Standard letter

Choose Update Menu.

If you choose Preview now, the Select Grid window opens. However, there is no functionality yet.


From the System Information you can see that the form type of the Select Grid is formCampaign. This is thedescription that you defined in the column My FormType in the layoutdefinition.


Create formtype6.6.4.4

Next you need to create the form type formCampaign. To do this, right-click on Functions in thelayoutdefinition and choose Open Formtypes.


Formtype formCampaign

This must be the exact same description as in the layoutdefinition under My Formtype.

Name formCampaign


Choose Update and OK to save your changes and to close the window.



Go back to the layoutdefinition of the Select Grid and go to the tab Parameter.

In the Select Grid, the parameter CardCode is used. In order for the Select Grid to use this parameter, youneed to re-define the parameter for the Select Grid:

To do this, right-click on Functions in the layoutdefinition and choose Open Parameters. Enter the following data:

Key (In Queries) CardCode

Type ofParameter

Alphanumeric

Item Id CardCodeItemID = This will be the column name in the Select Grid.

Matrix Id grdSelectThe MatrixID for Select Grids is always grdSelect.

Use Rownumber No

Choose Update.

Select the line you just created and choose Open Array. A new window opens. Select the form type formCampaign from the drop-down list and choose OK. The windowcloses again.

Choose Update and OK to save your changes and to close the window Parameters.


Printdefinition for Select Grid6.6.4.6

Finally, you need to define a printdefinition for the Select Grid. The printdefinition applies to the form type formCampaign and is linked to the layout Christmas campaign. With regards to the copies, only the Copies M.(mass copies) are relevant; the normal copies (Copies) are not relevant for Select Grids.


Name Christmas campaign

FormType formCampaign:formCampaign

Language English US

Key No Key

Checkboxes Activate the checkbox Print

Tab Document

Layout BUP:Christmas campaign

Copies M. 1

Tab Extended Definition

Matrix Id grdSelect

If you now go to Modules > Business Partners > Business Partner Reports, you will find the entry Standardletter there. When you choose this entry, the Select Grid opens and you can choose the business partner(s) towhom you want to send the letter:


6.6.5 General

BatchPrinting6.6.5.1

The Batch Printing functionality in the coresuite designer module allows you to set up the system toautomatically print or send specific documents.

The following example demonstrates how to print customer orders that have not yet been printed. A samplequery (SWA_LD_SampleBatchQuery) is available, which is installed automatically with the coresuite countrypackage. All you need to do is slightly adjust it. The SAP Business One standard alarms will be used totrigger the start of the print job.

To set up everything there are 3 steps required:

Step 1 - Define query Step 2 - Create SAP Business One alertStep 3 - Adjust coresuite designer configuration

Step 1 - Define query6.6.5.1.1

First, you need to define the query for the batch printing. In our example we use the query SampleBatchQuery. To open the query, go to Menu > Tools > Queries > UserQueries > SWA_LD_Data > SWA_LD_SampleBatchQuery. Enter the following data:

FormType 139For our example, we only want to return unprinted sales orders, so we define the formtype"139" (Sales Order).

Printdefinition In this example, the Sales Order is used. The Code can be different, make sure to checkin the Layoutmanagement.

Internal number The next column issues the DocNum.

AttGroup This is defined as 1.


Step 2 - Create SAP Business One alert6.6.5.1.2

In a second step you need to create an alert that runs the query.

1. Go to Modules > Administration > Alerts Management and create the alert BatchPrint for the querySWA_LD_SampleBatchQuery.

2. Set the alert to active and assign it to a user. 3. Enter the frequency with which the alert should be run. (The two minutes in the example below are for

illustration purposes only. In a real environment another frequency is more appropriate, for example once aday or once a week.)

Step 3 - Adjust coresuite designer configuration6.6.5.1.3

Go to Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Configuration > Batchprint for the third andlast step.Only one user can run the batch printing, so you need to define this user on the tab Batchprint:

User Enter the user that can run the batch printing.

Alert Select the alert that you have created in step 2.

Print Mode Choose Print, because you want to print the report.

Intervall [min] Define the interval in which the report should be printed.

Enter "1440" (24 x 60) if you want to print the report every day.


Remote Printing6.6.5.2

coresuite designer can receive print jobs in a folder and carry them out. To do this, the following steps arerequired:

Creating folderConfiguring coresuite designerCreating print job file

Create folderCreate a folder in which you want the print jobs to be saved. You can save this folder anywhere you like.

Configuring coresuite designerNext you need to configure coresuite designer. Go to Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuitedesigner > Configuration > Batchprinting. Under Parameter Scan-Path, enter the path to the folder you justcreated. User and Print Mode are handled the same way as in the Batchprinting. The Intervall is not used forRemote Printing.Save your changes and re-start coresuite.

Creating print job fileAfter re-starting coresuite, all print jobs that are saved as text files in this folder, will be printed. The syntax forthese text files looks as follows:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16"?><job><type mode="Print" layoutid="0" formtype="139"/><paramsets> <paramset> <params> <param key="DocEntry" value ="3"/>

<param key="PrintDef" value ="T0000007"/> </params> </paramset> <paramset> <params> <param key="DocEntry" value ="4"/>

<param key="PrintDef" value ="T0000007"/> </params> </paramset></paramsets></job>


Copy Queries6.6.5.3

Under Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer > Printdefinition > Document > Copies youcan select the number of copies. However, this number does not represent the number of copies, but the querythat was saved as "1".

The folder SWA_LD_Copy contains all queries that can be used in the column Copies in the Printdefinition.This means that there are countless options to define the number of copies using SQL queries.


Copies using UDFs6.6.5.3.1

A practical example is the definition of the number of copies using a UDF. To do so, you need to create a newquery:

SELECTCASEWHEN T0.U_Copies IS NULLTHEN 1ELSE T0.U_CopiesENDFROM OCRD T0WHERE T0.CardCode = '[%CardCode]'

You can now save this query in the folder SWA_LD_Copy and use it in the print definition. If the UDF is notdefined, i.e. if it is NULL, one copy will be printed. If a value has been assigned to the UDF, this value will beused for the number of copies:


Number of copies depending on country of BP6.6.5.3.2

Another practical example is the definition of the number of copies depending on the country of the businesspartner. For this, you could use the following sample query:

SELECTCASEWHEN T0.Country <> (SELECT T2.Country FROM OADM T2)THEN 2ELSE 1ENDFROM OCRD T0WHERE T0.CardCode = '[%CardCode]'


Printing, Exporting, Displaying6.6.5.4

With coresuite designer you can export and print reports and documents in different ways. The most frequentlyused ways are print-outs, PDF exports or e-mails. You can also export reports and documents in Word orExcel format.

Printing6.6.5.4.1

To print from a document, the layoutdefinition and printdefinition must be set up correctly.In the Printdefinition you can defined the number of copies that will be printed when you choose the SAPPrint button.In the Layoutdefinition you can define the printer, the trays, the users and the language.

The following example illustrates how you can print a sales order in the office and, at the same time, print aproduction order in the production plant. The two documents are based on the same layout differ in two mainpoints:

2 documents: 1 Sales Order, 1 Production Order


Step 1 - Printdefinition6.6.5.4.1.1

Open an existing Sales Order and choose to open the printdefinition.Go to the tab Document and add a new row. In this second row you define the layout for the production order.Enter the following data in the second row:

Layout Select the Standard DIN layout (Document DIN - LD (DOC00008)).

Copies 1(You want to print one copy of each layout.)

Free Text prodWith this text you can mark this as the production layout.

Language GermanThe production layout will always be printed in German (because the employees working inthe production plant only speak German).

Step 2 - Layoutdefinition6.6.5.4.1.2

In a next step you amend the layoutdefinition. Double-click on the row header in the printdefinition to open the layoutdefinition.Go to the tab Printer and enter the following data:

Row 1 Row 2

Page All other All other

FreeText

prodThis text must match the text that you defined inthe previous step under Free Text in theprintdefinition.

FormType

139 : Sales Order 139 : Sales Order

Printer Enter the path to printer 1. Enter the path to printer 2 that is located in theproduction plant.

Tray Here you can enter a tray from which you wantthe printer to take the paper.

Here you can enter a tray from which you wantthe printer to take the paper.

You can leave all other fields empty.Save your changes.

If you printed now, the office and the production plant would receive the exact same document, i.e. the free textdoes not make any difference at the moment. Printing the same document on two printers could also beachieved by adding a row with two copies to the printdefinition and by defining the copies "0" and "1" in thelayoutdefinition. However, in the next step we will define the differences between the two layouts.


Step 3 - Differences in the layout6.6.5.4.1.3

Choose Open Designer in the layoutdefinition.

In the designer we now specify the differences in the layout. In our example, there are two differences betweenthe two layouts:

No footer in the production orderAnother title in the production order

1. No footer in the production orderGo to the document tree and select "DocumentFooter":

Go to the tab Properties and choose Bindings and go to the field Visible. The Script Editor opens in a newwindow. Enter the script that ensures that the footer is only visible if the parameter is not "prod". The syntax forthis looks as follows:

GetData("LD.Par.FreeText")<>"prod"

You can load the parameter Free Text into the editor by choosing Datasources > LD > Par >FreeText.


2. Another title in the production orderIn the second step, you need to amend the title of the document. To do so, click on the document title. Go to Properties > Generate Script and extend the existing script. Theextended script says the following: "If the parameter Free Text is "prod", the document title will be "Production Order". The syntax for this is asfollows:

If GetData("LD.Par.FreeText") = "prod" ThentxtDocTitel.Value = "Production Order"End If

Script ergänzen

Save your changes.When you open any Sales Order now and choose the Print button, coresuite designer prints the relevantdocuments.


PDF export6.6.5.4.2

Using the printdefinition, you can create a PDF export.

ScenarioYou want to create a PDF of the Sales Order and a PDF of the Production Order. To do so, you must activatethe checkbox "PDF" on the printdefinition. coresuite designer automatically creates file names for the files.You can, however, also create them manually. To do so, go to the tab Document and enter the file name in thecolumn Export File Name.

If you now open a Sales Order and choose , coresuite designer saves the files in a temp folder.Alternatively, you can define an export path. To do so, go to the tab Email/Fax on the printdefinition and enterthe path in the field Export Path.


E-Mail6.6.5.4.3

With coresuite designer, you can send the generated documents via e-mail. To do so, you need to make therelevant settings in the printdefinition under Email/Fax.

Printdefinition (example service call)

In this example (printdefinition Service Call), the target address was taken from the contact person of thebusiness partner with a SQL query. The corresponding query parameter is [%callID]. In the same way you candefine the CC address (e.g. technician assigned to this service call) and the BCC address.

You can either work with an SQL query or with text elements, but you cannot use both in the same field.

The subject line was created using a text from the Text Collection ([@0000021]) and the current call ID([%callID]).


You can also use defined elements from the Text Collection for the e-mail text.


6.6.6 System parameters

coresuite designer offers a series of system parameters which you can use in:- Scripts (using GetData("LD.Par.ParamName"))- Queries (using [%ParamName])

Below you will find a list of the most important parameters with use cases:

Parameter Description

PrintMode Contains the mode in which the layout is rendered."N" -> Print or Preview"P" -> PDF"E" -> Email"F" -> Fax"W" -> Word"X" -> Excel

Use case: You want to print a layout on company paper (with the company logo) andsend the same layout by e-mail.Solution: Display logo only if PrintMode<>"N".

FormType Contains the formtype of the form from which the layout has been started."139" -> Sales Order"140" -> Delivery...

Use case: You want to print a special offer in the footer area of the Delivery.Solution: Only display footer if FormType="149"

Preview "Y" if in Preview, "N" if not.

Use case: You want to display hyper link arrows only in the Preview.Solution: Set the Visible property of the hyper link arrow to Preview="Y".

UserId Contains the logged-in user.

Use case: Dynamically define the e-mail address in the print definition.Solution: Define the relevant query in the printdefinition on the tab Email/Fax.


Overview over all system and user parameters:

To get an overview over the parameters, you can use a pre-installed diagnostic layout on the printdefinition of adocument, e.g. of the Sales Order:

This is the result of a Sales Order printed in Add mode (AddMode ="Y"):


6.6.7 Dealing with marketing documents

When you work with marketing documents coresuite designer will help you in several areas.

1. DocEntry retrieval

When working with coresuite designer is essential to read out data table keys from the form.Those keys are called parameters and can be used in all the queries related to this layout.They can even be used in a printdefinition to get for example a dynamic e-mail address.But when working with marketing documents we cannot read out the DocEntry from the form which is theregular way for coresuite designer to get parameters.In the case of marketing documents coresuite designer creates the DocEntry - Parameter automatically for youusing the predefined parameters: DocNum, DocDate and DocSeries.

You can always use [%DocEntry] for all your marketing doc related queries and definitions.

2. Formtype defines the Object

Since we can read out the FormType of every SAP- Form by SDK we use it as our unique Object Identifier.A lot of scripts in our standard layouts are using the FormType parameter to enable/disable areas and for otherconditional stuff.So as soon as we have a FormType on the marketing documents we may use:- Unified queries (using the placeholder @@RDR)- The ObjectId parameter- Conditional formatting and other individual things.

Check: SWA_LD_FORMTYPE - Table

3. DataSource

The Document_88 datasource gives you already a lot of information.If you miss something you can:- Extend the datasource with your own queries using @@Placeholders- Use the quick and dirty LD.QueryData(...) - approach

Please be aware that there is already a translated ItemDescription and a translated PaymentTermAs a general rule: All Columns which are called MLDesc are already translated for you.For the others you can use LD - Functions:- GetMLDesc(...) for regular Translations of Fields- GetDesc(....,LangCode) for UDF Valid Values Translations.- QueryData(...) for getting Values out of related UDF Tables

4. Formtype and Draft Documents

First of all if you are dealing with regular documents opened as draft Form in SAP or using the Draft Listdirectly from SAP B1 you don't need to care about drafts at all.As written in point 2. coresuite designer is FormType driven. So how can we deal with draft documents in otherthan above cases (they do not have a FormType)?For example if you would like to use draft documents which are using our Document_88 datasource fromSelectGrids, Remote- or Batchprinting you need to specify the SWA_LD_DRAFT Formtype in the relatedPrintdefinition. This indicates coresuite designer that you would like to use the DRF - Replacement for the@@RDR - Queries and will set the parameter AddMode to "Y".

But then you still need to deal with a lot of conditions in the Layout itself because the scripts doesn't take careof FormType "SWA_LD_DRAFT".If you check our scripts they are using formtypes like "133","139" which are regular Documents.


To automatically transfer the SWA_LD_DRAFT - Formtype into its real FormType just check SWA_LD_DRAFT to FormType in the coresuite designer general configuration.Then all the existing scripts will also work as expected.


6.6.8 Integrated designer - Sharpshooter

You can find the full Sharpshooter documentation as well as a Getting Started guide on the PERPETUUMsoftware site: http://www.perpetuumsoft.com/Product.aspx?lang=en&pid=21&tid=documentation

http://www.perpetuumsoft.com/Product.aspx?lang=en&pid=21&tid=documentation


LayoutHelper6.6.8.1

This chapter describes the pre-defined functions of the coresuite designer module. You can use them with theintegrated designer (Sharpshooter) as well as in coresuite customize rules.

To call the functions, use the format LayoutHelper.LD.<name of the function>.

Functions6.6.8.1.1

Functions are an important topic for Designer. They are irreplaceable for generating dynamic reports. TheDesigner is supplied with many standard functions that can be activated. Additionally, own functions can bedefined in the layouts. In this chapter, we will work with Visual Basic.

Basic Principles6.6.8.1.1.1

Functions have fundamentally always the same syntax

Function <Functions name>(<Parameter list Inputs>) As <Data type> InstructionsEnd Function

The following data types are frequently used:

Data Type Memory Requirements Value Range

Boolean 2 Bytes True or False

Date 8 Bytes Date value ranging from01.01.0001 to 31.12.9999

Decimal 16 Bytes Floating-point number between -7,9 * 10 2̂8 to +7.9*10 2̂8

Double 8 Bytes Floating-point number in doubleprecision between -1,7*10 3̂08to +1,7*10 2̂8

Integer 4 Bytes Whole number between -2.147.483.648 and +2.147.483.647

String 2 Byte Character string from 0 to ca. 2billion Unicode characters

The function can be accessed afterwards in the components bindings (settings) and returns the valuecalculated by the instructions. It can be accessed with the following syntax:

<Function name>(<Inputs>)

Example6.6.8.1.1.2

The following example uses the item list (stock control). First, a SQL query is generated, presenting our datasource. The query was created and saved in the query generator.

SELECT T0.ItemCode, T0.ItemName, T0.OnHandFROM OITM T0


Based on this query, a new layout definition is initialized. In it, both the saved SQL query and the design formtype 150 are selected.

Layoutdefinition

After creating the layout definition, the Designer is initialized. In the Designer, a simple item list is created.First, the data band with the data source from the SQL query is called. The band has a header section, whichdescribes the columns, and a detail area. Text components which describe the item code and description andstock control (OnHand) are placed in these two areas.

Aufbau Layout

Next, the text color of the stock control (OnHand) should be colored dynamically. The point is that the stock iscolored ‘red’ when the number of items in storage reaches 0 or less, ‘orange’ when the number ranges from 1to 100, and ‘green’ over 100. The easiest way to do so is to work with styles. Three new styles were defined.The only difference between them is the name (rot, orange, gruen) and the filling options, in which colorscorrespond to names.


Styles

Next, a script is created. For that purpose, the first level of the document directory is selected and the functionis defined in the settings in CommonScript. The function syntax is:

Function Farbe(bestand As Double) As String Dim col As String If bestand <= 0 Then col = "rot" Else If 0 < bestand AND bestand < 101 Then col = "orange" Else col = "gruen" End If Return colEnd Function

The function is called ’Farbe’, requires the stock in Double format and returns a string. A variable named ‘col’ isinitialized which will give a value to the If then Else condition. This variable will finally be returned with ‘Return’.


Common Script

This script does nothing more than check the stock and then return the style definition. Next, the function mustbe applied to the settings of the text components in stock control. This is accomplished in the bindings. Thefunction ‘Colour’ is called from the binding ‘Style Name’ and the necessary input value is inserted. The value istaken from the band into the script editor.

Verwendung der Funktion


When called, the report is displayed as follows. The stock is coloured in accordance with the definition in thefunction:

Available functions6.6.8.1.2

The present chapter describes some of the existing default functions in Designer. These are always called intothe Bindings with LD.<function name>. You should bear in mind that these functions must be activated. Thiscan be defined in Imports.

activate LayoutHelper

Overview over all functions6.6.8.1.2.1

The following functions are available in the LayoutHelper:

AddAttachmentAddHyperLink


AddTitleAddToTags1AddToTags2AddToTags3BookmarkTextCleanTitlesCreateColumnArrayCreateTableFromTextDateDrawImageDrawThumbnailImageExecuteHyperLinkExecutePrintDefFstrGetAllFormDataGetBaseDirectoryGetColumnTypeGetDataTableGetDateGetDescGetDimensionsGetEANCheckDigitGetFormattedAddressGetImageSizeGetMLDescGetNumGetObjectNameGetTextIsEmptyIsEmptyDateIsEmptyObjectIsProductionIsPurchaseIsSalesIsServiceIsValidSQLLoadLDMultiLineMultiLine RTFOneNewLineOpenFormOpenLayoutOpenMenuByParentAndNameOpenObjectOpenObjectByLinkOpenPrintdefParamDateParamDateTimeQueryDataQueryDataDateQueryDataNumReplaceTextParamReplaceTextParamInSQLReplaceValueSpacesWithNBSPResetAfterExportEventResetAfterMailOrFaxEvent


ResetAfterPrintEventResetAfterPrintOrPreviewEventSetCultureSetFormTypeSetReplaceWithStartAfterExportEventStartAfterMailOrFaxEventStartAfterPrintEventStartAfterPrintOrPreviewEventStartArchiveEventStartBeforeArchiveEventStartEndOfPrintOrderEventStartFaxGeneratedEventTag2Tag3WeekOfYearWeekOfYearISO8601WeekOfYearMon


AddAttachement6.6.8.1.2.2

LD.AddAttachement([Pfad])

The Attachement-Function helps you attach several files to a layout which is sent by the E-Mail Functionalityof the Designer. Next, an example is shown which sends a Sales Quotation by e-mail. The goal is to send witheach Item in the Quotation a factsheet in PDF format. All factsheets in this example are saved in the samefolder and named by the Item Code:

Next, in the DocumentRow of the DIN Layout the function is inserted, which sends to every Item the sheet.


The path in this example is static. But the Filename is generated in a dynamic way: It is the ItemCode. TheFile Format is again Static. So, when this Quotation is sent by mail, for each article which has a factsheet, anattachment will be sent.

LD.AddAttachment("C:\workshop\FactSheets\" & DocumentRow("ItemCode") & ".pdf")^


AddHyperlink6.6.8.1.2.3

With the function AddHyperlink several functions can be opened by click. As example the article image in theDIN marketing document will be opened in ms Paint by click.

Hyperlink

HyperlinkAs value in the hyperlink field in the bindings, the name and the parameter is transmitted. For example, here isthe name 'MyClick123' and the parameter is the path and also the name of the article image.

"[Name; Parameter]"

"[MyClick123;""" & GetData("B1_Data.CompanyDefaults.BitmapPath") & DocumentRow("RowRowItems.PicturName") & """]"

Generate SkriptIn the generate script of the document the hyperlink is called and connected with a function of the CommonScript (see next point).

LD.AddHyperLink("MyClick123", Addressof MyClick)

Common SkriptIn the Common Script of the document, the function (called MyClick) is defined and opens the msPaint.

Private Sub MyClick(rawUrl As String, sPath As String) Dim p As System.Diagnostics.Process = New System.Diagnostics.Process() p.StartInfo.FileName = "mspaint.exe" p.StartInfo.Arguments = sPath p.Start()End Sub


BookmarkText6.6.8.1.2.4

LD.BookmarkText(<Text As String>)

Bookmarks can be added to any object in the Designer. A lozenge is inserted before the bookmark:"#Bookmarktext". If a ‘/’ or a ‘\’ appears in the bookmark, the Designer will interpret it as a subchapter. If youwant this type of notation, you must use the LD-function. In this case, ‘one/two’ becomes ‘one_two’ and not achapter ‘one’ with subchapter ‘two’.

LD.BookmarkText("#one/two")


CreateTableFromText6.6.8.1.2.5

CreateTableFromText(<Engine As Render Engine>, <name As String>, <text As String>, <columnSplitter As String[]>, <row Splitter As String[]>)

The name which will later be used for recalling, can be defined under ‘name’. The text element from thedata source is entered under "text". The line or column break is entered under column and rowsplitter.

Next, the standard layout is adjusted (document DIN), in order to allow small tables to be created with the texteditor. This is the only way to create tables, as the editor does not recognize html tables.

Creating a TableFirst, a small table is created in a sales order. In the present example, the line extension of an item is usedand a small table is inserted. In this example, the table is structured like this: if a new line is created in theeditor with the enter command, a new line will be displayed afterwards in the table. If an empty space iscreated with 4 strokes of the space key, this will be interpreted as a new column.

create a table

Adjustments to the Layout (Document DIN)


First, a new variable is initialized on the top level in the common script. This variable will read the number ofcolumns in the table, afterwards:

The variable we have just defined is overwritten with the return value from the Create TableFromText function.The fact is that the function indicates the maximum number of columns in the table. The following script isinserted in the GetDataScript of the ‘Document Row’ data band under ‘properties’.

GetDataScript

anzSpalten = LD.CreateTableFromText(Engine, "Zeilenerweiterung", DocumentRow("Text"),new String() {" "},new String(){vbcr})

The following values must be fed into the function: Just select ‘Engine’ as render engine. In this example,the string ‘Zeilenerweiterung’ is inserted as name. As text, the corresponding element is sent from thedata sources. In our example, the line extension, the element in question would be this DocumentRow("text"). To finalize, we only need to define the condition for inserting a new line and column. A newcolumn is inserted by means of a string of 4 strikes of the space key {" "}. An ‘enter’ is created together with the {vbcr} string. This function now creates the table and displays the maximum number ofcolumns as return value (numColumns).


Now, a new data band is created in the document under DocumentRows. The name which was defined earlieron can be entered here. In this case: Zeilenerweiterung.

The text fields must be told what to display now. For that purpose, the name and column must be enteredagain in the bindings, under value. Next, the second column, with ‘Col2’. The first column would have ‘Col1’ andso on. It is possible that 3 columns are created in the layout now, but only 2 columns are used in the text fieldafterwards. So that no problems are caused by the designer, the ‘unused’ column had to be hidden. To do so,the corresponding option was selected in the bindings, under ‘visible’. The following is an example: column 2should only be displayed when the table in the text editor has more than one column. Consequently, column 3should feature: numcolumns>3...etc.


When you view the layout, the table is shown:

row 1 column 1 row 1 column 2 row 1 column 3row 2 column 1 row 2 column 2 row 2 column 3


Date6.6.8.1.2.6

LD.Date(<Element>,<Dateformat>)

This function works just like the ‘’Fstr’’ function. The only difference is that in this function we will work withdate formats. As an example, an extended text filed is inserted here and its contents are defined underBindings.

"Today is " & LD.Date(Now, "dd.MM.yyyy")

The different elements are joined with a &. Strings must always be written between ‘’’’. You can find a referenceto the different date formats (here dd.MM.yyyy) at http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/8kb3ddd4.aspx.

When the layout is rendered, the text box is displayed as follows: ‘’Today is 25.02.2008’’

http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/8kb3ddd4.aspx


DrawImage6.6.8.1.2.7

LD.DrawImage(<Path As Object>)

coresuite designer can generate images dynamically. In the case of image elements, an image can beassigned in a permanent way, using the properties in Image. You can work with the image functions inBindings or Generate Script.

Example: Display product images. This function uses the default bitmap path and the picture name fromthe Marketing data source to produce complete dynamic bitmap paths.

LD.DrawImage(GetData("B1_Data.CompanyDefaults.BitmapPath") & DocumentRow("RowRowItems.PicturName"))


Fstr6.6.8.1.2.8

LD.FStr(<Element>,<Numberformat>)

This function allows you to define the contents of simple text. As an example, we will use the stock controllist. In the case of stock control, the entered value is a simple number:

This example demonstrates that, instead of featuring a simple number, the expression should be as follows:‘’This position contains xxxx items’’. For that purpose, the text must be defined for different texts in theBindings. The following code was used in the example:

‘’This position contains " & LD.FStr(articles("OnHand"),"######") & " items’’

The different elements are joined with a &. Strings must always be written between ‘’’’. You can find a referenceto the different number formats (here #######) at http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/0c899ak8.aspx

When the layout is rendered, the display is as follows:

http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/0c899ak8.aspx


GetDesc6.6.8.1.2.9

This function returns the description of User defined fields (UDFs). This description exists for UDFs where validvalues are defined.

> Define User Defined Field (UDF) w ith valid values in SAP Business One

In the SAP Business One Form the left column displays the value which can usually be queried and is returnedby the default datasources.

In order to obtain the value on the right (description) the LD.GetDesc Function must be used.

LD.GetDesc("<Table>","<Definition UDF>",<Value UDF>)

Example:

LD.GetDesc("ORDR", "U_NameUDF", Datasource1.U_NameUDF)

TranslationThe description of the valid values can also be translated (1). In order to print the translated description of theUDF additionally provide the Language Id as a parameter and consider to use the correct table (2) as displayedin the definition.

The table in which the translation is stored can be different from UDF to UDF. Always use the table asdisplayed in the Translations Form (point 2 in Screenshot below).


LD.GetDesc("<Table>","<Definition UDF>",<Value UDF>, <Language Code>)

Example:

LD.GetDesc("ADOC","U_UDF",GetData("B1_Data.Document.U_UDF"),GetData("LD.Par.LangCode"))


GetDimensions6.6.8.1.2.10

LD.GetDimensions(<maximum with As Integer>, <maximum height As Integer>, <Image>)

In the next example, an image which is in item settings must be displayed with maximum 320px width andheight. This function cannot be used in the bindings, as it doesn’t give a return value. In the example, an imagewas inserted in the layout and given the name ‘ProductImage’ in the properties. The following code wasinserted in the Common Script:

ProductImage.Size = LD.GetDimensions(320, 320, ProductImage.Image)

To be able to use this function, the DrawImage function must be run first. If not, the input parameter‘Productimage.Image’ is missing and the function is unable to calculate the new dimensions!


GetEANCheckDigit6.6.8.1.2.11

LD.GetEANCheckDigit(<Code As String>)

This function generates a check digit for Codes. In an EAN-13 code, for example, the last digit is a check digit:

If the 12 first digits of the code are fed into the function, it will generate this check digit.

LD.GetEANCheckDigit("012345678900")

Return Value: 5


GetFormattedAddress6.6.8.1.2.12

V1 For Default AddressLD.GetFormattedAddress(<CardCode As String>)

V2 to distinguish different addressesLD.GetFormattedAddress(<CardCode As String>, <AdressCode As String>, <Adresstyp AsLayoutHelper.LD>)

When new marketing documents are added, SAP® B1 inserts the shipping and billing addresses in theseparator ‘Logistics’. Several addresses can be entered per business partner. They are essentially divided intotwo address types: ‘Ship to’ and ‘Bill to’. However, several addresses can be saved under these address types,using the ‘AddrCode’ label.

address types in SAP B1

If you want to print addresses which have been formatted as explained above, other than in these documents,you must use this function. Using V1, only the standard address (usually the billing address) is printed. V2allows you to print any address you want. Bellow, the shipping address of Funsport Solo is shown.(C1000).

LD.GetFormattedAddress("C1000", "Ship to", LayoutHelper.LD.AddressType.ShipTo)

Displayed:Althardstr. 9998105 RegensdorfSWITZERLAND


GetMLDesc6.6.8.1.2.13

LD.GetMLDesc(<defValue>,<Table>,<Fieldname>,<Primarycode>,<Languagecode>)

GetMLDesc function enables you to trial print several field entries from the SAP®-form in a desired language.Designer offers default translations for the values in some fields. These can be called into the layout using‘DescML’. The following example presents the translation for the name of an item.

LD.GetMLDesc(Artikel("ItemName"),"OITM","ItemName",Artikel("ItemCode"),GetData("LD.Par.LangCode"))

Adjusting the language as design parameter

Designparameter

Result:


IsEmpty6.6.8.1.2.14

LD.IsEmpty(<Element As String>)

This function gives back information on whether a table field has contents or not. If so, the output is TRUE, ifnot, FALSE. The next example checks if a product image has been attributed to an item.

LD.IsEmpty(Items("PicturName"))

If an image has been attributed, the answer is FALSE, if no image exists, the answer is TRUE.


IsPurchase / IsSales6.6.8.1.2.15

LD.IsPurchase(<Formtype As String>)

LD.IsSale(<Formtype As String>)

You can simultaneously query whether a specific document is originated from purchase or from sale. The formtype can be added to the function, which will subsequently return a ‘True’ or ‘False’ output.

Example: "Form 139 = Sales Order"

LD.IsPurchase("139")

Return value of the function: FALSE


MultiLine6.6.8.1.2.16

LD.MultiLine(<Expression AS String>)

Manual line breaks which are defined in SAP can be lost in Designer. The Designer uses a different format towork on line breaks. Example follows. A text component ‘Remarks’ was integrated in the layout. Two lines oftext were written there and subsequently shown in the print preview.

initial situation

The function can now be called from Bindings under properties for this text component. The following value wasentered under Value: LD.MultiLine(Document("Comments")). Now, the line break will be correctly applied:


MultiLine RTF6.6.8.1.2.17

LD.MultiLineRTF(<Expression AS String>)

This function works just like the LD.MultiLine. However, it is used for Advanced Text fields. These text fieldsprocess and convert line breaks from SAP®. The function LD.MultiLineRTF corrects the line breaks so thatthey are correctly presented in the layout.


OneNewLine6.6.8.1.2.18

LD.OneNewLine(<Expression AS String>)

This function can be used in address boxes for example. When the post office box is omitted, an empty linecan be created:

These unnecessary empty lines can be hidden with the ‘OneNewLine’ function. But provided line breaks are tobe generated, one of the multiLine functions must still be chained to this function. This can look like that, forexample:

LD.OneNewLine(LD.MultiLine(Document("Adress")))


OpenLayout6.6.8.1.2.19

LD.OpenLayout(<LayoutCode As String>, <Parameters As String>)

In the case of parameters, the description comes first, then the value, even if there are severalparameters. Example: "CardCode", "C1000"

This function allows you to open a layout, for example, using a shape, an arrow or a similar object. In thefollowing example, an arrow is entered before the card code of a function, which opens the corresponding CRMreport.

The following code was entered in the arrow’s hyperlink under bindings:LD.OpenLayout("T0000301","CardCode",Datasource("CardCode"),"FromDate",GetData("LD.Par.FromDate"))

ResultThe CRM report corresponding to the CardCode is opened.


OpenObject6.6.8.1.2.20

V1 without SAPbouiCOM (the objecttype must be entered manually)LD.OpenObject(<ObjectType As String>, <ID As String>)

V2 with SAPbouiCOM (the layoutHelper presents all objects)LD.OpenObject(<Object Type As BoLinkedObject>, <ID As String>)

Using ‘SAPbouiCom.BoLinkedObject.’, the following suggestions are presented

Object Types

This function opens an object. In the following example, an arrow-shape is used to open the corresponding BP.

V1LD.OpenObject("2", "C1001")

V2LD.OpenObject(SAPbouiCOM.BoLinkedObject.lf_BusinessPartner, "C1001")

ResultBoth variants open the business partner with the card code "C1001"


OpenPrintdef6.6.8.1.2.21

LD.OpenPrintdef(<mode As OpenLayoutModes>, <Formtype As String>, <Parameters As String>)

Using "LayoutHelper.LayoutOpener.OpenLayoutModes.", you will get the following modes in theDesigner:

The parameters are processed as in OpenPrintdef

This function can open a print definition. In the following example, an offer is opened, using an arrow shape:

The following code was entered in the arrow’s hyperlink under bindings:LD.OpenPrintDef(LayoutHelper.LayoutOpener.OpenLayoutModes.Preview, "149", "DocEntry", "1")

ResultThe corresponding document for the offer is opened.


ParamDate6.6.8.1.2.22

LD.ParamDate(<Element>,<Dateformat>)

This function works just like the ‘’Date’’ function. It is used for data which requires parameterization.

example of a date in param format


ParamDateTime6.6.8.1.2.23

LD.ParamDateTime(<Parameter>)

This function works just like the ParamDate. It will return a Datetime format which enables, for example,subsequent calculations based on that date. In the following example, a parameter (FromDate) is read as itwould appear, for example, in the CRM report.

LD.ParamDateTime(GetData("LD.Par.FromDate"))

Result02.04.2008 00:00:00


QueryData6.6.8.1.2.24

LD.QueryData("<SQL-Query>")

This function makes it possible to extract contents from tables outside the Data source. The return value isalways displayed in the first line and first column of the query result. If errors are detected in the query, an errorreport is displayed in its place.

With the function QueryData, the current user name should be printed. The following function is insertedas the value for one of the text boxes.

LD.QueryData("SELECT U_NAME FROM OUSR WHERE USER_CODE = '"+GetData("LD.Par.UserId").ToString() + "'")

Result

list with actual user

This example serves only for demonstration purposes. The current user name can also be easily printedusing the GetData ("B1_Data.UserDetails.U_NAME").


QueryDataDate6.6.8.1.2.25

LD.QueryDataDate("<SQL-Query As String>")

When data which is to be subject to processing, for example, by means of functions, is read from a SLQ queryin the DB, it is convenient to embed the SQL-query in the function ‘QueryDataDate’ instead of ‘QueryDate’.Using the normal QueryData function can lead to undesirable complications, as the value of a function cannotbe correctly calculated. Next, we will present an example of how to calculate, for example, a 30 day term ofpayment counting from the present date.

Bellow, a function is created which wishes to use the present date as ‘DateTime’, adds 30 days to it andreturns the date. In order to transmit the Datetime to the function, you must work with LD.QueryDataDate:

1. Common Script -> Create a Function

Function Date(Today As Datetime) As Datetime Dim Deadline As DateTime Deadline = Today.AddDays(30) Return DeadlineEnd Function

2. Value in the Bindings of the text item

Date(LD.QueryDataDate("Select GetDate()"))

Result30 days are added to the current date and inserted in the text field. This example serves only todemonstrate the idea, as there are more reasonable ways of adding 30 days to the present date.


ReplaceTextParam6.6.8.1.2.26

LD.ReplaceTextParam(<String>, <Langcode As String>)

This function replaces all text markers which are queried in the form "[%@U0000276]" by the correspondinginserted text. This function is useful, for example, when default markers are entered in UDFs instead of text. Inthe following example, "[@U0000276]" was inserted in the business partner’s remarks. When this field isqueried in the layouter, the return output "[@U0000276]" is given without this function.

LD.ReplaceTextParam(LD.QueryData("SELECT T0.Free_Text FROM OCRD T0 Where CardCode = [%CardCode]"), GetData("LD.Par.LangCode"))


WeekOfYear6.6.8.1.2.27

LD.WeekOfYear(<Date As Object>)

The WeekOfYear function calculates the corresponding week based on a given data object, for example, ‘Now’.

"Week " & LD.WeekOfYear(Now)

For example, inputting 11th March will return the following ‘Week 11’.

Calculation MondayWhen the week calculation is to start on Monday, the following syntax can be used:

LD.WeekOfYearMon(<Date As Object>)


WeekOfYearISO86016.6.8.1.2.28

Calculates the Week according ISO 8601.


getData / Data6.6.8.1.3

getDataIf Data is read from an Advanced Databand, coresuite designer transforms NULL-Entries into Empty Strings(Alphanumeric Data) and 0 (Numeric Data). But if you load some data directly with getData("Expression"),coresuite designer submits the original values. That means, also NULL can be loaded in this case.

DataTo avoid this NULL-Entries, the Function must be Data("Expression"). Now, the characteristics are the samelike in the Advanced Databand: NULL gets to "" (Alphanumeric) or 0 (Numeric).

Hyperlink (Drill Down Arrows)6.6.8.1.4

Previews from Designer can be provided with link buttons. This allows you to open SAP® forms directly fromPreview. Next, the link button is explained using the business partner based on the CRM report.

link arrow

A new Shape is created in the Detail area where the ID of the business partner is located, too. The XML Codeof the arrow in the example, which can directly be inserted in the layout with ctrl+V, is as follows:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-16" standalone="yes"?><root type="PerpetuumSoft.Reporting.Designer.ReportClipboard" id="1" version="2"><Controls type="PerpetuumSoft.Reporting.DOM.ReportControlCollection" id="2"><Item type="PerpetuumSoft.Reporting.DOM.Shape" id="3"Location="425.19683837890625;64.774421691894531"Size="41.338581085205078;35.433071136474609" Name="shape1" Line="1 SolidDarkRed"><ShapeStyle type="PerpetuumSoft.Framework.Drawing.ArrowShape" id="4"Direction="Right" /><DataBindings type="PerpetuumSoft.Reporting.DOM.ReportDataBindingCollection"id="5"><Item type="PerpetuumSoft.Reporting.DOM.ReportDataBinding" id="6" Expression=""[OpenForm;2561;5;;" & BusinessPartnerDetails("CardCode") & ";;Close]"" PropertyName="Hyperlink" /></DataBindings><Fill type="PerpetuumSoft.Framework.Drawing.LinearGradientFill" id="7" StartColor="OrangeRed" EndColor="Orange" /><Shadowtype="PerpetuumSoft.Framework.Drawing.Shadow" id="8" DY="2.3622047244094491"DX="2.3622047244094491"><Fill type="PerpetuumSoft.Framework.Drawing.LinearGradientFill" id="9" /></Shadow></Item></Controls></root>


How you can link this Arrow you learn in the sections:OpenLayoutOpenPrintdefOpenObject

Grouping Data6.6.8.1.5

The AdvancedGroupBand allows several grouping options. This example shows a simple personnel list groupedby department. First, a new layout is created. In this example, a small SQL-query was executed as datasource:

SELECT T0.[empID], T0.[lastName], T0.[firstName], T0.[remark], T1.[Name] AS [Department], T2.[USER_CODE],FROM OHEM T0 LEFT JOIN OUDP T1ON T0.dept = T1.Code

With this data source, a new layout is created in personnel master data and subsequently formatted in theDesigner. Start with an Advanced Data Band, which uses the created query as Data Source. As the personnellist is to be displayed grouped by department, an Advanced Group Band will be inserted in this Advanced DataBand, featuring, as usual, the Details and respective contents. In this example, a header with a text elementindicating the department was inserted at the top. The Header is repeated for every new group, the Details forevery data sentence, as usual.

create the layout

The GroupBand must be told what grouping criteria to use. For that purpose, click on the AdvancedGroupBandand define the ‘GroupExpressions’ under properties. In this example, the Group Expression is ‘Department’.


Definition GroupExpression

When accessed, the report will be presented as follows:

Result

Open the Designer6.6.8.1.6

Designer is opened from the ’Layoutdefinition’ form. Existing layouts can be selected and subsequentlyprocessed with ‘Opening the Designer’. When a new layout is defined, data sources must be fed into theDesigner. This is accomplished either with predefined data sources or with user defined queries. After thenecessary information has been entered, the Designer can be opened using the same button.


start Designer

Page properties6.6.8.1.7

Using the Designer, you can create several completely different pages. (Use to create a new page). Thesepages are configured in Page Settings. To access them, click on the corresponding page and select settings.

It is also possible to access them directly using the button on the upper line. The following settings can bedefined per page:

Appearance StyleName allows you to define which style is to be used as default in new elements.

Data Under Tag further information can be added to the page settings.

Design The page definition is introduced under Name. This way, the page will appear afterwards inthe Document Directory as well.

Layout The actual page size is defined under Size. The relative position to elements in a superiorposition can be defined under Location. In the case of pages, it is usually 0,0.

Navigation The definition in Bookmark appears under page structure in the PDF Export.

Page Settings The page margins can be defined under Margins. These margins will be shown as thin redlines, which may be helpful when positioning the components. Paper orientation can bedefined under Orientation. Paper size is established under PaperKind. TemplateSize, onthe other hand, has nothing to do with the output size, but only with the working area in theDesigner. When working with many elements, it is advisable to increase the template sizein the y-direction, in order to gain more space to order the components.

Script GenerateScript allows you to define a script which will be executed based on thereproduction of the report.


Pivot Tables6.6.8.1.8

In this section, a pivot table will be built. The pivot shows the availability of items in the different stocks. Asdatasource, a simple query will be used:

SELECT * FROM OITW

After, a new layoutdefinition will be built containing this query. In the designer, a pivot-table is placed by thecorresponding tool. In the properties the Datasource (query) must be defined like the advanced databand. Withdouble click on the pivot-table, a new property window opens:

PropertiesIn the source fields area, the elements of the query are listed. With drag and drop, they can placed into thesections in the middle. In this example, the warehouses are defined in the x-dimension and the different itemsin thy y-dimension. In the facts-field, the actual stock (onHand) is showed. Of course, it is also possible tobuild the report in several dimensions, for example in the y-dimension first grouped by the article group andthen by the articles.


StylesIn the section "Styles", for each fieldtype in the table, a style can be chosen. In the designer installation,several styles are already pre-installed. They can be used like in the following example:

Result

6.6.9 Crystal Reports Designer

The following section provides information on Crystal Reports Designer.Please note that we only document functions that are specific to our integration of Crystal Reports Designer.For more detailed information, please refer to the F1 help and the documentation available online.


Opening Crystal Reports Designer6.6.9.1

Create a new layoutdefinition to open the Crystal Reports Designer:

Name Enter the name for your layout.

Category Select a category, e.g. BusinessPartner.

DesignFormtype

Select a Design Formtype, e.g. 134:BusinessPartner.

Type External Report

Datasource Select a Datasource, e.g. BusinessPartner.(Ensure you set the correct parameters when using a pre-defined datasource.)

Format Default

Status Active

Tab ParametersChoose Get from Datasource to load the existing parameters. If there are no parameters, nothing will appear.

Tab External Report

Data ExportFormat

Crystal Reports

ConnectionType

Select the relevant option, e.g. Current Company.

Choose Add to create the layoutdefinition.

Reopen this layoutdefinition and under File Path enter the path to the .rpt template file (landscape or portraitversion).

Choose Update and then Open Designer to launch the report in Crystal Reports Designer. This might take afew seconds. The layout will be displayed in design mode.


File storage6.6.9.2

File PathAll files are saved in the folder you specified under Modules > Administration > System Initialization > GeneralSettings > Path > Extensions Folder.If you have not defined a folder there, the files will be saved in the folder Program Files > ... > SAP > SAPBusiness One > AddOns.

File IDIn order to view the files relevant for the External Report such as Crystal Reports, go to the Layoutdefinition >External Report and choose the button next to the field File ID:

Relevant FilesTwo files are required to design reports with Crystal:1. Crystal Reports Design file (*.rpt), which is stored in the folder FileToDesign. 2. The dataschema which stores both the data used in the report and the schema (information if a field is string

or integer, etc.). This .xml file is created as soon as Crystal Reports is launched from the layoutdefinitionand stored in the Extensions Folder under "Extension Folder + "\SWA_LD\ExternalReport\FILEID\dataSchema.xml".

How to change the Extensions Folder1. Enter the path to the new Extensions Folder.2. Restart coresuite for the folders to get copied.3. Carry out a Reinstall for all paths to get updated. Go to Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite

designer > Configuration > Install and choose Reinstall.


Multi-language reports6.6.9.3

Together with the data relevant for your documents or reports coresuite also provides the datasource for alltranslated texts in a table called SWA_LD_Txt.

Drag and drop the text code from the Field Explorer into a textbox in your report to ensure your reports willalways be translated to the required language.


Multi-layouts6.6.9.4

The best practice is to look at the DOC_Document DIN - RPT (DOC40000) layout delivered for all marketinglayouts to get some details.

The general idea is to use1. Formula Fields in Crystal Reports to store dynamic values.2. either the Object Type from the data field {Document.ObjType} or the FormType from the data field

{SWA_LD_Par.FormType} to get the actual document or object type.3. a different case for each object type.


Pre-defined datasources6.6.9.5

Next, you need to create a layoutdefinition for the Select Grid. In this layoutdefinition, you will include the querythat you just created. The Select Grid needs a formtype, which is why we enter formCampaign in the columnMy FormType. In the column Title you can enter text that will appear as the title of the Select Grid window.


Name Christmas campaign - Select Grid


DesignFormtype


Type Select Grid


Format Default

Status Active

Tab Queries

Query 1 Own Reports:Christmas campaign

My FormType formAktion

Title Please select the Business Partner(s)

Tab Menu

Parent Business Partner Reports

Description Standard letter

Choose Update Menu.

If you choose Preview now, the Select Grid window opens. However, there is no functionality yet.


From the System Information you can see that the form type of the Select Grid is formCampaign. This is thedescription that you defined in the column My FormType in the layoutdefinition.


Remote designing6.6.9.6

If you want to design your report on a system on which only Crystal Reports but not SAP Business One isinstalled, you only need to copy 2 files to your system:

1. Crystal Reports Design file (*.rpt) which is stored under "SAP Extension Folder +"\SWA_LD\ExternalReport\FILE ID\FileToDesign"

2. dataSchema.xml file

The dataSchema.xml file provides the correct schema and sample data to design your report.


Subreports links6.6.9.7

When creating subreports it is important to set the correct link and filter to prevent any duplication of data inthe Details section of your main report.You can adjust links and filters in your subreport after adding them. To do so, follow these steps:

1. Right-Click on your report and select Change Subreport Links...

2. Select all fields from the main report that you will use in the subreport. This includes the fields to be used asa filter (e.g. LineNum) and fields that will be displayed in the subreport but are coming from the main reportsuch as Texts, Formula Fields or General Data. We recommend you do NOT activate the checkbox "Selectdata in subreport based on field:"

3. Inside the subreport set the correct filter in the Select Expert:


6.6.10 Crystal Dashboard Designer (formerly XCelsius)

The following section provides information on Crystal Dashboard Designer.Please note that we only document functions that are specific to our integration of Crystal DashboardDesigner.For more detailed information, please refer to the F1 help and the documentation available online.

Crystal Dashboard Designer is used to create dashboards.

In order to prevent confusion, we will refer to the Crystal Dashboard Designer as XCelsius in thisdocumentation.


Opening Crystal Dashboard Designer6.6.10.1

Create a new layoutdefinition to open XCelsius:

Name Enter the name for your layout.

Category Select a category, e.g. Sales Reports

DesignFormtype

Select a Design Formtype or leave this empty.

Type External Report

Datasource Select a Datasource, e.g. SalesDash_SAR130003(if there are parameters, ensure they are set correctly)

Format Default

Status Active

Tab ParametersChoose Get from Datasource to load the existing parameters. If there are no parameters, nothing will appear.

Tab External Report

Data ExportFormat

Xcelsius XML

Use Design File Activate this checkbox

Choose Add to create the layoutdefinition.

Reopen this layoutdefinition and under File Path enter the path to the .xlf template file (this is the XCelsiusdesign file).

Choose Update and then Open Designer to launch the report in Crystal Dashboard Designer. The layout will bedisplayed in design mode.


coresuite country package provides a sample XCelsius (.xlf) file which you can use to create yourdashboard. The database connections are already defined in that file. The file is stored in the ExternalReport folder in the default installation path of the coresuite designer.

The dashboards delivered with the coresuite country package do not use the design file. This means youcannot make any adjustments to these dashboards apart from adjusting the Refresh Interval.


Data transfer6.6.10.2

To set the database connection in XCelsius go to Database > Connections.

DefinitionIn the XCelsius template provided with the coresuite country package, the definition for the databaseconnection is already predefined and should not be changed.The settings are as displayed below:

Load DataFor our dashboards we only load the data from the cache. The coresuite country package includes an XCelsiustemplate with one sample query. This is used to load the company name and display it in the header of thedashboard.

To load your data into the XCelsius dashboard, follow the steps described below:1. Create and save the query in SAP Business One in your own category. Do not use the General category.2. Add the query to your layoutdefinition (under Layoutdefinition > Queries).


3. In XCelsius enter the correct name of the query. Note the difference in query naming for Simple XCelsiusXML and XCelsius XML. For more information, see Simple XCelsius XML vs. XCelsius XML.

4. Define the range in the Excel spreadsheet where XCelsius should enter the data.

Now the database connection has been set properly to load the data.


UsageDo not forget to set the correct refresh interval under Usage tab.


File storage6.6.10.3

File PathAll files are saved in the folder you specified under Modules > Administration > System Initialization > GeneralSettings > Path > Extensions Folder.If you have not defined a folder there, the files will be saved in the folder Program Files > ... > SAP > SAPBusiness One > AddOns.

File IDIn order to view the files relevant for the External Report such as Crystal Reports you may select the browsebutton next to the File ID:

You can find this on the layoutdefinition on the tab External Report.

Relevant FilesTwo files are required to display reports with XCelsius:1. Flash file (*.swf), which is stored in the folder FileToView.2. The data.xml, which stores the data loaded to the XCelsius Dashboard. This xml file is created as soon as

XCelsius is launched from the layoutdefinition and stored in the Extensions Folder under "Extension Folder +"\SWA_LD\ExternalReport\FILE ID\data.xml".

In order to design the XCelsius Dashboard a third file is required:3. XCelsius design file (*.xlf). This file is stored in the folder "FileToDesign" and is not required to display the

Dashboards in SAP Business One.

The info.txt file stores the timestamp when the cache in the data.xml was refreshed the last time.

How to change the Extensions Folder1. Enter the path to the new Extensions Folder. 2. Restart coresuite for the folders to get copied.3. Carry out a Reinstall for all paths to get updated. Go to Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite

designer > Configuration > Install and choose Reinstall.


Flash file integration6.6.10.4

Once the XCelsius Dashboard is completed and exported to Flash file (*.swf) you may save the Flash fileanywhere on your system or integrate it in the layoutdefinition as described below:

1. In the layoutdefinition, go to the External Report tab.2. Choose the browse button at the end of the file path to select the Flash file (*.swf).3. Choose Update to save your changes.


Multi-language dashboards6.6.10.5

In order to be able to display the labels and data of the dashboard in the current language set in SAP BusinessOne, you may use the multi-language text codes of coresuite designer.

For performance reasons we suggest to only load the text codes used in the XCelsius Dashboard.

The XCelsius template provided with coresuite designer already contains a few examples of translated labelsfor dashboards.

Sample Query in SAP Business OneSELECT T0.Code, ISNULL(T2.Trans, T0.U_Text) AS 'Text'

FROM [@SWA_LD_Text] T0

LEFT JOIN OMLT T1 ON T1.PK = T0.Code AND T1.TableName = '@SWA_LD_Text' AND T1.

FieldAlias = 'U_Text'

LEFT JOIN MLT1 T2 ON T2.TranEntry = T1.TranEntry AND T2.LangCode = '[%LangCode]'

WHERE T0.Code IN ('T0070013')

ORDER BY T0.Code

Code in the XCelsius Spreadsheet=VLOOKUP("T0070013";SWA_LD_TEXT!A1:B50;2;FALSE)


Simple XCelsius XML vs. XCelsius XML6.6.10.6

To create Crystal Dashboards coresuite provides two data export formats:Simple XCelsius XMLXCelsius XML

The only difference is the query name in the XML file:In Simple XCelsius XML the queries are renamed to SWA_LD_Data_1 for the first query, SWA_LD_Data_2 forthe second query, etc.In XCelsius XML the queries keep the name defined in the Query Manager.


Refresh interval6.6.10.7

All standard XCelsius reports delivered with the coresuite country package are refreshed automatically in a pre-set time Interval. That means in this interval, the queries from the datasource are executed and refreshed in thecache for the XCelsius dashboard. Depending on the requirements of the company and the amount of data tobe retrieved, the time interval can be adjusted for each dashboard in the layoutdefinition under External Report>Refresh [seconds].

Note that the minimum refresh interval for the dashboards delivered with the country package is 10 seconds.This is the XCelsius default refresh interval.This also means that the actual refresh interval might be up to 10 seconds more than the interval set in thelayoutdefinition as explained above.

For customized dashboards you can adjust the refresh interval in XCelsius accordingly.


Sample dashboards6.6.10.8

The coresuite country package includes several Sample Dashboards which are designed with one componentonly. With these samples you can create your own dashboards without requiring the knowledge or access toCrystal Dashboards Designer software.When these simple dashboards are combined (e.g. in the SAP 8.8 Cockpit) they make a new user-defineddashboard with only data relevant for the specific company.

AccessYou can find the available sample dashboards under Modules > Administration > Add-Ons > coresuite designer> Layoutmanagement.

To filter the sample layouts proceed as follows:1. Enter "sample" in the field Objectname. 2. Select the "General" from the Category drop-down box.3. Choose Filter. 4. Choose Collapse/Expand to display all available samples.

Available sample dashboards are:

Sample Column Chart - Stock (GEN70002)Sample Gauge - Finance (GEN70001)Sample Pie Chart - Sales (GEN70002)

The layoutdefinition of the sample dashboards is set to Inactive by default. Duplicate the sample dashboardsand adjust them to your needs.


Sample Column Chart - Stock (GEN70002)6.6.10.8.1

The Sample Column Chart dashboard displays the Quantity of the Top 12 items in Stock in comparison to theQuantity Committed on Sales Orders.

Dashboard

Sample column chart

All sample queries delivered with the coresuite country package with prefix COR_COL can be used for thisdashboard container.

Datasource SQL query

/****** General Information *****Name: COR_COL_Top12ItemsOnHandDescription:Returns the in Stock Quantity in Comparison to the Is Committed Quantity of the12 Items with most in Stock

Creator: coresystems ag, mufCreate Date: 16.07.2010

***** StartConfDesc *****This is a sample query for theComparison Bar Chart Widget which has to return * 6 Columns** Column 1: Serie = Label for the Bar Chart X Axis** Column 2: Category1 = Name of the first Category** Column 3: Value1 = Values of the first Category per month** Column 4: Category2 = Name of the second Category


** Column 5: Value2 = Values of the second Category per month** Column 6: Color1 (Optional) = Color of the first Category in HexadecimalFormat (Empty Value = Black, Not in the Select Query = Default Colors)** Column 7: Color2 (Optional) = Color of the second Category in HexadecimalFormat (Empty Value = Black, Not in the Select Query = Default Colors)* 1 to 12 Rows** Return the data per series

***** EndConfDesc ******/

/* @@Timeout=[1200]*/

SELECT TOP 12

/* Label ItemCode */

ItemCode AS Serie

/* Monthly Balance */

,'In Stock' AS Category1

,OnHand AS Value1

/* Monthly Budget */

,'Is Committed' AS Category2

,IsCommited AS Value2

/*

,'234767' /* BLUE */ AS Color1

,'EAA013' /* YELLOW */ AS Color2

*/FROM OITMORDER BY OnHand Desc


Sample Gauge - Finance (GEN70001)6.6.10.8.2

The Sample Gauge dashboard displays the Quantity of the Top 12 items in Stock in comparison to theQuantity Committed on Sales Orders.

Dashboard

$

Sample gauge chart

All sample queries delivered with the coresuite country package with prefix COR_GAU can be used for thisdashboard container.


/****** General Information *****Name: COR_GAU_TurnoverVsBudgetDescription:Returns the Percentage of Turnover in Comparison of the Budget for the currentfinancial year(Total Journal Entries)The data is gathered from the View: [COR_VIEW_FIN_FINANCE]



***** StartConfDesc *****This is a sample query for the Gauge Widget which has to return * 7 Columns** Column 1: Value = Value for the Indicator in Percent** Column 2: MaxLimit = Maximum Limit of the Gauge, since the value isdetermined as percentage the default would be 1** Column 3: FromRange1 = Range until when the alerts are red and go to yellow** Column 4: FromRange2 = Range until when the alerts are yellow and go to green** Column 5: Actual Value as amount** Column 6: Target value, example budget** Column 7: Delta (difference between Target and actual Value* 2 Rows** Row 1: Labels** Row 2: Values

SAMPLE:

Value MaxLimit FromRange1 FromRange2 Turnover Budget Delta0.574056 1 0.6 0.9 516650.960000 900000.000000 383349.040000


/* @@Timeout=[1200]*/

DECLARE @Today AS DATETIME SET @Today = (SELECT CAST(FLOOR(CAST(GETDATE() AS DECIMAL(12, 5) )) AS DATETIME))/* Get the current Finance Year */DECLARE @FinancYear AS DATETIME SET @FinancYear = (SELECT T0.FinancYear FROM OACP T0 INNER JOIN OFPR T1 ON T0.PeriodCat = T1.Category

WHERE T1.F_RefDate <= @Today AND T1.T_RefDate >= @Today)

DECLARE @ThousSep AS nvarchar(10) SELECT @ThousSep = ThousSep FROM OADM

SELECT

'Value' AS Value

,'MaxLimit' AS MaxLimit

,'FromRange1' AS FromRange1

,'FromRange2' AS FromRange2

,'Turnover' AS Value

,'Budget' AS [Target]

,'Delta' AS Gap

UNION ALL

SELECT

CASE WHEN SUM(DebMonthlyBudget - CredMonthlyBudget) = 0 THEN '1.0' ELSECAST(SUM(Debit - Credit)/SUM(DebMonthlyBudget - CredMonthlyBudget) AS nvarchar(521)) END AS Value

,'1' AS MaxLimit


,'0.6' AS FromRange1

,'0.9' AS FromRange2

/* Retun the amounts in with SAP Business One settings for ThousandSeperator and always 0 decimals */

,REPLACE(REPLACE(CONVERT(varchar, CAST(ROUND(SUM(Credit - Debit),0) ASmoney),1),'.00',''),',',@ThousSep) AS Value

,REPLACE(REPLACE(CONVERT(varchar, CAST(ROUND(SUM(CredMonthlyBudget -DebMonthlyBudget),0) AS money),1),'.00',''),',',@ThousSep) AS [Target]

,REPLACE(REPLACE(CONVERT(varchar, CAST(ROUND(SUM(CredMonthlyBudget -DebMonthlyBudget) - SUM(Credit - Debit),0) AS money),1),'.00',''),',',@ThousSep) AS GapFROM COR_VIEW_FIN_FINANCE V1WHERE

/* Use current Finance Year Only */

Year = DatePart(year,@FinancYear)

/* Only use acoremask 40 of postable account and groupmask not eqal to 9*/

AND V1.CoreMask = '40'

AND V1.Postable ='Y' AND V1.GroupMask <> 9

AND V1.Type <> 'BTF1_JournalVoucher'


Sample Pie Chart - Sales (GEN70002)6.6.10.8.3

The Sample Pie Chart dashboard displays the Quantity of the Top 12 items in Stock in comparison to theQuantity Committed on Sales Orders.

Dashboard

Sample pie chart w ith legend

Click on the magnifier to hide the legend and enlarge the pie chart. To go back to the previous view, choose the information icon.


Sample pie chart w ithout legend

All sample queries delivered with the coresuite country package with prefix COR_PIE can be used for thisdashboard container


/****** General Information *****Name: COR_PIE_TopItemsDescription:Returns the Top 10 Items by Sales Revenue(Total of all Invoices and Credit Memos)The data is gathered from the View: [COR_VIEW_SAR_SALES]


***** StartConfDesc *****This is a sample query for the Pie Chart Widget which has to return * 2 to 3 Columns** Column 1: Name = Description in the Legend** Column 2: Value = Value to display in the Pie Chart


** Column 3: Color (Optional) = Color to display in Hexadecimal Format* 0 to 10 Rows** Maximal 10 parts are displayed in the Pie Chart


/* @@Timeout=[1200]*/

SELECT TOP 10

SUBSTRING(ItemName,0,20) AS Name

,SUM(LineTotal) AS Value

/*,CASE ROW_NUMBER() OVER(ORDER BY SUM(LineTotal) DESC)

WHEN '1' THEN '43900A' /* GREEN */

WHEN '2' THEN 'EAA013' /* YELLOW */

WHEN '3' THEN 'B80D02' /* RED */

WHEN '4' THEN '234767' /* BLUE */

WHEN '5' THEN '161616' /* DARK GREY */

ELSE ''

END AS color*/FROM [COR_VIEW_SAR_SALES] WHERE ObjType IN ('13','14')GROUP BY ItemNameORDER BY SUM(LineTotal) DESC


6.6.11 FAQ

In our forum you will find an FAQ section for coresuite designer:http://forum.coresystems.ch/topic/1142-coresuite-designer-q-a/

Other frequent questions include:

What is the difference between the Datasources Document_88 and Document for Marketing Documents?See answer under Document_88 vs Document Datasource

Why is it very slow or I even get Timeout errors when printing marketing documents after upgrading SAPBusiness One to Version 8.8?See answer under How to use the new Datasource

Why are my VAT details not displayed in the Marketing Documents when using the DatasourceDocument_88?See answer under How to adjust VAT Subtotals

Why are my Batch Number details not displayed in the Marketing Documents when using the DatasourceDocument_88?See answer under How to adjust Batch Number details

Why are my Serial Number details not displayed in the Marketing Documents when using the DatasourceDocument_88?See answer under How to adjust Serial Number details

Why are wrong signs (+/-) displayed in the paid amount of payments (BAN10000)?See answer under How to fix sign errors in payments

http://forum.coresystems.ch/topic/1142-coresuite-designer-q-a/


Document_88 vs Document Datasource6.6.11.1

Due to new tables introduced in SAP 8.8 for batch and serial numbers, we introduced a new datasourcedocument_88 for Marketing documents. The datasource document is still available for compatibility reasons but not used in the latest version of thecoresuite country package. The datasource may still be used in user defined layouts.

The tables on the following pages explain the similarities and differences between these two datasource andwhen you should use which datasource.

Description Document_88 Document

Supported SAP Business Oneversions

SAP Business One 2007 SP01SAP Business One 8.8

SAP Business One 2007SAP Business One 8.8

We experienced majorperformance issues in version 8.8when using this datasource in acompany database that handlesmany batch or serial numbers.

Handling of VAT subtotals

The former datasource"Document" included 5 queriesfor compatibility reasons.These were replaced by onequery in the new datasource"Document_88" to improve theoverall performance.

Available datasource queries are:B1_Data.Document.DocumentDocumentWithExpDpmVatSum

When changing an existinglayout to use the new datasource"Document_88" the databand thatdisplay the VAT Subtotals must beadjusted. See details below.

Available datasource queries are:B1_Data.Document.DocumentVatSumB1_Data.Document.DocumentDpmVatSumB1_Data.Document.DocumentExpVatSumB1_Data.Document.DocumentDocumentWithExpVatSum B1_Data.Document.DocumentDocumentWithExpDpmVatSum

Handling of batch numbers Available datasource queries are:

B1_Data.Row.RowRowBatchNumbersRelevant data from tables:SAP Business One 8.8

OITL - Inventory Transaction LogITL1 - Serial & Batch Details inTransactionOBTQ - Batch Number Quantities

SAP Business One 2007OIBT - Batch Numbers for ItemIBT1 - Batch Number Transaction

B1_Data.Row.RowRowBatchNumbers.BatchNumbersMasterRelevant data from tables:

OBTN (Batch Numbers MasterData) OR in case of draft documents

Available datasource queries are:

B1_Data.Row.RowRowBatchNumbersRelevant data from tables (VIEW inSAP Business One 8.8)

OIBT - Batch Number for ItemIBT1 - Batch Number Transaction


Description Document_88 Document

OBDN (Batch Numbers - Draft -Master Data)

For SAP Business One version2007 the datasourceBatchNumbersMaster returns anempty row

Handling of serial numbers Available datasource queries are:

B1_Data.Row.RowRowSerialNumbersRelevant data from tables:SAP Business One 8.8

OITL - Inventory Transaction LogITL1 - Serial & Batch Details inTransactionOSRQ - Serial Number Quantities

SAP Business One 2007OSRI - Serial Numbers for ItemSRI1 - Serial Number Transactionfor Item

B1_Data.Row.RowRowSerialNumbers.SerialNumbersMasterRelevant data from tables:

OSRN (Serial Numbers MasterData) OR in case of draft documentsODSN (Serial Numbers - Draft -Master Data)

For SAP Business One version2007 the datasourceSerialNumbersMaster returns anempty row.

Available datasource queries are:

B1_Data.Row.RowRowSerialNumbersRelevant data from tables (VIEW inSAP Business One 8.8)

OSRI - Serial Numbers for ItemSRI1 - Serial Number Transactionfor Item


RowBatchNumbers6.6.11.1.1

Fields RowRowBatchNumbersBelow is a detailed view of the fields in the datasource RowRowBatchNumbers

Name Description Document_88: OriginSAP Business OneTable.Field

Document: Origin SAPBusiness One Table.Field

DocEntry Unique key of the relevant document @@RDR1.DocEntry @@RDR1.DocEntry

LineNum Unique key of the relevant line/row inthe document

@@RDR1.LineNum @@RDR1.LineNum

Quantity Actual quantity of the batch in thedocument line

WHEN Sales Order THEN ABS(SUM(ITL1.AllocQty)) ELSE ABS(SUM(ITL1.Quantity))

IBT1.Quantity

TotalQuantity Total quantity of the batch in thedocument

WHEN Sales OrderTHEN ABS(SUM(ITL1.DocQty)) ELSE ABS(SUM(ITL1.DefinedQty))

-

Direction Batch is coming in or going out ofstock0: In (default)1: Out

WHEN SUM(ITL1.Quantity) > 0 THEN 0ELSE 1

IBT1.Direction

ItemCode Unique key for the item OITL.ItemCode OIBT.ItemCode

BatchNum Distinct number for batches OBTN/ODBN.DistNum OIBT.BatchNum

WhsCode Warehouse where the batch islocated

OBTQ.WhsCode OIBT.WhsCode

ItemName Description of the item OITL.ItemName OIBT.ItemName

SysNumber System number OBTN/ODBN.SysNumber -

SuppSerial Batch attribute 1 OBTN/ODBN.MnfSerial OIBT.SuppSerial

IntrSerial Batch attribute 2 OBTN/ODBN.LotNumber OIBT.IntrSerial

ExpDate Batch expiration date OBTN/ODBN.ExpDate OIBT.ExpDate

PrdDate Batch manufacturing date OBTN/ODBN.MnfDate OIBT.PrdDate

InDate Batch admission date OBTN/ODBN.InDate OIBT.InDate

Located Batch location OBTN/ODBN.Location OIBT.Located

Notes Batch details OBTN/ODBN.Notes OIBT.Notes

Quantity1 Duplicate field in datasourcedocumentActual quantity of the batch in thedocument row

- (Duplicate field indatasource document)

OIBT.Quantity

BaseType Transaction type-1, 0

OITL.DocType OIBT.BaseType




13 A/R Invoice15 Delivery16 Returns17 Sales Order18 A/P Invoice20 Goods Receipt PO21 Goods Return22 Purchase Order23 Sales Quotation59 Goods Receipt67 Inventory Transfer69 Landed Costs163 A/P Correction Invoice164 A/P Correction Invoice Reversal165 A/R Correction Invoice166 A/R Correction Invoice Reversal202 Production Order203 A/R Down Payment204 A/P Down Payment

BaseEntry Base document internal ID OITL.DocEntry OIBT.BaseEntry

BaseNum Base document number OITL.DocNum OIBT.BaseNum

BaseLineNum Base document row number OITL.DocLine OIBT.BaseLineNum

CardCode Business partner code OITL.CardCode OIBT.CardCode

CardName Business partner name OITL.CardName OIBT.CardName

CreateDate Batch creation date OBTN/ODBN.CreateDate OIBT.CreateDate

Status Status OBTN/ODBN.Status OIBT.Status

Direction1 Duplicate field in datasourcedocumentBatch is coming in or going out ofstock0: In (default)1: Out

- (Duplicate field inDatasource Document)

OIBT.Direction

IsCommitted Committed quantity OBTQ.CommitQty OIBT.IsCommitted

OnOrder Ordered - OIBT.OnOrder

CountQty Counted quantity OBTQ.CountQty -

Consig Consignment goods warehouse - OIBT.Consig

DatasSource Data source - OIBT.DataSource

UserSign User signature - OIBT.UserSign

Transferred Transferred - OIBT.Transferred

Instance Instance - OIBT.Instance

LogEntry Log internal ID MIN(OITL.LogEntry) -




TransId Transaction ID MIN(OITL.TransId) -

ManagedBy Management method10000044 - Batch Numbers10000045 - Serial Numbers4 - Item

OITL.ManagedBy -

StockEff Stock effect (default 0)0 - ACCUM_EMPTY1 - ACCUM_ON_HAND2 - ACCUM_COMMITTED

OITL.StockEff -

DocQty Doc. quantity SUM(OITL.DocQty) -

StockQty Stock affecting quantity(+): stock receipt (-): stock issue (0): stock quantity 0 for documentsthat do not affect the stock

SUM(OITL.StockQty) -

LocType Location type OITL.LocType -

AppDocNum Applied document number OITL.AppDocNum -

AbsEntry Primary key toBatchNumbersMaster

OBTN.AbsEntry -


RowSerialNumbers6.6.11.1.2

Fields RowRowSerialNumbersBelow is a detailed view of the fields in the datasource RowRowSerialNumbers



DocEntry Unique key of the relevant document @@RDR1.DocEntry @@RDR1.DocEntry

LineNum Unique key of the relevant line/row inthe document

@@RDR1.LineNum @@RDR1.LineNum

Direction Serialized Item is coming in or goingout of stock0: In (default)1: Out

WHEN SUM(ITL1.Quantity) > 0 THEN 0ELSE 1

SRI1.Direction

WhsCode Warehouse where the item islocated

OSRQ.WhsCode SRI1.WhsCode

ItemCode Unique key for the item OITL.ItemCode OSRI.ItemCode

SysSerial Distinct system number for serial OSRN/ODSN.SysNumber

OSRI.SysSerial

SuppSerial Manufacturer serial no. OSRN/ODSN.MnfSerial OSRI.SuppSerial

IntrSerial Serial number OSRN/ODSN.DistNum OSRI.IntrSerial

BatchId Lot number OSRN/ODSN.LotNumber OSRI.BatchId

ExpDate Serialized item expiration date OSRN/ODSN.ExpDate OSRI.ExpDate

PrdDate Serialized item manufacturing date OSRN/ODSN.MnfDate OSRI.PrdDate

InDate Serialized item admission date OSRN/ODSN.InDate OSRI.InDate

GrntStart Mfr warranty start date OSRN/ODSN.GrntStart OSRI.GrntStart

GrntExp Mfr warranty end date OSRN/ODSN.GrntExp OSRI.GrntExp

Located Serialized item location OSRN/ODSN.Location OSRI.Located

Notes Serial details OSRN/ODSN.Notes OSRI.Notes

Quantity Actual quantity of the serialized itemin the document line

WHEN Sales Order THEN ABS(SUM(ITL1.AllocQty)) ELSE ABS(SUM(ITL1.Quantity))

OSRI.Quantity

TotalQuantity Total quantity of the serialized itemin the document

WHEN Sales OrderTHEN ABS(SUM(ITL1.DocQty)) ELSE ABS(SUM(ITL1.DefinedQty))

-

BaseType Transaction type-1, 013 A/R Invoice15 Delivery

OITL.DocType OSRI.BaseType




16 Returns17 Sales Order18 A/P Invoice20 Goods Receipt PO21 Goods Return22 Purchase Order23 Sales Quotation59 Goods Receipt67 Inventory Transfer69 Landed Costs163 A/P Correction Invoice164 A/P Correction Invoice Reversal165 A/R Correction Invoice166 A/R Correction Invoice Reversal202 Production Order203 A/R Down Payment204 A/P Down Payment

BaseEntry Base document internal ID OITL.DocEntry OSRI.BaseEntry

BaseNum Base document number OITL.DocNum OSRI.BaseNum

BaseLineNum Base document row number OITL.DocLine OSRI.BaseLineNum

CreateDate Serial creation date OSRN/ODSN.CreateDate OSRI.CreateDate

CardCode Business partner code OITL.CardCode OSRI.CardCode

CardName Business partner name OITL.CardName OSRI.CardName

ItemName Description of the item OITL.ItemName OSRI.ItemName

Status Status OSRN/ODSN.Status OSRI.Status

Direction1 Duplicate field in datasourcedocumentSerialized Item is coming in or goingout of stock0: In (default)1: Out

- (Duplicate field inDatasource Document)

OSRI.Direction

DatasSource Data source - OSRI.DataSource

UserSign User signature - OSRI.UserSign

Transferred Transferred - OSRI.Transferred

Instance Instance - OSRI.Instance

LogEntry Log internal ID MIN(OITL.LogEntry) -

TransId Transaction ID MIN(OITL.TransId) -

ManagedBy Management method10000044 - Batch Numbers10000045 - Serial Numbers4 - Item

OITL.ManagedBy -




StockEff Stock effect (default 0)0 - ACCUM_EMPTY1 - ACCUM_ON_HAND2 - ACCUM_COMMITTED

OITL.StockEff -

DocQty Doc. quantity SUM(OITL.DocQty) -

StockQty Stock affecting quantity(+): stock receipt (-): stock issue (0): stock quantity 0 for documentsthat do not affect the stock

SUM(OITL.StockQty) -

LocType Location type OITL.LocType -

AppDocNum Applied document number OITL.AppDocNum -

AbsEntry Primary key toBatchNumbersMaster

OSRN/ODSN.AbsEntry -


How to use new Datasource6.6.11.2

IssueAfter upgrading SAP Business One to Version 8.8

It takes much longer to print or preview Marketing DocumentsThere is a Timeout error when printing or previewing Marketing Documents

ReasonNew Tables for Serial and Batch Numbers were introduced in SAP 8.8. The old Tables where replaces by SQLViews. When using these views in the original Datasource SQL Query combined in JOINs with other tables ittakes many resources to get the results. The more Serial and/or Batch Numbers are in a Company Databasethe slower it will be to return these Results.

SolutionUse the datasource Document_88 instead of Document in the affected Layouts.

1. Open a relevant document (example AR Invoice) and preview the layout by choosing Preview... or viaMenu > File > Preview.

2. From the preview launch the Layoutdefinition by choosing Print Layout Designer... or via Menu > Tools >Print Layout Designer...

3. Change the Datasource in the Layoutdefinition to "Document_88" and update the Layoutdefinition


How to adjust VAT Subtotals6.6.11.3

IssueAfter changing the Datasource in the Layout:

VAT Values are not displayed in the printout or preview anymore.When launching the Report Preview from the Designer the following Render message appears:

ReasonThe Datasources B1_Data.Document.DocumentVatSum, B1_Data.Document.DocumentDpmVatSum,B1_Data.Document.DocumentExpVatSum and B1_Data.Document.DocumentDocumentWithExpVatSum wereremoved in the Datasource Document_88.

SolutionUse the correct Datasource.1. Open the Sharpshooter designer from the Layoutdefinition by selecting the Open Designer Button2. Find the databand in the Document tree that displays the VAT Subtotals of the Document.

Example in the DIN Layout DocumentVATSum AdvancedDataBand

3. Change the DataSource Property of the Databand to the correct Datasource B1_Data.Document.DocumentDocumentWithExpDpmVatSum


How to adjust Batch Number details6.6.11.4


Details on Batchnumbers (for example Dates, Notes, User Defined Fields, ...) are not displayed in theprintout or preview anymore.When launching the Report Preview from the Designer a Render message appears to notify that certainDatasource field(s) related to Batch Numbers were not found:

The default Marketing DIN layout "Document DIN - LD (DOC00008)" delivered with the coresuite countrypackage is NOT affected by this issue as the relevant details are not displayed.

ReasonDue to the changes in the Table structure for Batch Numbers in SAP Business One we had to move the BatchNumber Details like Dates, Notes, User Defined Fields, ... to a new Datasource Query BatchNumbersMaster.

SolutionDraw the data from the new Datasource Query RowBatchNumbersBatchNumbersMaster1. Open the Sharpshooter designer from the Layoutdefinition by choosing Open Designer. 2. Find the databand in the Document tree that displays the Batch Number details of the Document on Item

Level.Example in the DIN Layout "Document DIN - LD (DOC00008)" look for the DocumentRowBatchNumbersAdvancedDataBand in the Document tree under > doc1 > page1 > Document > DocumentRow > RowGroup


3. Adjust the relevant Text Fields to draw the data from the new Datasource Query RowBatchNumbersBatchNumbersMaster.Example in the DIN Layout "Document DIN - LD (DOC00008)" use the relevant fields (Example CreateDate,ExpDate, UDF,...) of the subquery RowBatchNumbersBatchNumbersMaster of the AdvancedDataBandDocumentRowBatchNumbers under Bands.


How to adjust Serial Number details6.6.11.5


Details on Serial Numbers (for example Dates, Notes, User Defined Fields, ...) are not displayed in theprintout or preview anymore.When launching the Report Preview from the Designer a Render message appears to notify that certainDatasource field(s) related to Serial Numbers were not found:

The default Marketing DIN layout "Document DIN - LD (DOC00008)" delivered with the coresuite countrypackage is NOT affected by this issue as the relevant details are not displayed.

ReasonDue to the changes in the Table structure for Serial Numbers in SAP Business One we had to move the SerialNumber Details like Dates, Notes, User Defined Fields, ... to a new Datasource Query SerialNumbersMaster.

SolutionDraw the data from the new Datasource Query RowSerialNumbersSerialNumbersMaster.1. Open the Sharpshooter designer from the Layoutdefinition by selecting the Open Designer Button.2. Find the databand in the Document tree that displays the Serial Number details of the Document on Item

Level.Example in the DIN Layout "Document DIN - LD (DOC00008)" look for the DocumentRowSerialsAdvancedDataBand in the Document tree under > doc1 > page1 > Document > DocumentRow > RowGroup

3. Adjust the relevant Text Fields to draw the data from the new Datasource Query


RowSerialNumbersSerialNumbersMaster.Example in the DIN Layout "Document DIN - LD (DOC00008)" use the relevant fields (Example CreateDate,ExpDate, UDF,...) of the subquery RowSerialNumbersSerialNumbersMaster of the AdvancedDataBandDocumentRowSerials under Bands.


How to fix sign errors in payments6.6.11.6

IssueAfter upgrading coresuite from a version lower than 3.15 paid amounts in payments with layout BAN1000 aredisplayed with the wrong sign (+/-).

ReasonThe datasource DocumentPayment did not cover all different scenarios for outgoing and incoming payments ofInvoices, Credit Notes and Journal Entries for customers and vendors. There were cases when the wrong signwas displayed. To fix some of these errors in previous versions of coresuite the layout was adjusted with anextra condition to correct the signature in the Paid column of the layout.In coresuite version 3.20 we corrected the datasource DocumentPayment to return the correct sign. Thereforethe condition entered in the layout is not required anymore.

SolutionIf you use the original coresuite layout without any adjustments simply reinstall the layout. The version of thecorrected layout is equal or higher than 3.1100.If you have made adjustments to the layout and a reinstall would delete these adjustment there is one text boxthat needs to be adjusted:

1. Open the layoutdefinition Payment Notification - LD (BAN10000) and choose Open Designer to edit thelayout.

2. In the designer select the properties of the text box PaidAmountDetails.

3. Choose Bindings and the property Value.The old incorrect value of this textbox in layoutdefinition version 2.9203 is:iif(DB_Payment("LineObjType") = 14 Or DB_Payment("LineObjType") = 19, iif(isFC,DB_Payment("OriginalCurr") &" "& LD.FStr(DB_Payment("AppliedFC")* -1, "N"),LD.FStr(DB_Payment("SumApplied")* - 1,"N")),iif(isFC,DB_Payment("OriginalCurr") &" "& LD.FStr(DB_Payment("AppliedFC"), "N"),LD.FStr(DB_Payment("SumApplied"),"N")))

4. Delete the value and enter the following instead:iif(isFC,DB_Payment("OriginalCurr") &" "& LD.FStr(DB_Payment("AppliedFC"), "N"),LD.FStr(DB_Payment("SumApplied"),"N"))

CONTACT

For further information and support, please visit our website:www.coresuite.com

Infoline:+41 (0)848 088 088

Address:coresystems agVilla im Park5210 WindischSwitzerland

Help Country Package Manual Country Package En

Documents

Transcript of Help Country Package Manual Country Package En